Mac Puarsa Mrl

Codes Displayed by the MicroBasic Controller

A01 A02 A03 A04 A05 A06 A07 A08 A09

REASON FOR LIFT NOT STARTING (A) COMPONENT Safety circuit fuse (FM) blown Safety circuit open Motor therms or machine room temperature device tripped 110% load Attendant control active Door contact open - manual doors Door open push (PAP) or door sensitivity (SEN) or photocell (CEL) open Car door contact and landing lock circuit open Car or hall call for floor where car is positioned (keeping doors open) LIST OF CONDITIONS (E) CONDITION - (DIGIT NOT FLASHING)

E01 E02 E03 E04 E05 E06 E07 E08 E09 E10 E11 E12 E13 E14

100% overload (active) Attendant control (active) car door & landing locks (closed) Safety zone, levelling (active) Safety cct prior to locks (active) Not in use Level circuit (closed) Not in use Lower prelimit [slow limit] (closed) Upper prelimit [slow limit](closed) Inspection control (active) Manual Doors - series cct (closed) Door open cct PAP SEL SEN (closed) STOP cct [sill switch] (open)

CONDITION - (DIGIT NOT FLASHING)

E15 E16 E17 E18 E19 E20 E21 E22 E23 E24 E25 E26 E27

Firemans switch [car] (active) Levelling down direction Firemans switch [landing] (active) High speed relay (active) Relay (CB) or (CL) (active) Safety circuit fuse [FM] (closed) Pin f-P2 active, arrival gong trig Lift resetting Temporarily out of service Permanently out of service Lift in travel Lift in slow speed End of service

ERRORS (F) F01 F02 F03 F04 F05 F06 F07 F08 F09 F10 F11

REASON Running timer tripped Safety circuit open Final limit opened and re-closed Stuck contactor circuit tripped Repeat fault - door interlock circuit Series of open doors in operation Series of open interlocks during service Misregulation of pulses Control fuse (FM) or supply open MicroBasic PCB fault Door circuit open too long

REASON F12 F13 F14 F15 F16 F17 F18

PAP SEL SEN

circuit open too long Car between floors prelimits open Both prelimits open Up prelimit opens in down travel Down prelimit opens in up travel Parameters incorrect (new input) Inverter drive fault (traction lifts)

F19 F26 F27

Button of operating panel stuck Lift level CPS circuit open CPS not changing going into floor

3VFMAC-DSP Frequency Converter

PROVISIONAL AND PARTIAL Technical Dossier V0.2, MAR.04 English / 3VFMAC-DSP_UK

Installation • Assembly• Star-Up Use • Maintenance • Repair

PRODUCT TECHNICAL MANUAL 3VFMAC-DSP FREQUENCY CONVERTER

Provisional VERY IMPORTANT: This document is provisional and includes partial information only, which is complemented by the 3VFMAC1 v3.00 frequency changer manual. For any doubts that may arise during the operating of the frequency changer, please consult MP Lifts. CONTENTS

1. COMPATIBILITY BETWEEN F SERIES AND DSP VERSIONS ........................................................................... 2 2. GENERAL FEATURES................................................................................................................................ 3 2.1. New features ............................................................................................................................... 3 2.2. Technological improvements ......................................................................................................... 3 2.3. Improvements in comfort.............................................................................................................. 3 3. UNIVERSAL CONNECTION ........................................................................................................................ 4 4. GENERAL DIAGRAMS............................................................................................................................... 6 4.1. MicroBASIC controller ................................................................................................................... 6 4.2. SERIE controller........................................................................................................................... 7 5. INFORMATION SUPPLIED BY THE BOARD................................................................................................... 8 5.1. Led indicator lights....................................................................................................................... 9 5.2. Five-digit display (console)............................................................................................................ 9 6. USER INTERFACE...................................................................................................................................11 6.1. Parameterisation.........................................................................................................................12 6.2. Visualising the information through display (monitoring)..................................................................13 6.3. PALM control ..............................................................................................................................14 7. LIST OF PARAMETERS ............................................................................................................................14 8. DESCRIPTION OF ERRORS ......................................................................................................................20 9. ADJUSTMENT AND FINE-TUNING OF THE INSTALLATION ............................................................................22 9.1. Preliminary aspects .....................................................................................................................22 9.2. General adjustments ...................................................................................................................23 9.3. Levelling adjustment ...................................................................................................................24 9.4. Vibrations ..................................................................................................................................25

V0.2 MAR.04

Page 1

3VFMAC-DSP_UK


Provisional 1. COMPATIBILITY BETWEEN F SERIES AND DSP VERSIONS The new DSP frequency changer is fully compatible with the old F series version, to such an extent that if it is necessary to replace the latter with the new DSP version, neither the wiring nor the original fastenings of the controller need be changed. It is only necessary to reduce the number of poles of the plug-in terminal that is connected in the bottom-left corner of the frequency changer (XC4), which should be reduced from 8 to 6 poles, eliminating the two upper end terminals which are never wired (in F series controllers). The instructions to make this change are described in detail below. INSTRUCTIONS TO CONNECT THE XC4 PACKAGE: 1.

Photo 1 shows the connector with terminals 30 and 31 which overhang from the XC4 package of the frequency changer.

2.

Photo 2 shows where this connector must be separated (terminals 30 and 31 which are never wired) and the removal of its end cover.

3.

Photo 3 shows the new connector with two poles less, with the end cover positioned on the side of terminal 32 which was uncovered.

4.

Photo 4 shows the final connection in the PCB of the 3VF-DSP.

End cover

Uncovered side Photo 1

Photo 2

Photo 3

V0.2 MAR.04

Photo 4

Page 2

3VFMAC-DSP_UK


Provisional 2. GENERAL FEATURES IMPORTANT: On the date that this document was published, part of the features described below were not yet operational. These are marked with the symbol (†). 2.1. New features • •

Control of the asynchronous and synchronous motor. (†) Elimination of roll-back effect in start-up, by means of a weight reading by using MP’s VK2P weighing system.

•

Modelling of the machine by the direct parameterisation of the motor electrical constants (vector control). (†)

• •

High connectivity of encoders with a high number of pulses. Communication interfaces available: RS-485, ENDAT, SSI, Irda and CAN-BUS, which make it possible to monitor and control the system remotely. (†)

2.2. Technological improvements

•

Latest generation DSP technology (Texas Instruments) with 32-bit Flash technology and instruction times of up to 6 nanoseconds.

•

User-friendly scheduling interface, by using a market PDA terminal (PALM O.S.) without cables (infrared, Irda) or by using an on-board keyboard.

•

Application to gearless motor by operation at very low electrical frequencies (precision:

0.0078Hz).

High

precision

vector

control

with

Space-Vector

modulation which makes it possible to reduce the heat of the power transistors, allowing higher switching frequencies. 2.3. Improvements in comfort

•

Direct access due to exact positioning, which makes it possible to remove the landing approach span, eliminating unnecessary waiting times for users. (†)

•

Direct access to landing due to indirect calculation of car weight, eliminating the need for load-weighing switches.

•

Complete lack of electrical noise of the motor due to its switching frequency of up to 20 Khz, enabling its installation in machine room less lifts.

•

Quality of ride, thanks to self-adjustment of jerk, which eliminates the unpleasant sensation caused by acceleration during starting and stopping.

•

Precision on stopping, without position encoder. Levelling by time or by position (†).

•

Standard performance, independent of the supply voltage, thanks to its system which adapts to the network voltage.

V0.2 MAR.04

Page 3

3VFMAC-DSP_UK


Provisional 3. UNIVERSAL CONNECTION Voltage-free contact control

W

M ~3

Machine

V K1 U K2

Output filter

Contactors

Input filter

W

V

U

CAPACITORS (Only in 10HP, 15HP and 20HP. Supplied with capacitor)

R

General power supply

S -CE

Contactor reading filter

T

+CE

C1

+ C2 +

Control signals

FLC

11

*RUN

12

12

*Nominal speed

13

13

2 speeds

14

14

*Inspection speed

15

2 Accel. / Decel.

16

16

17

17

18

18

*Up / down Reset Error

XC2

11

Communication XC10 VS: control

15

B2 50 49

19

19

48

Ground network

XC9

Communication VS: encoder

1 2

C1-

3

3

4

4

C2+ C2-

XC11

5

(+) 10V 20 (-) 0V 21

XC6

22 23

K2

22 23

Contactor control

32

32

33

33

34

34

XC4

A2

B1

35 110Vac

Safety series

Brake resistance: 5HP 400V: 60hms, 520W 230V: 20hms, 600W 10HP 400V: 40hms, 1040W 230V: 14hms, 1040W 15HP 400V: 30hms, 1400W

21

XC3

A1

A2

R

20 XC3

Pulse reading

K1

2

5

Low cost encoder

A1

1

C1+

XC6

0Vac

Communication CAN control

XC2

* Necessary connections

Multipole encoder 5Vdc

-

RL1

PCB 3VF DSP

20HP 400V: 30hms, 400W

TRIAC

35

36

36

37

37

RL3

XC4

24Vdc

V0.2 MAR.04

KRFR

XC5

Brake control

T2 T1

Ventilation fan

0Vdc

Page 4

3VFMAC-DSP_UK


Provisional It is important to pay special attention to the power cables so that all of these cables (U, V, W, C1, C2, CE+, CE-, B1, B2) remain above the strip of pins in the way the installation is wired in the following photo.

Strip of pins

V0.2 MAR.04

Page 5

3VFMAC-DSP_UK

PRODUCT TECHNICAL MANUAL

3VFMAC-DSP FREQUENCY CONVERTER

Provisional 4. GENERAL DIAGRAMS

4.1. MicroBASIC controller

COND

20

(+)

20

21

(-)

21

FS

FE

R S T

L2

L3

B2

B1

L1 L2 L3

3VF-DSP

R S T

L1

T3

T3

L3

T2

T2

L2

T1

U V W C1 C2

K1

L1

T1

U V W

M 3~

23

B2

22 ( MB )

B1

B

380 Vp

0 Vp

2

1

61

K2 62

T

TRM

0 Vdc

T

5

3 ( MB )

T

4 ( MB )

14

110 Vs 20 Vs 60 Vs 48 Vs 80 Vs 0 Vs

RMT1

15

106

FM 5

9

5

6

A1

FLC

A2

K1

RMT 1

SCC

KRSE

13

A

G2R - 2 110 Vac

27

RMT2

A1

A KRNS A2

11 RMR

RZS RVR

RM

23 24

12

7

12

K2

A1 A2

8

A

34

25

35

RET

KRL 2

RB

13 a

102

105

RZS

MY 4 A1 110 Vac

9

A2

KRSE

RS 26

14

24 21 KRNS

104 17

SAF

SP

00

103

SIR

SPRS

SPRB

STOPF

(-)

(+)

220

SFI

K1

K2

SLVH

14

14

208

A2

KRREV

A1

19 ( MB )

13

D

3VF-DSP

13

GRL (+)

~1

(-)

19

~1

KRSE

~2

~2

GRF

STLH

STOP

PIN 103

18

11

12

24

14

6

3

KRFR

1

8

KRFR

11

21

KRLE

KRLE

220 Vp 0 Vp 48 Vs 60 Vp 0 Vs 110 Vs

17

220 Vp 0 Vp 48 Vs 60 Vp 0 Vs 110 Vs

KRREV

RZS

RPA

16

3VF-DSP

RMP

SAC

SCE

A

15

12 11

KRL3

204 ( SM )

206 ( SM )

SCTH

SFS

G2R2 24 Vdc

A

LE ( - )

LE ( + )

36

+ 24 Vdc

BYT11 - 1000

c

BYT11 - 1000

220 Vp

62

K1

RF

QIM

61

12

KRNS 11

11

FLC


3VF-DSP

+ CE - CE

K2

22

( IN1 )

22

3VF-DSP

Low cost Encoder connection

XC3

SM

Industrial encoder connection

C2C2+ C1C1+ + SM

LE + LE -

37

7

2

KRFR

MK2P 24 Vdc

0 Vdc

3VFMAC-DSP_UK

Page 6

V0.2 MAR.04

1

+ 5 Vdc

MicroBASIC

2 C1 + 3 C1 4 C2 + XC6 5 C2 -

3VF-DSP + 24 Vdc



Provisional 4.2. SERIE controller

COND

FE

R S T

L2

L3

B2

B1

L1 L2 L3

3VF-DSP

R S T

L1

T3

T3

L3

T2

T2

L2

T1

U V W C1 C2

K1

L1

T1

1

B2

QIM 2

B1

RF

K2

K1

380 Vp 220 Vp 0 Vp

KP1 (XSM1)

62 61

61

62

23

24G (XSM1)

22

3VF-DSP 21

22

20

21

( IN1 )

20

(-)

Low cost encoder connection

XC3

SM

(+)

C2C2+ C1-

TRM

FLC

110 Vs 20 Vs 0 Vs 0 Vs

A1

35

34

A2

K1

KRL 2

K2

A1 A2

B

S

1H

Contactor control

STLH

SCE 8H

SFI

8C

1

8

7C

3

6

KRFR

KRFR

SFS

SPC

220 Vp 0 Vp 48 Vs 60 Vp 0 Vs 110 Vs

11

FLC

SLVH

6H

(-)

(+)

GRF

7H

~1 ~2

3VF-DSP

12


2H

14

14

2C

K2

K1

6S

13

13

XC10

SAC

A

+ 24 Vdc

X3VF

36

3C

F1 ( SM )

F2 ( SM )

KRL3

3´C

37

7

2

5S

MK2P 24 Vdc

STOPC

5H

XC11

SIR

SIB

SIS

STOPF

In case of exact positioning

XENC

0 Vdc

KRFR

PCB-SM

BYT11 - 1000

-

C1+

+ SM

3VF-DSP

+ CE - CE

K2

FS U V W

M 3~

Industrial encoder connection

1 2 C1 +

+ 5 Vdc

5H

4C

3VFMAC-DSP_UK

Page 7

V0.2 MAR.04

3 C1 4 C2 + XC6 5 C2 -

3VF-DSP + 24 Vdc


Provisional 5. INFORMATION SUPPLIED BY THE BOARD Below we have included a diagram of the PCB which shows the elements that supply visual information. All of this information is included in the following points.

CONSOLE V0.2 MAR.04

Page 8

3VFMAC-DSP_UK


Provisional 5.1. LED indicator lights BLOCK

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

LED NO. HIGH

DESCRIPTION OF LED

COLOUR

ON: there is a high voltage

Red

A

High voltage

B

Control of contactors

12

ON: contactors active

Red

B

RUN signal

13

ON: start command

Red

B

Nominal speed

14

ON: nominal speed command

Red

B

Second speeds

15

ON: second set of speeds active

Red

B

Inspection speed

16

OFF: inspection speed

Red

17

ON: second set of accelerations and decelerations active

Red

B

Second acceleration/deceleration

VOLTAGE

B

Up/down

18

ON: up

Red

B

Reset error

19

ON: error reset active

Red

C

CAN communication

CAN

Not applicable

Green

D

Emergency

EM

Not applicable

Green

D

Speed limit

SP

ON: above speed limit

Green

D

Contactors

K

ON: contactors active

Green

D

Brake

BK

ON: brake with power supply

Green

E

Encoder

ENCODER

Not applicable

Green

E

RS-485 communication

RS-485

Indicator: there is communication

Green

F

RUN

RUN

ON FIJO: RUN command not active

Green

INDICATOR: RUN command active

5.2. Five-digit display (console) See point “6.2. Visualising information through display (monitoring)”

POSITION

VISUALISATION

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

0

Frec

Command Frequency (Hz)

1

Encod

Encoder pulses

2

int s

Current intensity of U phase (digital units)

3

int r

Current intensity of V phase (digital units)

4

Ad in

rms output current intensity to motor (Ampere)

5

tens

Bus voltage (Volts dc)

6

Uerr

Last error

7

int d

Measured Magnetisation Current Intensity (Ampere)

8

int u

Measured Par Current Intensity (Ampere)

9

UEL

Measured speed (electric Hz)

10

rEU

Measured speed (r.p.m.)

11

EiUEL

Error in Built-in Terminal of speed PI (digital units)

12

EPUEL

Error in Proportional Terminal of speed PI (digital units)

13

An

Electrical angle

14

Udd

Magnetisation component of output voltage vector to motor (digital units)

15

Uud

Par component of output voltage vector to motor (digital units)

16

UdE

X component of output voltage vector to motor (digital units)

V0.2 MAR.04

Page 9

3VFMAC-DSP_UK


Provisional POSITION

VISUALISATION

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

17

UuE

Y component of output voltage vector to motor (digital units)

18

SEno

Sine of electrical angle (digital units)

19

CoSE

Cosine of electrical angle (digital units)

20

iurEF

Par current intensity of reference (digital units)

21

USlip

Slip (digital units)

22

UrEF

Mechanical reference speed (digital units)

23

Pso

Weight (Kg), if load cell available

24

Uer

Software version

25

SEriE

Equipment serial number

26

HOurS

Equipment operating hours

27

E4

Start phase

28

E2

Slip term in vector control (machine constant)

29

E3

Reference mechanical speed in Hz*128

30

E4

Output Iq of the filtered speed PI

31

E5

Electrical frequency

32

E6

Proportional constant of the speed PI

33

E7

Whole constant of the speed PI

34

E8

Weight offset

35

E9

VEL.10 parameter interpretation

36

E10

Maximum torque intensity (digital units)

37

E11

Minimum value of effective intensity in an electrical cycle (digital units)

38

E12

Reference magnetisation intensity

39

E13

Power control set point

40

E14

Electrical frequency offset 1 in stop for torque compensation (Hz*100)

41

E15

Approach speed 1 calculated according to torque compensation (Hz*100)

42

E16

Sine curve time (ms)

43

E17

Machine control variable of torque compensation statuses

V0.2 MAR.04

Page 10

3VFMAC-DSP_UK


Provisional 6. USER INTERFACE

The user interface is the area where the controller represents the information of its internal state (errors, functioning modes, etc.) and enables the maintainers to carry out a set of operations related to maintenance (configuration, metering, etc.) The interface that the user will find consists of 5 digits which show information and 4 push buttons, as shown in this diagram.

The access keys are: P/R: This push button has different functions, described below:

•

Back or return to previous menu, provided that the user is already inside a menu.

•

Enter Programming Mode. Press button down continuously.

•

Recording of Parameters. Once inside a parameter, this button must be pressed to record it and then exit.

Izq ÿ: This push button has different functions, depending on the level reached: At the menu level, it produces a movement to the left At the operations level, it reduces the value being operated At the parameters level it produces a movement to the left between the digits Drch ÷: This push button has different functions, depending on the level reached: •

At the menu level, it produces a movement to the right

•

At the operations level, it increases the value being operated

•

At the parameters level it produces a movement to the right between the digits

Intro ü: This push button has various functions: •

At the menu level, to enter inside the menu

•

At the operations level, execution of commands

•

At the parameters level, increase of value

V0.2 MAR.04

Page 11

3VFMAC-DSP_UK


Provisional 6.1. Parameterisation The monitoring of the parameterisation is shown below. These parameters are described in detail in chapter 7 of this manual

CUSTOMER CODE

START P/R

CODE EXAMPLE

ACCEPTED P/R

1s

GOES TO BLOCKS OF PARAMETERS

P/R

P/R

... EXAMPLE OF

PARAMETERISATION IN BLOCK CNF-

...

VALUE

NEW VALUE P/R

ACCEPTED AND RETURNED 1s

RETURN TO BLOCK 1 “CNF”

V0.2 MAR.04

Page 12

3VFMAC-DSP_UK



Provisional 6.2. Visualising the information through display (monitoring)

START

P/R Pos. 0

0.2s VALUE

Pos. 15

0.2s VALUE

Pos. 16

0.2s VALUE

RETURN TO POSITION 0

Pos. 1

0.2s VALUE

Pos. 14

0.2s VALUE

Pos. 17

0.2s VALUE

Pos. 30

0.2s VALUE

Pos. 2

0.2s VALUE

Pos. 13

0.2s VALUE

Pos. 18

0.2s VALUE

Pos. 29

0.2s VALUE

Pos. 3

VALUE

Pos. 12

VALUE

Pos. 19

VALUE

Pos. 28

VALUE

0.2s

0.2s

0.2s

0.2s

Pos. 4

0.2s VALUE

Pos. 11

0.2s VALUE

Pos. 20

0.2s VALUE

Pos. 27

0.2s VALUE

Pos. 5

0.2s VALUE

Pos. 10

0.2s VALUE

Pos. 21

0.2s VALUE

Pos. 26

0.2s VALUE

Pos. 6

VALUE

Pos. 9

VALUE

Pos. 22

VALUE

Pos. 25

VALUE

0.2s

0.2s

0.2s

0.2s

Pos. 7

VALUE

Pos. 8

VALUE

Pos. 23

VALUE

Pos. 24

VALUE

0.2s

0.2s

0.2s

0.2s

3VFMAC-DSP_UK

Page 13

V0.2 MAR.04


Provisional 6.3. PALM control Not available in this version. 7. LIST OF PARAMETERS

F GROUP

PARAM

SERIES

PERMITS DESCRIPTION

EQUIV.i CNF.00

15

Control Type

N

A

2

2

ii

FACTORY DESCRIPTION OF VALUES

RANGE

This parameter will determine whether it works

0: Scale

in open or closed loop

1:Vector

VALUE

1

2:10CV/400Vac CNF.01

24

Inverter type

1

1

Inverter model in terms of power supply and

3:10CV/220Vac

power.

4:15CV/400Vac

S/M

6:20CV/400Vac Maximum no. of errors that may appear in 3 minutes. After this period, the inverter is blocked until one of the following actions is CNF.02

30

Autoreset

2

2

taken:

0...5

5

The power supply is cut off -Terminal 19 activated -It enters in programming

CNF General

CNF.03

N/A

CNF.04

N/A

CNF.08

N/A

Configuration

Origin of commands CAN monitor

2

2

2

2

2

0

Specifies whether the origin of the commands

0: Terminals

will be the terminals or via CAN

1:CAN

Specifies whether to activate the monitoring via

0:NO

CAN

1: YES

In both, the customer’s code to access

0...9999

0

0...9999

0

0...65535

S/P

0

0

Customer’s access code to parameters

parameters is specified. It is done this way in order not to enter a value accidentally which

Customer’s CNF.09

N/A

access code to

2

0

1

1

later makes the parameterisation impossible.

parameters Gives information on the installation’s series CNF.10

N/A

Series number

number. This value is unique for each installation.

CNF.11

N/A

TR0.00

5

Software version Inspection speed

1

1

Reports the software version that the machine has recorded.

N/A

S/P

2

2

Speed in Inspection Operation (maintenance)

5.00...65.00Hz

15.00Hz

Electrical output frequency (scale) or motor TR0.01

31

Speed limit

2

2

rotation speed (vector), which when exceeded

0.00,0.25...

switches the KRL1 relay. A (0 Hz) does not

...45.00Hz

0.00Hz

activate RL1 (terminals 30 _ 31 and 32)

TR0

Enables logic of speed limit relay to be

Travelling.

configured. With a positive logic ( 1), the relay

General

will go to ON when the speed is above the set

parameters TR0.02

N/A

Speed limit relay logic

limit and Off when below. With a negative logic 2

2

(0), The relay will be ON when the speed is below the set limit or is zero, and it will be OFF

0: negative logic 1: positive logic

1

when it is above the limit. We take speed to mean Electrical output frequency (scale) or motor rotation speed (vector).

TR1 Travelling

TR1.00

1

V0.2 MAR.04

Nominal speed

2

2

Nominal speed 1

Page 14

10.00...65.00Hz

50.00Hz

3VFMAC-DSP_UK


Provisional F GROUP

PARAM

SERIES

PERMITS DESCRIPTION

EQUIV.i TR1.01

2

TR1.02

9

Approach speed Acceleration time

TR1.03

N/A

Travelling

Progressivity

TR1.04

10

TR1.05

N/A

time

2

Approach speed 1

01.00...15.00Hz

05.00Hz

2

2

Acceleration ramp time

00.30...10.00s

02.50s

0.10...15.00

1.50

00.30...10.00s

02.20s

0.10...15.00

1.00

The higher the value, the smoother the start of 2

2

2

2

2

2

The higher the value, the smoother the start of

Nominal speed

2

2

Nominal speed 2

10.00...65.00Hz

30.00Hz

TR2.01

4

Approach speed

2

2

Approach speed 2

01.00...15.00Hz

05.00Hz

TR2.02

11

2

2

Acceleration ramp time 2

00.30...10.00s

01.00s

TR2.03

N/A

2

2

0.10...15.00

01.50

00.30...10.00s

02.20s

0.10...15.00

1.00

Acceleration time Acceleration Progressivity

The higher the value, the smoother the start of

Factor TR2.04

12

TR2.05

N/A

Deceleration time

Progressivity

2

2

Deceleration ramp time 2

2

2

the curve and less smooth the end of the curve.

The higher the value, the smoother the start of Value 1 = neutral

RSN.00

N/A

Reverse Curve

2

2

RSN.01

25

Reverse Curve

2

2

RSN.02

26

2

2

RSN.03

27

2

2

RSN.04

28

2

2

RSN.05

N/A

2

2

RSN.06

13

2

2

RSC.00

N/A

2

2

RSC.01

N/A

2

2

RSN reverse ramp

Short Reverse

K End of Acceleration K Start of Deceleration K End of Deceleration Stopping curve time Levelling adjustment

Extension time on short floor Percentage of increase of

22 (T3)

STC.01

8 (T5)

Start/Stop Control

V0.2 MAR.04

Delay in brake before start Delay in brake before stopping

Reverse Curve Smoothness at the start of the acceleration

0: Standard 2: Sine

2

1...999

50

1...999

50

1...999

10

1...999

50

Time in milliseconds of stopping curve

1...3000

0.800

Levelling adjustment for load compensation

0..200

100

0...6000

0.000

0...100

50

00.01...02.50s

00.30s

00.01...02.50s

00.20s

ramp. Greater number: Greater smoothness Smoothness at the end of the acceleration ramp. Greater number: Greater smoothness Smoothness at the start of the deceleration ramp. Greater number: Greater smoothness Smoothness at the end of the deceleration ramp. Greater number: Greater smoothness

Expressed in milliseconds, this is the time the speed maintains on a short floor Expressed in %. The higher the percentage, the

command

STC.00

the curve and less smooth the end of the curve. Value 1 = neutral

Factor

STC


Deceleration

Ramp

Deceleration ramp time 1

3

Group 2

RSC

Only operational on sine curve (RSN.00 = 2).

TR2.00

TR2

Normal


Factor

Travelling

VALUE

2

Deceleration Progressivity

RANGE

A

Factor Deceleration


N

Acceleration TR1

ii

smoother the speed rectification on a short floor (reducing the approach time)

2

2

2

2

Delay between order to open brake and start of motor rotation Time between 0 speed and deactivation of brake

Page 15

3VFMAC-DSP_UK


Provisional F GROUP

PARAM

SERIES

PERMITS DESCRIPTION

EQUIV.i STC.02

23 (T4)

Delay in brake after stopping

ii


RANGE

VALUE

00.01...02.50s

00.50s

00.01...01.00s

00.15s

00...99cHz 00...99cHz

00.10

N

A

2

2

1

1

1

2

0

1

1...33

5

0

1

00.01...02.50s

1.00s

0

1

00.01...02.50s

0.02s

50...3000Kg

10CV: 450Kg 15CV: 630Kg 20CV: 900Kg

0 – 50

0

Number of return pulses of encoder

4..8, 500...5000

2000

Defines whether the motor is synchronous or

0: Asynchronous

asynchronous.

or induction

Time between deactivation of brake and cut-off of motor energy in stopping.

Switching STC.03

N/A (T2)

waiting time of contactors in start Practical 0

STC.04

N/A

speed in stopping.

STC

Digit 0, 1: practical 0 speed OFF Digit 2, 3: practical 0 speed ON

Current

Start/Stop

STC.05

N/A

Control

intensity value close to 0 Maximum time

STC.06

N/A

permitted for fall in current intensity Additional time so that residual

STC.07

N/A (T6)

current intensity is equal to zero.

PSO.00

32

PSO.01

33

PSO

Maximum Car Load

2

2

2

2

Maximum car load in kilograms. Only operational if weight control function is present.

Weight Control Extra par percentage with respect to nominal Extra Par %

applied to maximum load. Only operational if weight control function is present.

ENC Encoder

ENC.00

21

DRI.00

N/A

DRI.01

N/A

Number of return pulses

Motor typeiii

2

2

1

1

1

2

1

2

2

2

Time constant of rotor as motor Time constant DRI.02

N/A

DRI Machine Data

of the rotor as generator

DRI.03

20

Number of poles

Time constant of the rotor when this acts as the motor

Time constant of the rotor when this acts as the generator Number of poles of motor. NOT NUMBER OF PAIRS OF POLES.

0

10.0 – 1000.0ms

90.0ms

10.0 – 1000.0ms

90.0ms

2...50

4

0, table codesiv

0

Specifies the motor model. In doing so, vacuum current intensity is established, as well as the DRI.04

N/A

Motor Model

1

2

rotor time and the number of pairs of poles associated to the machine. The value does not last.

V0.2 MAR.04

Page 16

3VFMAC-DSP_UK


Provisional F GROUP

PARAM

SERIES

PERMITS DESCRIPTION

EQUIV.i

N

A

ii


RANGE

VALUE

10/400: 10.0 A 10/220:

Corresponds to the no-load intensity of the INT.00

19

Id

2

2

motor. Normally, do not modify the factory value.

15.0 A 2.0..24.0A 15/400: 12.0 A 20/400: 14.0 A 10/400: 10.0 A 10/220:

Gradually increase until correct lift INT.01

N/A

Start intensity

2

2

operation is achieved in all load situations (including the maximum). DO NO EXCEED.

15.0 A 2.0..24.0A

15/400:

Only valid in scale control 12.0 A INT

20/400:

Intensity Control

14.0 A The gradient between the output Iq of the speed PI and the Iq of the control system is: INT.02

N/A

Iq Filter

1

2

1...2048

150

(Iq Speed PI - Iq control system) 2(INT.01) Proportional INT.03

N/A

Constant PI Current

1

1

Expressed in digital units.

0...512

1

1

2


1...2048

150

1

1


0...512

1

1

2


0...50

0

Intensity Id Built-in INT.04

N/A

Constant Id Current Intensity PI Proportional

INT.05

N/A

Constant Id Current Intensity PI Built-in

INT.06

N/A

Constant Id Current Intensity PI Percentage of

INT.07

N/A

Overmagnetisat ion at 0 speed

V0.2 MAR.04

At nominal speed, the no-load intensity applied is INT.00. At speed 0, INT.00+(INT.00xINT.06)/100. NOT VALID IN SCALE CONTROL.

Page 17

3VFMAC-DSP_UK


Provisional F GROUP

PARAM

SERIES

PERMITS DESCRIPTION

EQUIV.i

ii


RANGE

VALUE

N

A

1

2


1...64000

8000

1

2


1...64000

8000

1

2


0...512

10

1

2


1...64000

15000

1

2


0...512

20

1

2


0...512

5

0

0

0...10

3

0...3.000

0.512

0...3.000

0.512

0 or 1 every digit

1000

Proportional VEL.00

N/A

Constant in Start Proportional

VEL.01

N/A

Constant Nominal Speed PI Built-in Constant

VEL.02

N/A

Nominal Speed PI

Proportional VEL.03

N/A

constant Approx. Speed PI Built-in

VEL.04

N/A

Constant Approx. Speed PI Built-in

VEL.05

N/A

VEL.06

N/A

Constant Stopping Speed PI Reserved

VEL

The gradient between the measured Wmotor

Speed Control

and the Wused in speed PI and frequency VEL.07

N/A

Measured motor speed filter

generation is: 1

2 (measured Wmotor – W Piw) 2(VEL.06)

Time for the VEL.08

N/A

speed stability

1

1

1

1

criterion VEL.09

N/A

Approx time established

Expressed in milliseconds. Once reached, operates the built-in terminal. Expressed in milliseconds. Only operational when the VEL.10 1 bit is at 1. - If the 0 digit (right) is at 1, a constant Id,Iq,We control will be carried out during approach. Adjusted with 0 value. - If the 1 digit is at 1, a constant Id,Iq,We control will be carried out during stopping. Adjusted with 0 value (activate with low inertia

VEL.10

N/A

Control of Speed PI

1

2

machine). - If the 2 digit is at 1, the speed PI will only be activated if a new speed has been read. If at 0, it is always activated. - If digit 3 is at 1, the “overboost” will be activated. If it is at 0, it deactivates. Only operational in magnet vector control.

V0.2 MAR.04

Page 18

3VFMAC-DSP_UK


Provisional F GROUP

PARAM

PERMITS

SERIES

DESCRIPTION

EQUIV.i PEC.00

14

PEC.01

N/A

PEC.02

N/A

PEC Power Electronic Converter

ADJ Channel adjustment

Switching Frequency Modulation Type Dead Time Minimum pulse

ii


RANGE

VALUE

5.5 - 20.0KHz.

15.0KHz

N

A

2

2

05.500KHz

2

2

Modulation Type

0

1

Value in microseconds

00.500..03.000µs

00.500µs

0

1

Value in microseconds

00.000..03.000µs

00.000µs

0: Triangular PWM 1:Space Vector

PEC.03

N/A

ADJ.00

N/A

Ir reading gain

0

1

0...65535

ADJ.01

N/A

Is reading gain

0

1

0...65535

0

1

0...65535

ADJ.02

N/A

width

Vdc 1 reading gain

i

The numbering begins at 0.

ii

Legend of permit types:

1

N: Normal A: Advanced Permits legend: 0: Not displayed 1: Displayed but value may not be changed 2: Displayed and value may be changed iii

Synchronous motor not operational.

iv

Table of motor models.

CODE

BRAND

MODEL

HP

100

REIVAJ

075.22.0.30

7.5

101

REIVAJ

095.22.0.60

102

REIVAJ

130.20.0.90

103

REIVAJ

200

KW

MACHINE CONSTANT (ms)

IO(A)

POLES 400V

230V

Motor

Generator

8.0

13.9

79.4

79.4

5.5

4

9.5

7

4

9.9

17.2

78.4

78.4

7.5

5.5

6

10.5

18.2

50.3

50.3

145.20.0.90

9.5

7

6

13.5

19.1

51.7

51.7

SASSI

240095A-WF4

5.5

4

4

4.7

8.1

82.3

61.7

201

SASSI

240095A-WF4

8.0

5.9

4

8.4

14.6

71.6

53.7

202

SASSI

240118A-WF4

10.0

7.35

4

9.6

16.6

90.9

68.2

203

SASSI

240142A-WF4

12.5

9.2

4

11.2

19.4

94.3

70.7

204

SASSI

240142A-WF4

15.0

11

4

14.2

24.6

88.5

66.4

205

SASSI

240171A-WF4

18.0

13.2

4

15.5

26.9

95.0

71.3

V0.2 MAR.04

Page 19

3VFMAC-DSP_UK


Provisional 8. DESCRIPTION OF ERRORS ERROR

DESCRIPTION

Err01

Not used

CAUSE

SOLUTION

Working situation detected in which the motor instantly consumes a higher current intensity that the maximum offered by the installation. Always caused by external causes, Err02

Overcurrent

which are usually serious problems: badly connected power cables, faulty connector, encoder with specific reading errors, too sudden

Locate the error. The repetition of this error may cause the destruction of the installation. If it is not possible to solve it, contact MacPuarsa and describe the error location in detail.

acceleration or deceleration, Machine flywheels with high inertia, etc. Check the power supply being applied to the

Err03

High network voltage

Maximum voltage permitted by

installation. EXCESSIVELY HIGH VOLTAGE

installation exceeded:

CAUSES THE DESTRUCTION OF THE

400 Model: Maximum 440Vac

INSTALLATION. IF 400 Vac ARE APPLIED TO

220 Model: Maximum 242Vac

THE INSTALLATION, IT WILL BE TOTALLY DESTROYED

Lower voltage than minimum voltage permitted by the installation Err04

Low network voltage

applied:

Check the power supply being applied to the installation. An excessively low voltage may prevent the installation form starting. Provisional power supply, heavy machinery

400 Model: Minimum 360Vac 220 Model: Minimum 195Vac

close to the installation, etc…. are possible causes of an instantaneous low network voltage error In general, check that the connections are

Err05

Error in encoder

The installation detects an incorrect reading of the encoder

correct. Check that the correct information has been entered in the ENC.00 parameter. Check that this fulfils all of that described in chapter 3 (manual 3VFMAC1). The most usual causes are: 1. Operating in scale control. This may be due to the INT.00 parameter being excessively low, and when the car is under a heavy load, the lift does not start.

The installation has supplied the Err06

Motor blocked

maximum current intensity for 6 seconds

2. Operating in vector control. It is possible that it has been configured as vector control and the encoder has not been installed. The installation will consider 0 speed and apply the maximum current intensity. 3. The machine brake does not open. If the car is overloaded and the lift may not start (both in scale and vector control), this error will appear.

V0.2 MAR.04

Page 20

3VFMAC-DSP_UK


Provisional ERROR

DESCRIPTION

CAUSE

SOLUTION Consult point 2.3 of the 3VFMAC1 manual to

Err07

The terminals C1 - C2 must be

see how the C1 - C2 terminals should be

Power terminals C1 - C2 not

shorted (with power cable) whilst

shorted with the K1 and K2 contactors. Check

connected

energy is supplied. If this disappears

the connections. It is also possible that the

instantly, the error will be generated

power contact is damaged in one of the contactors.

This error will appear when a short Err08

Short circuit

circuit occurs at the installation output. Try to reduce the approach speed span and operate in vector flow control (consumptions

Err09

Excess temperature

Excess temperature is due to a high

are lower). There is the possibility (although

rate working situation, with long

it is unlikely) that the installation ventilation

approach speed spans, and a high

fans become damaged. Check whether these

ambient temperature

remain off when energy is supplied to the inverter (lift in motion). If so, replace the installation.

Motor not connected. There is no Err10

load connected at the output of the frequency changer This may be caused in motors with defects,

Err11

Overspeed

The motor exceeds 20% of the

when there is excess load in the car, etc. The

theoretical speed

error may also appear if the installation is parameterised incorrectly.

No connection to motor. Imbalance. If a connection error appears in one of the motor stages, or there is a

Err12

strong imbalance of consumption in the stages, the error will be generated

Check the power cables from the output of the frequency changer (U - V - W) up to the motor terminals. Check the correct state of the motor (by measuring the resistance between stages) Check that the network voltage is not too low. If the problem persists, replace the

Err13

Error in capacitor (10 / 15 / 20 ) or

Electrolytic Capacitors. VERY IMPORTANT:

low network voltage at start of a

Before replacing the electrolytic capacitors,

service

MAKE SURE that the HIGH VOLTAGE LED is fully switched off. If not, there is a risk of an electric shock which may cause death

Err0A

Not used A serious error in the installation’s

Err0B

Error in parameters

configuration data has been

Check and correct all the parameters until the

detected. This error may not be

error disappears

reset Err0C

Not used

V0.2 MAR.04

Page 21

3VFMAC-DSP_UK


Provisional ERROR

DESCRIPTION

CAUSE

SOLUTION This error usually occurs when during a service, a contact of the safety chain is opened unexpectedly.

During a service, the EMERGENCY Err0E

Uncontrolled opening of contactors

STOP signal (terminal no. 12)

This error never renders the installation out

disappears; in other words, the K1

of use. This is automatically reset indefinitely.

and K2 contactors are deactivated

In MACPUARSA controllers, during inspections

unexpectedly

mode, the series are opened suddenly when a movement is stopped. This causes the FE error to appear after each movement in inspections.

The CNF.08 and CNF.09 values Err0d

Error in access code

(corresponding to the access code) must be the same

9. ADJUSTMENT AND FINE-TUNING OF THE INSTALLATION 9.1. Preliminary aspects •

Installation of positioning and levelling elements The positioning elements must be installed correctly: speed change pulses (start of deceleration) and levelling. The most important aspect is assuring that the distances between the start of deceleration and the levelling are CONSTANT, such that they are the same for ALL FLOORS. Logically, when the magnets (or shields) are initial installed, the levelling will not be entirely perfect (nor is it necessary), but level differences must not be too acute (maximum of 3 to 5 cm). Remember that a highly inaccurate and unequal installation of the pulse magnets (or shields) and highly inaccurate initial levelling will mean that, after adjusting the parameters (as stated below), the magnets will have to be repositioned, thereby having to repeat the entire adjustment process.

•

Counterweight Before proceeding to adjust the parameters, ensure that the lift counterweight is correct (equilibrium is reached at 50% of the car load).

If the installation is adjusted using an incorrect counterweight, and

subsequently the necessary weights for correct equilibrium are added, it is very probable that the adjustment process will have to be repeated. •

Friction In order to ensure adequate comfort and levelling of the lift, the installation must necessarily be adjusted when the friction (mainly with the guides) is not abnormal.

Acute friction, caused by incorrect guide

separation distances, may make an adequate adjustment infeasible. Friction with the guides immediately after the lift is installed reduces until it reaches a normal situation after hours of operation. Make an initial adjustment after installing the lift, and subsequently after one month of operation, check to see if it is necessary to slightly alter any parameter. NOTE: These effects are much more acute in lifts with a sling-frame chassis.

V0.2 MAR.04

Page 22

3VFMAC-DSP_UK


Provisional 9.2. General adjustments •

Nominal frequency, tr1.00: adjust the frequency in order to reach the nominal speed of the machine. See the specifications plaque.

•

Approach frequency, tr1.01: Normally at 5.00 Hz for 1 m/sec, and 3.50 Hz for 1.6 m/sec.

On some

occasions when operating in scale control at 1 m/sec., it must be lowered in order to achieve appropriate levelling.

Initially, attempt to adjust the levelling at a value of 5.00 Hz, and if an acceptable level is not

achieved, lower it, down to a minimum of 4.20 Hz (only in scale control). •

No-load intensity, int.00, and start intensity in scale control, int.01: Configure the lift in scale control (cnf.00 = 0), and order it to operate without any load in the car, thereby executing long runs. When it moves at nominal speed, read the “int d” magnitude. Take the reading while going both up and down. The figure obtained in both cases will be very similar. Enter the LOWER of both readings in int.00 and int.01.

•

NOTE: If, when performing this test, the lift does not start when starting from the highest floor to the lowest floor (service with no load in the car going down), slightly and gradually raise int.01 until it does start. If, after performing the test, the value obtained (for the “int d” readings) is below what was entered in int.01, do not modify this parameter, and only enter the reading obtained in int.00.

•

Type of comfort curve (S-curve), rsn.00: the 3VFMAC-DSP frequency changer incorporates a new, SINE type of comfort curve system, thereby providing a jerk very appropriate to human physiology. Normally, use this type, thereby setting rsn.00=2 (the equipment originally comes configured with this value).

All other

adjustments that are described below in this chapter are for this type of SINE curve. •

In the hypothetical case that you want to use the classic S-curves (MP ASITRON frequency changer), set rsn.00=0, and appropriately adjust the parameters, rsn.01, 02, 03 and 04 (parameters that in the sine type are NOT operational).

•

Number of pulses per encoder revolution, enc.00, and number of motor poles, dri.03: If operating in vector control (cnf.00 = 1), ensure that these two parameters have the correct values.

•

Switching frequency, pec.00: If operating in vector control, set the frequency at 15.0 kHz; the electrical hiss will thus disappear completely.

Operating in scale control, the maximum value is 10.0 kHz.

The

equipment automatically sets the frequency at this value when configured in scale control, such that if it is subsequently placed in vector control, the frequency will have to be modified and raised to 15 kHz. •

Acceleration time, tr1.02, and acceleration progressivity, tr1.03: The criteria to observe for adequate adjustment is to obtain a good comfort level. From the factory, the values are tr1.02 = 2.5 and tr1.03=1.5 (which are normally appropriate). By increasing tr1.03, the start of acceleration is smoother and the end of acceleration is quicker. NOTE: This parameter (tr1.03) is only operational with the S-type sine curve (rsn.00 = 2).

•

Deceleration time, tr1.04, and deceleration progressivity, tr1.05: The criteria to observe for adequate adjustment is to obtain a good comfort level and to ENSURE an approach speed span (slow) of at least 1 to 2 seconds before levelling. When working in vector control (cnf.00 = 1), an “E” will appear in the left-hand digit

V0.2 MAR.04

Page 23

3VFMAC-DSP_UK


Provisional in the “FrEC” information (where the set point frequency is represented at all times) when the speed is stabilised. During the approach, the “E” must appear at approximately 1 to 2 seconds. The factory values of deceleration time and progressivity are tr1.04 = 2.2 and tr1.05=1.0, respectively, values that are normally appropriate. Adequately readjust tr1.04 in order to achieve the aforementioned 1to 2-second approach speed. Slowly and gradually reduce tr1.05 in order to smooth out the final deceleration area (just before reaching the approach speed), thereby simultaneously making the start of deceleration quicker. •

1 floor (or short floor) service, rsc.01: On occasions, the nominal speed is not reached in a service, either because the floor is especially short or because it is not reached in service between contiguous floors (i.e., in 1.6 m/sec., or in 1 m/sec. lifts that work with large deceleration spans. Whenever this circumstance occurs (it will be noted because the nominal frequency will not be reached in “FrEC”), the rsc.01 parameter must be adjusted. It leaves the factory with a value of 50. It should be adjusted such that, by executing the service from floor to immediate floor, the (slow) approach speed span that is obtained before levelling is from 2 to 3 seconds (in vector control, it will be noted by the appearance of an “E” in the first digit of the “FrEC” representation). If rsc.01 is increased, the approach time will be reduced (and vice versa).

9.3. Levelling adjustment •

NOTES: o

Make the adjustments following the stated sequence. If the process is inverted, it will very difficult to correctly level the lift.

o

During the adjustment processes, it should not be endeavoured to level with the landing exactly. The objective is to achieve a uniform stop point (always the same), regardless of the load and of whether the service is going up or down.

At the end, the levelling magnets (or shields) will be moved in order to

make the lift stop point coincide with the level of the landing. •

Adjustment in order to compensate for the car load, rsn.06 The services that must be made in order to adjust the parameter that compensates for the load (rsn.06), shall ALWAYS be made going DOWN, WITH AND WITHOUT A LOAD in the car, thereby starting at the top level and going to an intermediate level (always the same) that is at least two floors from the top floor. After modifying the parameter, the indicated service shall be made (always the same) WITH and WITHOUT A LOAD in the car, thereby confirming if the levelling point coincides in both cases. If operating in vector control (cnf.00 = 1), with both an industrial encoder as well as with magnets, it is normally not necessary to modify the value of rsn.06 (which originally has a value of 100), given that the load is automatically compensated in this mode. In any event, if it were necessary, slightly increase the parameter (i.e., 110 ... 120). If operating in scale control (cnf.00 = 0), it will be necessary to increase the value considerably. Start from a value of 130 to 140, and gradually increase (or decrease) until adequate levelling is achieved, both with and without a load in the car. NOTE: Prefect levelling is not achieved in scale control (as it is in vector control), wherefore deviations of +/- 1 cm must be allowed. If this is not achieved, slightly lower the approach speed, tr01.01, but do not adjust to values below 4.2 Hz. Only lifts with very reduced and regular friction levels allow an adjustment of the approach speed below 4.2 Hz while operating in scale control.

V0.2 MAR.04

Page 24

3VFMAC-DSP_UK


Provisional •

Levelling in up and down, rsn.05 The services that must be performed in order to adjust the parameter that allows levelling at the same point in both up and down (rsn.05) shall ALWAYS be WITHOUT A LOAD in the car and have an intermediate floor (ALWAYS THE SAME) as the destination floor, thereby starting in one case from an upper floor (down testing) and in the other case, starting from a lower floor (up testing). The origin and destination floors shall be at least two floors distant.

After each modification of the parameter, the two indicated services shall be

performed (always the same as regards the destination and objective floors, and without a load in the car), thereby confirming if the levelling point coincides in both cases. If, in the down service, a stop point is obtained that is higher than the one obtained in the up service, slightly and gradually increase rsn.05 (i.e., from 0.800 to 0.850). If, in the down service, a stop point is obtained that is lower than the one obtained in the up service, slightly and gradually lower rsn.05 (i.e., from 0.800 to 0.750). •

Repositioning the level magnets (shields) The prior adjustments allow making the lift stop at the same point, with and without a load, in up and down. Now, this point (already uniform) must be made to coincide with the landing level. To do so, appropriately move the magnets (shields) that determine the levelling point of each floor, thereby correcting the deviations that exist at each stop. NOTE: If the modification in any case is greater than 5 cm, the deceleration start points will have to be modified (pulse magnets or shields) so that the deceleration and approach span to each floor is kept constant.

9.4. Vibrations If there are considerable vibrations during the (slow) approach speed, try to reduce them by taking the following actions: •

Modify vel.03; vibrations are normally reduced by raising its value.

•

Modify dri.01, if there are vibrations going down, with one person in the car

•

Modify dri.02, if there are vibrations going up, with one person in the car.

If they persist, contact MP.

V0.2 MAR.04

Page 25

3VFMAC-DSP_UK

ASCENSORES

Customer Dates

MACPUARSA Leonardo da Vinci, s/n, Parc. TA-13 41092 - SEVILLA - ESPA¥A Tel.:+34 954 630 562 - Fax:+34 954 657 955

: Nombre Cliente

Simplex

Customer

Universal

Duplex

: Ref. Cliente.

Down Selective

Triplex

Y/Reference

Up Selective

Cuadruplex

: Ref. MAC.

Full Selective

O/Reference

Features

MicroBASIC

Encoder Imanes

10

Industrial encoder

0

1

2

3

4

6

7

8

Soft starter

9

10

delta/star start

Hydraulic

direct start

Hydraulic

5

11

13

50 Hz

14

15

/ 400 V Frecuency:

10 CV

Power/Voltage

12

P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 P7 P8 P9 P10 P11 P12 P13 P14 P15 P16

N§ of stops:

Sequence:

Motor/Central

1 Speed 2 Speed 3VFMAC1 OMRON

Comments * Machineroomless Lifts (SCM).

General table of contents

6

5

4

3

2

1

Main contactor

Controller tranformer

Power connections

Filters.

Components abbreviation definition

Quality control certyficate

General table of contents

Presentation

Contentsssd

7

Page

8 Safety series

22

21

20

19

18

17

16

15

14

13

Cam signal operator.

Tree-phase operator

Single-phase operator

Mac magnetic switch325.

Shaft and car ground.

Inspecti¢n box.

Car calls connectors.

Lighting. upper/lower terminal stopping switch. stop

Landing calls connectors.

Lightins

WEIGHT CONTROLLER

Auxiliary relay contact.

Battery

9

23

Telephone

10

24

Change 2C/1H

Speed governor

25

Change 2C/2H

Industrial encoder

26

11

27 Change 1C/1H

12

28

2 Page // 29.Mar.2004 Nombre Cliente

ASCENSORES

/ 400 V 10 CV Ref. Cliente. Client ref.

Ref. MAC.

AGC

Leonardo da Vinci, s/n, Parc. TA-13 Tlf.: +34 954 630 562 - Fax.: +34 954 657 955 Technical Department

27.Feb.2003 Modified

Approved

General table of contents Down Selective. Simplex. Controller Technical department Date Name

3VFMAC1 (ASCM) MAC

24.Feb.2003 Made

9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

ASCENSORES

Model no.:

Type of equipment:

Manufacturer's name:

Ref. MAC.

MicroBASIC

Control driving for electric and oil-dynamic lifts

MACPUARSA

QUALITY CONTROL CERTYFICATE FOR CONTROL BOARD

Serial no.:

1. Electric connections were installed according to project. 2. Symbols of clamps and devices corespond with symbols in electric scheme. 3. Section and type of used wires corespond with the one in project. 4. The state of isolation of electric circuits and device as well as shock protection fulfill the requirements of obligatory rules. 5. Device realizes correctly all expected functions. Symulation of operation states ended with positive result.

In the manufactoring there is quality system type ISO-9001.

Elements of a/m control board were manufactured and assembled according

SPAIN Fax.: +34 95 465 79 55

Utebo

ZARAGOZA

-

e-mail: [email protected]

SPAIN Tel.: +34 97 678 82 61 - Fax.: +34 97 678 81 53

50180

Polg. Ind. El µguila, Ctra. de Logro¤o Km. 13,400

Quality departament

Francisco Jose Lora Caballero

Signature:

to conditions of Office of Technical Inspection decision no. UDT-017/4

-

-

TA-13.

dated 16.06.1993, 12.12.1997 and 12.09.1999.

29.Mar.2004

Place: Sevilla

Date:

MAC-PUAR,S.A.

SEVILLA

C\ Leonardo da Vinci, s\n - Parcela 41092

Tel.: +34 95 463 05 62

e-mail: [email protected]

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Components abbreviation definition BO: Landing push-button panel connector

C4: Relay outputs

CAC:Car lighting connector

C5: Series communication

CAF: Pit power supply connector

C6: Industrial encoder connection

CAH: Shaft lighting connector

ENC: Encoder conector

CAR: Inspection box power supply connector

LA: Lighting power supply

CB: Car push-button panel - inspection box connector

LF: Power supply switch

CB1: Car push-button panel - controller connector

ML2D: Load control connector

CC1: Car connections 1

P1: MicroBASIC PCB connector





CCA1: Car auxiliary connector


CCTF: Controller panel - inspection box telephone connector

RB: Shaft light connector

CCS: Overload and complete connector

RB': Top car light connector

CF: Magnetic switch / photoswitch connector

SMF: Machine

CH1: Shaft connections 1

SMM: Machine room connectors. Control wiring

CH2: Shaft connections 2

TS: THERMAL PROBE CONNECTORS:

CHA: Landing auxiliary connector

XAFI: Lower stopping limit switch connector

CHTF: Pit telephone connector

XAFS: Upper stopping limit switch connector

CR2: Inspection box-controller connector

XCE: Landing door lock connector

CR3: Door operator connector

XCT:

CRA1: Inspection box auxiliary connector

XFC: Final switch connector

CRTF: Inspection box telephone connector

XCTS: Shaft stop connector

CTS: Pit stop connector

XCTL: Limiter cable tension contact connector

C1: Fan supply

XLV: Speed limiter contact connector

C2: Digital inputs.Control box signal connection

XCS: Doors series connector

C3: Magnets encoder connection

XCA: Outside locks series connector

Name Made

MAC

Modified

Technical Department

Approved

AGC

Date 24.Feb.2003 27.Feb.2003

Controller Technical department

room

connectore.

Power wiring.

Hatch contact connector

Down Selective. Simplex.

Components abbreviation definition

3VFMAC1 (ASCM)

Ref. MAC.

Client ref.

Ref. Cliente.

Leonardo da Vinci, s/n, Parc. TA-13 Tlf.: +34 954 630 562 - Fax.: +34 954 657 955

10 CV

ASCENSORES

/ 400 V

Nombre Cliente

29.Mar.2004

Page //

4

TRANSFORMER

CAM FILTER

FILTER CONNECTION

CONNECTION

TYPE B FILTER

2

TYPE A FILTER

BLACK

RED

BLUE

GREEN

PANJIT

UF-3010

PANJIT

UF-3010

PANJIT

2

PINK

220 ohm

110V

RED

60V

RED

100 ohm

1

V1

1

2

1

V1

R1

2

1

V2 2

1

V3 2

V4 2 PANJIT

RED

UF-3010

220V

YELLOW

1

C1 220 Kp 400V

2

PANJIT

k1 A2

470 ohm

UF-3010

A1

1

GREEN 380

PANJIT

2

(-) *2

UF-3010

220 Ohm 2W

220

RESISTENCE

PANJIT

(-) *1

TRM 0Vp

2

V4

0Vs

1

R1

1

V3

VALVES FILTER CONNECTION

PANJIT

20

UF-3010

48

TYPE D FILTER

60

2

UF-3010

2

1

V2 PANJIT

2

1

V1

FILTER CONNECTION

80

PINK

1

V1

CONTACTOR COIL

110

FV VALVES FILTER

1

PANJIT

UF-3010

2

100 Kp 400V

Orange(-) (-)

1

V1

C1 2

9

2

220 Ohm 2W

1

C1

*2

R1 2

8

UF-3010

220 Ohm 2W

7

TYPE D FILTER

1

R1 2

1

220 Kp 400V

*1

1

R1

6

TYPE C FILTER

BLUE

BLUE

1 220 Ohm 2W

5

TYPE B FILTER

BLACK

BLACK

TYPE A FILTER

4

UF-3010

3

RED(+) +)

2

PANJIT

1

UF-3010

0

2

220 Ohm 2W

LE (+)

1

LE (-)

SMM

281

C1

240

206

205

204

2

100 Kp 400V

THREE-PHASE OPERATOR

BRAKE FILTER CONNECTION

FILTER CONNECTION

TYPE B FILTER

2

220 Ohm 2W

1

C1 2

100 Kp 400V

SMF

U

V

1 TYPE C FILTER

1 TYPE B FILTER

1

R1

R1 2

220 Ohm 2W

1

C1 2

100 Kp 400V

SMF

V

R1 220 Ohm 2W

2 1

V1 UF-3010

2

PANJIT

SMF

W

206(+)

204(-)

TYPE B FILTER

1

R1 2

220 Ohm 2W

1

C1 2

100 Kp 400V

SMF

U

Name Made

MAC

Modified


Approved

AGC

Date 24.Feb.2003 27.Feb.2003

W



Filters.

3VFMAC1 (ASCM)

Ref. MAC.

Client ref.

Ref. Cliente.


10 CV

ASCENSORES

/ 400 V

Nombre Cliente

29.Mar.2004

Page //

5

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

3VFMAC1 R

S

PCB

T

R

+CE

S

R

T

S

+CE

-CE

W

U

V

C1

W

U

V

W

U

V

W

C2

C1

C2

L3 (+)

1

2200æF 400Vdc

SM

(+)

1

B1

B2

K2 8.4

L1

L2

L3

T1

T2

T3

2

B1

B2

SMF

U

V

U

V

W

2W 220K

6 mmý

4 mmý

4 mmý

2200æF 400Vdc

PE

T3

RF

R2 (-)

PE

L3

T2

2W 220K

CONNECTIONS

T

L2

T1

8.4

2

C2 S

L1

K1

R1

TO ALL EARTH

White

Black

DISTRIBUTE Brown

V

L1

(-)

4 mmý

B2

L2

L2

R

B1

U

FILTER

C1

SMF

B2

L3

INPUT

PE

B1

OUTPUT

T

FILTER L1

-CE

40 Ohms/1040W

W PE

M1 R

S

T

PE

QF

PE

16A a(10CV) Curva C

Rï

Sï

Tï

R

S

T

N

FF L3/7.0

25A 300mA white/blue

L2/7.0

6 mmý

T/15.0

Power supply switch

6 mmý

N/15.0 Condenser

L1

L2

Name Made

MAC

Modified


Approved

AGC

L3

N

Date 24.Feb.2003 09.Sep.2003

Brake

Main

resistance

switch

PE



Power connections

3VFMAC1 (ASCM)

Ref. MAC.

Client ref.

Ref. Cliente.


10 CV

ASCENSORES

/ 400 V

Nombre Cliente

29.Mar.2004

Page //

6

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

2000 tms thermal probe A1

KRFR 13.6

110

80

60

48

20

A2 8

KRFR

0Vs

13.6

TRM

3 1

F1

1

FF1

3,15A

3,15A 0Vp

230

400

PE Connect B

in page 5

~1

~2

-

+

3

RECT01 Brake rectifier

TS

1

FF2

K1

13

14

MAX. 1A !

brake

SMM

204

Black

white/blue

3

4

TS1

TS2

5

BTST

1

11

2

14

Us

RTE

in page 5

2

2

13

filter as shown

General

1

White

14

K2 8.4

2

SMM

Connect

6A

4

White

8.4

QIG

7.8

1

3,15A

1

RL1

2

GRF

type filter as shown

TS

RL1

6

206

0VP

Red

Motor themperature thermistor

220VP

Blue

A1

A2

brown

-

Y1 +

Connect C type filter as

switch

PE

shown in page 5

j(P2)/10.0 L24VDC/8.0 L0VDC/8.0 L110VS/9.0 L20VS/8.0 L0VS/8.0 L220VP/8.0 L0VP/8.0

Ventilator

6.9/L3 6.9/L2

1 Controller

Brake

transformer

Name Made

MAC

Modified


Approved

AGC

Date 24.Feb.2003 09.Sep.2003


Ref. MAC.

Machine room temperature


Controller tranformer

3VFMAC1 (ASCM)

Thermal probe

Client ref.

2 7.8

Exhaust fan motor

Ref. Cliente.


10 CV

ASCENSORES

/ 400 V

Nombre Cliente

29.Mar.2004

Page //

7

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

PCB MICROBASIC

3KRB/9.6 221/22.4 ROPC 3

4

RB

222/22.4

4

3

2

2

3

223/22.4

FOP 3,15A

2

4

RZS 2

2

4

RM

RVR

4

ROPA

3

4

2

RS 4

1

2

3

4

5

7

Green-yellow

10

14 11

K2 8.4

62

2

3

RTM1/9.6

RB 2

2

9

4

11

14

16

P2

A

C

P3

25

26

C4(34)/13.0

8.5

9.5

13

3

C4(35)/13.0

KRSE

KSG

1

RET

3

3

P1

4

RMT1

3

5 9

PE

61

Pcb microbasic ground

K1 8.4

62 61

KRNS 8.6

12

A2

A2

K1 11

A2

K2 A1

Connect

KRSE A1

MY4N 110Vac

Connect

A type

A type

A2

KRNS A1

Connect

A1

G2R-2 110VAC Connect

filter as

filter as

A type

A type

shown in

shown in

filter as

filter as

page 5

page 5

shown in

shown in

page 5

page 5

C/13.0 A/13.0 27/9.0 23/9.0 L220VP/11.0 L0VP/11.0 L0VDC/10.0 L0VS/9.0 L24VDC/10.0

7.9/L20VS 7.9/L220VP 7.9/L0VP 7.9/L0VDC 7.9/L0VS 7.9/L24VDC Stuch contactor activation

Main

Main

Sense

Nominal

contactor

contactor

relay

speed relay

13 53

14 7.313 54 13.153

14 7.4 54 13.1

61

62

8.161

62

8.1

83 L1

84 14.8L1 T1 6.8L2

T1 T2

6.7 6.8

T2 T3

T3

6.8

L2 L3 Name Made

MAC

Modified


Approved

AGC

Date 24.Feb.2003 25.Jun.2003


6.8L3 6.8

5 8

9 8.3 12 13.3


11 21

12 8.2 24 13.1

Main contactor

3VFMAC1 (ASCM)

Ref. MAC.

Client ref.

Ref. Cliente.


10 CV

ASCENSORES

/ 400 V

Nombre Cliente

29.Mar.2004

Page //

8

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

PCB MICROBASIC PIN 103

PIN RME

8.9/3KRB

6

1

RZS

8.7/RTM1

RMT 7

8

5 1

2

RMP FM

4

RPA

8

2A

P1

15

12

CC2

8

102

CH2

220

220

EM1

Green

CR2

102

220

Machine gear contact rescue system.

XLV

Safety

2

XFCS

gear

1

1

SEC2 2

CH2

105

CC2

105

106

P3

27

0.75 mmý

Black

3

Landing stop buttom

2

4 19.5

SCE

105

106

Level P1 XCA

PE

XCTS

SCC

XCA

XTL

SCE

1

Level P2

PE

XCA

STLH 2

Pit limiter XFCI

1

SAF

1

Slack rope

2

SIR

19.3

19.2

PE XCA

XTL

tension

SCE

2

Lower final limit switch

STOP

cable

2

contact

SFI

switch

4

1

STOPF

XFCS

SEC1 Car door look contact

3

CR2

2

Upper final limit switch

1

19.3

23

SFS

Car door look contact

SPRS

Brown

XCA

1

SAC

4

24

5

XCTS

2

Speed limiter contact

for emergency

3

17

7

Black

1

SLVH

2

19.3

P3

6

XLV

1

SEM

SPRB

00

1

4 3

travelling cable

0.75 mmý

EM2

CC2

104

RMT2

RZS

Black

travelling cable

SM

103

6

Level pn XCA

XFCI

PE

2 1 A1

Inspection

KSG

push-button stop

G2R 110Vac

Components

Number A2

of stop refered

Connect

to order

A type

in inspection box

filter as shown in page 5

7.9/L110VS 8.9/L0VS 8.9/23

11

8.9/27

14 8.1

Car safety

Shaft

Safety

Outside

Car

series

safety

series relay

locks

locks

series

series

series

Name Made

MAC

Modified


Approved

AGC

Date 24.Feb.2003 27.Feb.2003



Safety series

3VFMAC1 (ASCM)

Ref. MAC.

Client ref.

Ref. Cliente.


10 CV

ASCENSORES

/ 400 V

Nombre Cliente

29.Mar.2004

Page //

9

0

1

2

PCB MICROBASIC B

P2

D

B

4

5

External wiring F

D

3

J

F

K

J

7

8

9

Serial interface I

K

6

G

I

H

G

18

H

P3

19

18

T1

19

P4

T2

T1

20

P3

T2

21

20

22

21

31

22

32

31

32

2 1

Red

36V

Black

RVAR

F3 2A

+

BAT 12V 1,3A/h

-

KRL/19.0 F/14.0 D/14.0 B/14.0 7.9/j(P2) 8.9/L24VDC

L24VDC/12.0 L0VDC/12.0

8.9/L0VDC

Varistor

Name Made

MAC

Modified


Approved

AGC

Date 24.Feb.2003 18.Abr.2003

Battery



Battery

3VFMAC1 (ASCM)

Ref. MAC.

Client ref.

Ref. Cliente.


10 CV

ASCENSORES

/ 400 V

Nombre Cliente

29.Mar.2004

Page //

10

0

1

2

3

4

5

Speed governor

6

ALJO

7

8

9

Mod. 2129 ESA2/ED

A1 A2

CHA1

RL2

RL1

CRL

OFF

TURNING THE KEY

OPERATION

SIGNAL

CLOCKWISE

TRIP

RL1

ANTICLOCKWISE

RESET

RL2

SALV Overspeed gobernor controller

F1 2A

8.9/L0VP 8.9/L220VP

L220VP/14.0

Name Made

MAC

Modified


Approved

AGC

Date 24.Feb.2003 27.Feb.2003



Speed governor

3VFMAC1 (ASCM)

Ref. MAC.

Client ref.

Ref. Cliente.


10 CV

ASCENSORES

/ 400 V

Nombre Cliente

29.Mar.2004

Page //

11

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

3VFMAC1 1

2

3

4

5

LIKA I58-H-2000-ZCU-48RL7 C6

24VDC

2

3

4

5

5Vdc 0Vdc C1+ C1C2+ C2White/Grey

Red black Yellow blue Green Orange Not to connect

0Vc

STEGMANN

5VDC

5Vdc 0Vdc C1+ C1C2+ C2-

Black

Red

Orange

Orange

0Vc

1

12 10 5 6 8 1

STEGMANN ENC

+

-

PE

C1+

C1-

C2+

C2-

QD6L75JO

HG-660

5Vdc 0Vdc C1+ C1C2+ C2-

PE

cable braided

Grey White Pink Brown Green Yellow

Red blue White Brown Pink Black

and shielded

HOHMER

PE +

-

C1+

C1-

C2+

Channel 1

C2-

5Vdc (Vcc) 0Vdc (GND) C1+(A+) C1-(A-) C2+(B+) C2-(B-)

Channel 2

Industrial encoder 10.9/L24VDC

Red Black Yellow Brown Green blue

L24VDC/13.0

10.9/L0VDC

L0VDC/13.0

Name Made

MAC

Modified


Approved

AGC

Date 24.Feb.2003 25.Jun.2003



Industrial encoder

3VFMAC1 (ASCM)

Ref. MAC.

Client ref.

Ref. Cliente.


10 CV

ASCENSORES

/ 400 V

Nombre Cliente

29.Mar.2004

Page //

12

0

1

2

3VFMAC1

3

4

External wiring

5

3VFMAC1

12

14

15

16

17

18

3

12

14

15

16

17

18

13

C4

33

34

9

External wiring

T1

T2

2

35

36

37

C5

T1

T2

Braided

Braided

11

3VFMAC1

RL3 1

C2

8

1

RL2

13

7

External wiring 2

11

6

K1 8.4

K2 8.4

53 54

KRNS 8.6

24 21

KRREV 19.4

12

KRSE

11

8.5

8

2

KRFR 12

MK2P 24Vdc

7

54 53

8.9/C 8.9/A 8.4/C4(34)

T1/14.0 T2/14.0 L24VDC/14.0 L0VDC/19.0

8.4/C4(35) 12.8/L24VDC 12.8/L0VDC

Brake relay

1 6

Name Made

MAC

Modified


Approved

AGC

Date 24.Feb.2003 25.Jun.2003



3 7.4 8 7.3

Auxiliary relay contact.

3VFMAC1 (ASCM)

Ref. MAC.

Client ref.

Ref. Cliente.


10 CV

ASCENSORES

/ 400 V

Nombre Cliente

29.Mar.2004

Page //

13

0

1

2

3

VK2P

4

5

AL-C

AL-S

(FULL)

(OVERLOAD)

6

7

8

9

Kg

3

4 5

XPC

+24

91

XDSC

107

D+

0Vac

220Vac

HOLD

HOLD

White-blue

D-

Brown

D+

Brown

S6

Blue

S4

Violet

C3

Red

C1

Red

t

Green-yellow

T2

Green

T1

Pink

MALLA

Mesh

-IN

White

+IN

Green

Red

Black

EXC-

Orange

2 EXC+

6

Orange

1

White-blue

RS-485

D-

PE

Car display MB-D

Load cell CBC1

T1

CBS

T2

91

107

216

travelling cable

travelling cable

2mts

2mts

T1

CCS

T2

91

CRA2

Orange

CBA1

220VP

INH

travelling cable 2mts

107

216

CCA2

1

220VP

INH

HLSB Overload light

2

Buzer

13.8/T1

F2 2A

K1 8.4

84

0Vcc(CR2)/19.0 L0VP(CR3)/22.2 +24(CB1)/18.0

83

13.8/T2 10.9/B 10.9/D 10.9/F 11.8/L220VP 13.8/L24VDC

Serial interface

Full/overload

Car display

NOTE: SEE TECHNICAL DOSSIER VK-2P Name Made

MAC

Modified


Approved

AGC

Date 24.Feb.2003 25.Jun.2003



VK2P

3VFMAC1 (ASCM)

Ref. MAC.

Client ref.

Ref. Cliente.


10 CV

ASCENSORES

/ 400 V

Nombre Cliente

29.Mar.2004

Page //

14

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

6 mmý brown

6.9/N

6 mmý brown

6.9/T

1

3

1

SALH Y SALC: IN

3

SALH

FA

Shaft light conmutated switch

25A 30mA

PROTECTION BOX

2

10A/250V 4

4 mmý brown

CAH

4 mmý brown 3

1 1

CAHï

3

212H

NOA

NCA

211H

212H

NOA

NCA 1.5 mmý blue

3

QAC

1.5 mmý brown

QAH QASM

10A Shatf

10A 2

4

211H

212H

CA

NOA

NCA

RB

212

211

RB'

1

PE

2

XTCA Controller 212C

FNA CACï

211

210A

212A

PE 1

Pit

power socket 211A

1

XTCF

protection box

212

CAA

PE

2

212A

SAHF

2

3 1

1

CAC

211

S1

Pit power

2

HRB2

211

HAM RB'

travelling cable

socket cts

1

IF1

XF11

IF2

211

XF12

212

211

RBN Light

2

HRBn

on the machine

2

conmutated

Shatf

switch

XHA1

RBF

HRB'

Shaft light

0.75 mmý

211

212

HRB1

212 R1

CAR

CAM

1.5 mmý blue

PE

211C

211

1.5 mmý brown

SALC

1.5 mmý blue

212H

1.5 mmý brown

210H

212C

5A/250v Car light switch

CAC

212

0.75 mmý

FNH

1.5 mmý brown

210C

CAH

4

travelling cable

lighting

FNC

2

1.5 mmý brown

Controller

lighting

1.5 mmý brown

4

1.5 mmý blue

2

1.5 mmý brown

10A Car lighting

1.5 mmý blue

1

211H

1.5 mmý brown

2

212

Shaft

lighting in

lighting

car

SHA1

212

Microswitch

HA1

up

Light in controler PE 1

PE

CAAï

2

211A

212A

R2

R3 S2

XTCC

XHA2

Car

IF1

IF2

XF21

211

212

XF22

S3 211

212

XF31

211

212

XF32

211

212

Inspection box

SHA2

power socket N

L

Microswitch

HA2

down

HAC

HA3

Light in controler

Car lighting

Light in controler

HAC

Name Made

MAC

Modified


Approved

AGC

Date 24.Feb.2003 27.Feb.2003



1.5 mmý

blue

1.5 mmý

brown

L1/20.0 N1/20.0

Lightins

3VFMAC1 (ASCM)

Ref. MAC.

Client ref.

Ref. Cliente.


10 CV

ASCENSORES

/ 400 V

Nombre Cliente

29.Mar.2004

Page //

15

0

1

2

PCB MICROBASIC 110

CH1

3

4

5

6

7

8

External wiring

111

112

113

114

115

116

117

118

119

120

+24

110

111

112

113

114

115

116

117

118

119

120

+24

blue

red

red

red

red

red

red

red

red

red

red

red

SPE P1

3

SPE P2

4

VRE P1 24V

9

1

3 4

VRE P2

2

24V

SPE P3

1 2

3 4

VRE P3 24V

SPE P4

1 2

3 4

VRE P4 24V

SPE P5

1 2

3 4

VRE P5 24V

SPE P6

1 2

3 4

VRE P6 24V

SPE P7

1 2

3 4

VRE P7 24V

SPE P8

1 2

3 4

VRE P8 24V

SPE P9

1 2

3 4

VRE P9 24V

SPE P10

1 2

A

B

A

C

B

D

C

D

3 4

VRE P10 24V

1 2

+24(CH1)/17.0 0Vcc(CH2)/17.0 SPE: LANDING CALL PUSH BUTTON View sequence in covert of this document VRE: LANDING CALL REGISTER

Name Made

MAC

Modified


Approved

AGC

Date 24.Feb.2003 27.Feb.2003



Landing calls connectors.

3VFMAC1 (ASCM)

Ref. MAC.

Client ref.

Ref. Cliente.


10 CV

ASCENSORES

/ 400 V

Nombre Cliente

29.Mar.2004

Page //

16

1

2

7

8

9

10

226

0VDC

228

226

228

AFS AFI

217

213

228

BO2

217

213

217

1

SAFI

215

294

214

294

214

218

1

SAFS 2

24V

VLSH 2

24V

AFS

+24

1

VLBH 2

Shaft up light

+24

218

215

LAFS 1

AFI

218

226

LAFI

24V

213

Grey

0VDC

Yellow

10

5

6

External wiring

Violet

CH2

5

Violet

5

4

Black

PCB MICROBASIC

3

White-Blue

0

24V

2

Shaft down light

0Vdc

0Vdc

16.8/0Vcc(CH2) 16.8/+24(CH1)

+24(CH1)/19.0

Name Made

MAC

Modified


Approved

AGC

Date 24.Feb.2003 27.Feb.2003

Lower

Upper

stopping limit

stopping limit

switch

switch


Ref. MAC.

Shaft indications


Lighting. Upper/Lower terminal stopping switch. Stop

3VFMAC1 (ASCM)

Shaft indications

Client ref.

Ref. Cliente.


10 CV

ASCENSORES

/ 400 V

Nombre Cliente

29.Mar.2004

Page //

17

0

1

2

PCB MICROBASIC 109

CC1

4

5

6

7

8

9

External wiring

111

109

3

112

111

113

112

114

115

116

117

118

119

120

+24

A

B

113

114

115

116

117

118

119

120

+24

A

113

114

115

116

117

118

119

120

+24

A

C

B

D

C

D

C

D

travelling cable 0.75 mmý

CB1

109

111

112

B

Blue

SPC P1

Red

SPC P2

4

3 4

Red

SPC P3

3 4

Red

SPC P4

3 4

Red

SPC P5

3 4

Red

SPC P6

3 4

Red

SPC P7

3 4

Red

SPC P8

3 4

Red

SPC P9

3 4

Black

Black

Red

Red

3

Black

112(CB1)

19.0

111(CB1)

Black

19.0

Red

SPC P10

3 4 +24

A

B

C

D

0VDC

VRC P1 24V

1

VRC P2

2

24V

1 2

VRC P3 24V

1 2

VRC P4 24V

1 2

VRC P5 24V

1 2

VRC P6 24V

1 2

VRC P7 24V

1 2

VRC P8 24V

1 2

VRC P9 24V

1 2

VRC P10 24V

1 2

0Vcc(CB)/19.0 +24(CB1)/19.0

14.9/+24(CB1)

SPC: CAR CALL PUSH

Binary position

BUTTON

indicator

View sequence in covert of this document

mod. 633

VRC: CAR CALL REGISTER

Name Made

MAC

Modified


Approved

AGC

Date 24.Feb.2003 18.Abr.2003



Car calls connectors.

3VFMAC1 (ASCM)

Ref. MAC.

Client ref.

Ref. Cliente.


10 CV

ASCENSORES

/ 400 V

Nombre Cliente

29.Mar.2004

Page //

18

0

1

2

PCB MICROBASIC

6

208

2

9

208

7

0VCC

9

0VCC


8

9.1

9.2

4

Inspection switch

0Vcc

G2R2 24Vdc

9.1 Inspection up push-button

Orange

Black

A1

+24

A1

blue

Green

G2R 24Vdc

3

STOPF

4

Stop of pit

9.4

SPRB

112

A2

11 12

208

CLN

3 4

+

1K5

3

VNIVEL 4

XCTS

Level led

+24

Red

CB

PAP2

207

KRL XCTS

Inspection down push-button

Door sensitivity switch

203

19.8

9.0

SSEN

207

KRL

4

SPRS

203

VRL

3

STOP

9

203

KRREV

INSPECTION 3

SIR

9

A2

Inspecti¢n box

NORM

CR2

Orange

Violet

Grey

208

Identified

2

to 208(CC2)


Green

CB

5

PIN 207

wire conect

CR2

4

External wiring

2

CC2

3

CLN CB

111

9BB

-

0Vcc

SPAP Door opening push-button

207/21.1 203/21.1 +24(CB)/20.0 NC/20.0 COM/20.0

18.2/112(CB1) 18.1/111(CB1) 17.9/+24(CH1) 18.9/+24(CB1) 18.9/0Vcc(CB)

11

10.9/KRL

12 13.2

11

12 19.8

13.8/L0VDC 14.9/0Vcc(CR2)

0Vcc(CR2)/20.0 Inspection relay

Name Made

MAC

Modified


Approved

AGC

Date 24.Feb.2003 25.Jun.2003



Level led

Inspecti¢n box.

3VFMAC1 (ASCM)

Ref. MAC.

Client ref.

Ref. Cliente.


10 CV

ASCENSORES

/ 400 V

Nombre Cliente

29.Mar.2004

Page //

19

0

1

PCB MicroBASIC 217

CC2

2

4

5

6

7

8

9

External wiring

218

217

3

T

218

T

CH2

T

T

travelling cable

CAR

0.75 mmý

V1

SLV

t

4

PE

SAL R1

Green-Yellow

CR2

3

Alarm buttom

HPLB

SP

6V

PE

Emergency Light

SCE

CB

LED+

L+

C-

AL1

AL2

PE t Alarm speaker

Inspection

2 220Vac

4

15.9/L1 15.9/N1

1.5 mmý

brown

1.5 mmý

blue

7

Fbat 3,15A

222 REV 0V

+24

NO

COM

NC

Orange

Orange

Brown 6

system

0,1A

PE Shaft ground

5

Emergency

F(220v)

PE Car ground

Brown

Blue 3

+BAT

-BAT

8

0V

<--- Conectar Fotoc‚lula.

+24 cell

1 0Vac

White

H1 Pink

Green-Yellow

Green-Yellow

Box of

Photoelectric

CR2

OUT

BAT 6V 750mAh

19.8/COM 19.8/NC 19.8/0Vcc(CR2)

0Vcc(CR2)/21.1 +24(CB)/21.1

19.8/+24(CB)

Name Made

MAC

Modified


Approved

AGC

Date 24.Feb.2003 27.Feb.2003



Shaft/car ground.

3VFMAC1 (ASCM)

Ref. MAC.

Client ref.

Ref. Cliente.


10 CV

ASCENSORES

/ 400 V

Nombre Cliente

29.Mar.2004

Page //

20

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

MAC325 Level

Pulses

207

green

0Vdc

black

203

blue

+24

red

CF

20.8/+24(CB) 19.8/203 20.8/0Vcc(CR2) 19.8/207

Mac magnetic switch 325

Name Made

MAC

Modified


Approved

AGC

Date 24.Feb.2003 18.Abr.2003


Ref. MAC.


Mac magnetic

3VFMAC1 (ASCM)

switch325.

Client ref.

Ref. Cliente.


10 CV

ASCENSORES

/ 400 V

Nombre Cliente

29.Mar.2004

Page //

21

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

PCB MicroBASIC 8.2/221 8.2/222 8.2/223 Open 0Vp

CC3

0VP

Close 0Vp

220Vp

223

222

221

223

222

221


CR3

0VP

orange

blue

red

Black

14.9/L0VP(CR3)

3

1

SFCAP

SFCCP 4

Automatic door opening final limit switch

Automatic door closure final limit switch

2

C1 1

U

V

2

W

OPERATOR

M2

Motor monophasic

PE

operator

Name Made

MAC

Modified


Approved

AGC

Date 24.Feb.2003 27.Feb.2003



Single-phase operator.

3VFMAC1 (ASCM)

Ref. MAC.

Client ref.

Ref. Cliente.


10 CV

ASCENSORES

/ 400 V

Nombre Cliente

29.Mar.2004

Page //

22

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

T S R

PCB MicroBASIC 24.3/221 24.3/222

Power supply switch

24.3/223 Open 0Vp

CC3

0VP

Close 0Vp

223

220Vp

222

FR

221

FS

3,15A

FT

3,15A

3,15A

KCCP 23.3

22

KCAP 23.2

21

22 21

FRTP 23.6 A1

KCAP 23.2

95

L1

L2

L3

T1

T2

T3

KCCP 23.3

L1

L2

L3

T1

T2

T3

A1

KCAP Open door contactor

96

KCCP A2

Close door contactor

A2

FRTP 23.5

CC3'

0VP

237

234 238

233

U1

V1

W1

travelling cable

Connect three-phase operator

0.75 mmý

filter as shown in page 3

CR3'

0VP

237

orange

orange

24.2/L0VP(CR3)

234 238

233

grey

3

grey

U1

orange

V1

Black

red

W1

blue

1

SFCAP

SFCCP 4

Automatic door opening final limit switch

Automatic door closure final limit switch

2

M2

Name Made

MAC

Modified


Approved

AGC

Date 24.Feb.2003 27.Feb.2003

Tree-phase

21 L1

22 23.3 T1 23.6

21 L1

22 23.2 T1 23.7

opertor

L2

T2 23.7

L2

T2 23.8

motor

L3

T3 23.7

L3

T3 23.8



PE

Tree-phase operator.

3VFMAC1 (ASCM)

Ref. MAC.

Client ref.

Ref. Cliente.


10 CV

ASCENSORES

/ 400 V

Nombre Cliente

29.Mar.2004

Page //

23

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

PCB MicroBASIC 23.2/221 23.2/222 23.2/223 Open 0Vp

CC3

0VP

Close 0Vp

223

220Vp

222

221

222

221

travelling cable

0Vp

220Vp

222

Black

223

red

23.1/L0VP(CR3)

0VP

orange

CR3

Black

0.75 mmý

221

220 vac power

220vac cam

supply

signal

REVECO

Cam signal operator

Door operator control unit

Name Made

MAC

Modified


Approved

AGC

Date 24.Feb.2003 27.Feb.2003



Cam signal operator.

3VFMAC1 (ASCM)

Ref. MAC.

Client ref.

Ref. Cliente.


10 CV

ASCENSORES

/ 400 V

Nombre Cliente

29.Mar.2004

Page //

24

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Car telephone

FONOMAC P25 SAL 20.5

TLF. U37

TFN

TFN

Controller telephone socket ADAPRJ11

CHTF TFN

TFN

Inspecti¢n box

Violet

Violet

TFN

telephone socket

CCTF TFN

TFN

TFN


CTS

TFN

TFN

red

red

CRTF

TFN

TFN

Shaft telephone socket

Name Made

MAC

Modified


Approved

AGC

Date 24.Feb.2003 27.Feb.2003



Telephone

3VFMAC1 (ASCM)

Ref. MAC.

Client ref.

Ref. Cliente.


10 CV

ASCENSORES

/ 400 V

Nombre Cliente

29.Mar.2004

Page //

25

UPPER FINAL LIMIT SWITCH

LOWER FINAL LIMIT SWITCH

>=3,5m

SFS

SFI

SAFS

D3

SAFI

D1

>=0,4m

+24

Pulse signal

Level

D3

D2

Speed =

signal

MAC 325

D1= 100mm.

DIST FREN mm.

D2<= 100mm.

D3 =

D4<= 20mm.

STOPPING MAGNET (LEVELLING)

MAGNET FOR SPEED CHANGING.

MAGNET

Mark

North face

D4

Sounth face

SWITCH

MAGNETIC

DISDISTANCE BETWEEN FLOORS (>=3,5mm)

D3

DESCENT SLIPPAGE.

LENGTH EQUAL TO SUM OF ASCENT AND

D2

VEL. ASC m/seg

Level n

Level 3

Level 2

Level 1

magnetic switches.

magnets will activate

Sounth face D1 and D2

ABOUT MAGNETS...

203 0Vdc 207

INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS -Guide should be cleaned previously. -Place magnets on guides. -Glue is not neccesary. -Donï t install magnets near of speed governor cable.


ASCENSORES


Ref. MAC.

AGC



Approved

Change 2C/1H Down Selective. Simplex. Controller Technical department Date Name

3VFMAC1 (ASCM) MAC

24.Feb.2003 Made

9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0


SAFS

SAFI


!

SFS

!

>=0,4m

SFI

+24

MAC 324

203B

D3

Speed =

0Vdc

Descent pulse signal

203S

D2

D3

(*)

207

signal

Level

0Vdc

MAC 325

VEL. ASC m/seg

D1

>=0,4m

!

+24

Ascent pulse signal

ABOUT MAGNETS...

Pay special attencion in the installation of these magnets South face of D1 and D2 magnets will activate magnetic switches.

INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS -Guide should be cleaned previosly. -Place magnets on guides. -Glue is not neccesary.

Level n

Level 3

Level 2

North face

D4

Level 1

MAGNET

Mark

D2

D1=100mm.

DIST FREN mm.

D2<=100mm.

D3 =

D4>=20mm.

STOPPING MAGNET

(LEVELLING) LENGTH EQUAL TO SUM OF ASCENT AND DESCENT SLIPPAGE.

D3 MAGNET FOR SPEED CHANGING.

SWITCH

MAGNETIC

south face

-Donï t install magnets near of speed governor cable. (*) VERY IMPORTANT or magnets are not correctly installed.

-F26 and F27 could appear if either magnetics switches


ASCENSORES


Ref. MAC.

AGC



Approved


3VFMAC1 (ASCM) MAC

24.Feb.2003 Made

9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0


>=3,50


SFS

SFI

SAFS

D1

D3

D3

Speed =

Level

D2

Level 1

Level 2

Level 3

Level n

VEL. ASC m/seg

signal

>=0,4 m

SAFI

Pulse

203 0Vdc 207

MAC 325

signal

+24

ABOUT MAGNETS... South face of D1 and D2 magnets will activate magnetic switches.

INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS

D2

D1= 100mm.

DIST FREN mm.

D2<= 100mm.

D3 =

D4<= 20mm.

STOPPING MAGNET (LEVELLING)

LENGTH EQUAL TO SUM OF ASCENT

MAGNET FOR SPEED CHANGING.

AND DESCENT SLIPPAGE

D3

North face

D4

South face

SWITCH

MAGNETIC

DISTANCE BETWEEN FLOORS

Mark

MAGNET

(>=3,5M)

-Guide should be cleaned previously. -Place magnets on guides. -Glue is not neccesary. -Donï t install magnets near of speed governor cable.


ASCENSORES


Ref. MAC.

AGC



Approved


3VFMAC1 (ASCM) MAC

24.Feb.2003 Made

9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

ASSEMBLY MANUAL FOR SCM-07 COMPLETE LIFT

Installation • Assembly • Start-up Use • Maintenance • Repair Technical Manual V 0.00, Nov. 03 English / MACSCM07En

PRODUCT TECHNICAL MANUAL SCM-07 Complete Lift TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 • RESCUE OF PASSENGERS.......................................................................... 1.1 Procedure for the rescue of passengers in an SCM lift.............................................

3 3

Chapter 2 • INSTALLATION AND ASSEMBLY.............…………………………………………….. -Introduction..................................................................................................... 2.1 Arrival at the site............................................................................................… 2.2 Unloading materials.....................................................................................……. 2.3 Lifeline................................................................................................……………. 2.4 Shaft layout and inspection.......................................................................………… -Diagram of plumb lines................................................................................….. 2.5 Assembly of side guide brackets...........................................................………………. 2.6 Positioning of bed plate......................................................................……………….. 2.7 Car and counterweight guide rails ...................................................................... 2.8 Assembly of car frame.............................................................................………… 2.9 Assembly of machine bedframe.................................................................……….. 2.10 Positioning of interlock housing.................................................................……….. 2.11 Assembly of fixed point in beam or wall............................................................... 2.12 Assembly of counterweight frame....................................................................... 2.13 Inserting weights in counterweight frame............................................………………… 2.14 Assembly of driving ropes ......................................................................………….. 2.15 Fastening the controller box............................................................................... 2.16 Connecting the terminal box..............................................................………………… 2.17 Performing the electrical installation of the machine.............................................. 2.18 Assembly of the overspeed governor.................................................................... 2.19 Assembly of the doors........................................................................................ 2.20 Assembly of the car......................................................................................……. 2.21 Assembly of the car operator..........................................................……………………… 2.22 Assembly of the SCM-07 lift rescue system ........................................................... 2.23 Assembly of the counterweight buffers and car frame.......................................…….. 2.24 Assembly of the counterweight protection screen..............................................…. 2.25 Tools.............................…................................................…………………………………… Conclusion ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

4 4 4 4 5 5 6 8 8 9 11 12 14 15 16 16 17 20 21 21 22 23 23 24 24 25 25 26 26

Chapter 3 • START-UP..............................................................................………………. 3.1 Inspection and testing....................................................................................... 3.2 Car and counterweight.......................................................................................

27 27 30

Chapter 4 • USE OF THE SCM LIFT........................................................................……. 4.1 Purpose of instructions..........................................................………………………………. 4.2 Intended use of lift..................................................................................………… 4.3 Type of controllers............................................................................................. 4.4 Information on the standard use of the lift......................................................…….

31 31 31 33 35

Chapter 5 • MAINTENANCE..................................................................................……. 5.1 Description of components ............................................................................... 5.2 Lift shaft..........................................................................................……………….. 5.3 Guide rails....................................................................................................... 5.4 Access doors............................................................................................………. 5.5 Ropes.............................................................................................................. 5.6 Machine and bedframe...................................................................................... 5.7 Overspeed governor......................................................................................…. 5.8 Buffers...............................................................................................…………….. 5.9 Alarm device.......................................................................................…………….. 5.10 Rescue system...........................................................................................…….. 5.11 Counterweight.................................................................................................. 5.12 Guide shoes .................................................................................................... 5.13 Safety gear...................................................................................................... 5.14 Batteries.......................................................................................................... 5.15 Load weighing switches ..................................................................................... 5.16 Electrical safety circuits.........................................................................……………. 5.17 Signs and controllers..................................................................................…….. 5.18 Controller box..............................................................................................…..

36 36 37 37 37 38 39 40 40 40 40 41 41 41 41 41 41 41 41

V 0.00, Nov. 03

Page 2/41

MACSCM-07

PRODUCT TECHNICAL MANUAL SCM-07 Complete Lift Chapter 1 • RESCUE OF PASSENGERS 1.1

Procedure for Rescuing Passengers in an SCM Lift

1. Contact the lift technician. The SAFETY DEVICES must always be SWITCHED ON. 2. DISCONNECT THE MAIN SWITCH OF THE LIFT in the top compartment of the controller box next the lift door on the last floor. 3. CHECK THE POSITION OF THE CAR. CALM THE TRAPPED PASSENGERS DOWN and tell them that they are going to be rescued and that the car will move. Tell them not to try to open the doors or leave the car until they have been told that they may do so safely. 4. CHECK THAT ALL THE LANDING DOORS ARE CLOSED AND BLOCKED, AND THAT THE CAR DOORS REMAIN SHUT. Place the “OUT OF USE” sign at each lift entrance. 5. LOCATE THE FLYWHEEL THAT IS UNASSEMBLED INSIDE THE CABINET AND SCREW IT IN. 6. RELEASE THE BRAKE OF THE MACHINE, VERY SLOWLY PUTTING PRESSURE ON THE FLY WHEEL. Turn this to revolve the pulley manually. CAUTION: It may be necessary to slightly turn the flywheel in both directions whilst pressing down. So that the system meshes fully, the flywheel must be pressed right down to the bottom. WARNING: The car may move up or down alone. In the event of car overspeed, turn the flywheel outwards. If the car is blocked due to the safety gear, or if the car does not move, notify a qualified technician.

7. RELEASE THE BRAKE (TURNING THE FLYWHEEL OUTWARDS) ONCE THE POSITION IS REACHED. THE CAR MUST REMAIN INSIDE THE INTERLOCKING ZONE. The indicator LED, located in the top compartment, indicates whether the car is on the floor level. When you release the brake, once the desired car position is reached, move the flywheel in both directions, making sure that this turns freely. 8. UNBLOCK AND OPEN THE LANDING DOORS WITH THE EMERGENCY KEY to free the passengers (use of this key must be restricted to authorised and trained personnel who are familiar with the rescue procedure). 8.1 LOCATE THE UNLOCKING TRIANGLE IN THE DOOR FRAME. All doors have an unlocking triangle. In MP doors, this is on the door lintel. 8.2 INSERT THE KEY IN THE TRIANGLE, to mesh the mechanism. TURN THE KEY THE APPROPRIATE WAY TO UNLOCK THE DOOR, AND OPEN THE DOOR by applying pressure with your hand on the door edge. 8.3 Once the landing door is open, THE CAR DOOR IS NOT BLOCKED and it may be opened without using the wrench. WARNING: If the car is not quite on the floor level, take special care to protect the passengers when they leave the car. 9. Once the passengers have been freed, make sure that ALL THE DOORS ARE CLOSED AND CORRECTLY BLOCKED, leaving ALL DEVICES AND DRIVES OF THE RESCUE SYSTEM IN THEIR INITIAL POSITION. 10. NOTIFY THE TECHNICAL SERVICE so that the lift is checked before being put into use again. WARNING: The lift’s power supply must remain off until assistance from the Technical Service.

1.2 Procedure to open the landing doors with the emergency key. In the event of an emergency, in order to gain access to the shaft or to the car, you must use the unlocking key for the landing doors. For safety reasons, the use of this key must be restricted to authorised and trained staff who are familiar with the rescue procedure. WARNING: If it is necessary to open the landing door to establish the car’s position or to free the passengers, take extra care to avoid falling into the shaft. Do not leave the landing doors open unless the entrance is suitably protected and secure, to avoid anyone falling into the shaft. 1. LOCATE AND HAVE THE UNLOCKING KEY READY. 2. DISCONNECT THE MAIN LIFT SWITCHES, WHICH ARE IN THE CONTROL CABINET. 3. LOCATE THE UNLOCKING TRIANGLE IN THE DOOR FRAME. All doors have an unlocking triangle. In MP doors, this is on the door lintel. 4. INSERT THE KEY IN THE TRIANGLE, TO MESH THE MECHANISM. TURN THE KEY THE APPROPRIATE WAY TO UNLOCK THE DOOR. 5. AT THE SAME TIME, OPEN THE DOOR BY APPLYING PRESSURE WITH YOUR HAND ON THE DOOR EDGE. 6. ONCE THE LANDING DOOR IS OPEN, THE CAR DOOR IS NOT BLOCKED AND IT MAY BE OPENED WITHOUT USING THE KEY.

V 0.00, Nov. 03

Page 3/41

MACSCM-07

PRODUCT TECHNICAL MANUAL SCM-07 Complete Lift CHAPTER 2 • INSTALLATION AND ASSEMBLY EVERYTHING DESCRIBED IN THIS POINT REGARDING SAFETY IS DONE SO IN GENERAL TERMS. AS WELL AS THIS MANUAL, YOU MUST ALSO AT ALL TIMES CARRY THE OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND SAFETY MANUAL, WHICH DESCRIBES THE SAFETY MEASURES IN GREATER DEPTH.

Compulsory foot protection

Compulsory head protection

Compulsory hand protection

Introduction:

Welcome to the manual on the installation and assembly of the SCM-07 model of the range of MP lifts, which fulfils all the safety requirements of the European Directive. MP’s SCM series stands out in that it saves space since it is machine-room-less, and is able to use these metres for any other architectural use. This assembly manual will guide you through the steps of the lift’s installation and assembly process. This process is based on the methods, techniques and tools proposed by MP for the quick and safe installation of the lift.

2.1 Arrival at the Site Ø

Ø Ø Ø

Ø

When on site, a safety helmet must be worn at all times, to protect from falling objects. Also use boots with the sole protected from sharp objects, and the top toe area reinforced with metal to protect from knocks and crushing due to falling heavy materials. The shaft must be clean and free of obstacles, with the accesses protected from falling objects and persons, and built in accordance with the drawing specifications. Make sure that there are hooks in the overhead of the shaft which are necessary for the assembly and lifting of loads, which are installed by the manufacturer. There must be a three-phase and single-phase power supply, as well as an area for storing materials as close to the shaft as possible.

2.2 Unloading Materials When unloading materials, for materials weighing more than 25 kg, always use the lifting equipment that is available on site (fork-lift trucks, pallet carriers, cranes, hand carts, etc, ). When lifting heavy loads, use neoprene lumbar belts to prevent back injuries. Materials must be unloaded on site by one or several workers from the installation company, assisted by site personnel, who shall provide the suitable resources to facilitate loading work and material distribution. For distribution and storage, the following must be taken into consideration: 1.

2. 3. 4.

That the materials are as near to the shaft as possible. That they are in an area where neither water nor debris may fall, and away from machines that may create dust. That they are not in a thoroughfare area and that their storage does not present a danger for persons if they fall. The receiver of the material shall check the received material against the material that appears on the shipping chart, counting it and checking the most important elements, such as: Ø Distance between car and counterweight frame guide rail. Ø Machine and bedframe. Ø Number, type and gripping mechanism of the doors. Ø Number and type of car and counterweight guide rails. Ø Number and diameter of driving ropes and overspeed governor. Ø Number of rope attachments. Ø Number and type of car and counterweight guide shoes. Ø The guide rails shall be supported on three points to avoid buckling. If this has to be left on a finished floor, place some kind of material underneath (paper, plastic, etc) to avoid staining the floor with the grease from the guide rails. Ø When inserting the guide rails in the shaft, rest the bottom part on the front of the pit, and the top part in the rear corners of the shaft. Ø Leave the doors in a safe place, where there is no danger of them falling or becoming deformed. If possible, distribute them on the floors with the aid of a crane. Ø The traction or driving assembly shall be discharged with the bedframe on the last floor of the installation. Ø If for any reason material must be left outdoors, which must be avoided at all costs, cover it with plastic so that does not get wet. Do not leave it directly on the floor, but on pallets, bricks, planks, etc. Do not rely on the plastic covers that come with the material from the factory. The car must never be left outdoors, since water and damp may damage it significantly.

V 0.00, Nov. 03

Page 4/41

MACSCM-07

PRODUCT TECHNICAL MANUAL SCM-07 Complete Lift 2.3 Lifeline The first operation to be performed inside the shaft shall be to install the “lifeline”, prepared to bear the weight of two persons, and hooks in each one of the shaft accesses. At the same time, strap on the safety belts. These operations will also be performed secured to a fixed point of the installation.

2.4 Shaft Layout and In Compulsory personal protection against falls

2.4 Shaft layout and inspection.



Compulsory personal protection against falls


CAUTION Protect yourself from objects that may fall through the shaft, and from falling into gaps Use safety protection when drilling, welding, cutting and driving nuts and screws To climb down to the pit use a ladder

Use the tools prepared for this purpose, positioning them in the shaft in accordance with the drawing of the installation and plumb lines. Once the ropes have been cast, check each one of the x-y shafts floor by floor to ensure the minimum measurements indicated in the plan view drawing.

ATTENTION

It is essential that you carry the LAYOUT AND ELEVATION drawing of the installation 2.4.1 Proceed to the shaft layout and inspection.

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

6.

The first step in the assembly of the SCM-07 lift is the checking of the width and depth of the shaft. Begin the layout process from the overhead area of the lift shaft, fastening the set square to the shaft wall, at a height of 1300 to 1500 mm from the floor level of the last floor and as close as possible to the car opening. Loosely fasten the tube to the set square, until you have checked this. Through each one of the sides of the shaft, cast the plumb lines until they almost reach the pit; the top layout system will predetermine the position between them. Once the plumb lines have been cast, work with the minimum distances marked on the plan view drawings or the drawing in perspective shown below. Check the shaft floor by floor, and if it is OK, fasten the bottom plumb line tool to preset the position of these (fasten the tube to the set square of “point 3”). If this is not OK, adjust the ropes from the last floor, releasing the tube from the set square, to make it possible to adjust in all directions. Having preset the plumb lines to locate the guide rails, cast a rope with colouring from the preset position on the top tool, making a mark along the entire length of the shaft which must match the groove of the closest bracket to the car opening.

THE FOLLOWING PAGES SHOW THE LAYOUT OF BOTH DISTANCES BETWEEN GUIDES,. I.E. ONE PLAN VIEW DRAWING AND ONE DRAWING IN PERSPECTIVE.

V 0.00, Nov. 03

Page 5/41

MACSCM-07

PRODUCT TECHNICAL MANUAL SCM-07 Complete Lift

2.4.2 Diagrams of plumb lines.

E.G 1500 plumb line layout

E.G 1200 plumb line layout

PLAN VIEW OF LAYOUT E.G 1500

V 0.00, Nov. 03

CLOSE-UP A, 2:1

Page 6/41

MACSCM-07


E.G 1500 E.G 1200

A 1500 1200

B 800 500

C 350 350

(1) Distance “X” (depends on shaft dimensions) + Distance “C” (2) Position rope 1 + distance “B” (3) Predetermine position by system PHOTOS OF TOP AND BOTTOM LAYOUT TOOLS:

TOP LAYOUT TOOL

V 0.00, Nov. 03

BOTTOM LAYOUT TOOL

Page 7/41

MACSCM-07

PRODUCT TECHNICAL MANUAL SCM-07 Complete Lift 2.5 Assembly of guide brackets.





SEE INSTALLATION MANUAL, SUPPLIED WITH SHAFT COMPONENTS 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

Following the distances indicated in the elevation drawing of the installation, position the brackets, starting with the first length of guide rails. The first bracket shall be positioned in the closest area to the car opening. Take special care when matching the stain mark, obtained in the previous step of the assembly process, with the groove in the middle of the bracket. Check the right level of the bracket, both on the vertical and horizontal planes. The second bracket shall be positioned levelled and at a distance of 1200 or 1500 mm, which will always coincide with the distance between guides of the installation. Then, assemble the bracket arms without tightening them, in order to facilitate the later positioning of the guide rails. Having completed all of the brackets, make sure that they are all at the relevant height and levelled both vertically and horizontally.

PLUMB LINE WITH COLOURING

COMPLETE BRACKET

FASTENING OF BOTH BRACKETS

2.6 Assembly of the bed plate.




SEE INSTALLATION MANUAL, SUPPLIED WITH SHAFT COMPONENTS Following this, in the pit area, and as a prior step to the assembly of the car and counterweight guide rails, position the bed plate. Position the bed plate without fastening it to the floor for the time being, until the positions of the guide rails with respect to the plumb lines are established.

CAR AND COUNTERWEIGHT GUIDE RAIL BASE PLATES

V 0.00, Nov. 03

Page 8/41

MACSCM-07

PRODUCT TECHNICAL MANUAL SCM-07 Complete Lift 2.7 Assembly of car and counterweight guide rails





SEE PREVIOUS POINT 2.4 “Shaft Layout and Inspection” 1. 2.

So that the machine always remains in the right position, that is, accessible from the last floor, irrespective of the measurements of each shaft, cut the length specified in the elevation drawing from the counterweight guide rails. If the actual shaft measurements are different to those indicated in the drawing, correct the length to be cut in accordance with the following formula: How to calculate the length of guide rails to be cut.

Although THE EXACT LENGTH TO BE CUT IS INDICATED IN THE ELEVATION DRAWING OF EACH PARTICULAR INSTALLATION, how to calculate this is described, and how to adapt the cut if the actual shaft measurements are different to those specified in the drawing. LGC: total length of counterweight guide rails SENT in mm C: Length of section of counterweight guide rails to be CUT F: Height of pit (in mm) R: Distance between the first and last floor 1550*: Set distance at which the machine bedframe is positioned C=LGC-F-1550 THROW A TAPE MEASURE FROM DISTANCE 1550 mm, OVER THE LAST LANDING TO THE FLOOR OF THE PIT. If the length is DIFFERENT to that indicated in the drawing, ADAPT the length of counterweight guide rails to be cut by using the formula. EXAMPLE 1: Distance ACCORDING TO DRAWING from distance 1550 to the floor 15000 Cut ACCORDING TO DRAWING of counterweight guide rails= 200 mm Distance of ACTUAL MEASUREMENT from distance 1550 to the floor=15100 mm à ACTUAL MEASUREMENT of counterweight guide rails= 100 mm EXAMPLE 2: Distance ACCORDING TO DRAWING from distance 1550 to the floor=15000 mm Cut ACCORDING TO DRAWING of counterweight guide rails= 200 mm Distance of ACTUAL MEASUREMENT from distance 1550 to the floor=14900 mm à ACTUAL cut of counterweight guide rails= 300 mm *NOTE: Set cut for standard pit (1400 mm). For reduced pits, this distance will vary. See individual elevation.

3.

After inserting the guide rails with the aid of a safety harness, begin assembly, always positioning the counterweight guide rails with the sockets (1) facing upwards and the car guide rails with the sockets facing downwards (2) and assembling the guide rail sections measuring different lengths in the order indicated in the elevation plan.

3.1 THE CUT SECTIONS OF GUIDE RAILS MUST ALWAYS BE POSITIONED FIRST.

3.2 CLEAN THE GUIDE RAILS WITH GREASE REMOVAL LIQUID TO

COMPLETELY ELIMINATE THE WAX ON THE SLIDING PART. 3.3 IF ANY BRACKET MATCHES WITH ANY GUIDE RAIL COUPLING, ASSEMBLE THIS UNDERNEATH.

V 0.00, Nov. 03

Page 9/41

MACSCM-07

PRODUCT TECHNICAL MANUAL SCM-07 Complete Lift 4.

To facilitate the assembly of the guides, a straightedge is supplied, which is fastened in the first section of guide rails, being completely levelled with respect to the layout.

GUIDE RAILS FASTENED BY STRAIGHTEDGES

5. 6.

7.

Having established the position of the car and counterweight guide rails, finish fastening the brackets. In the first section, also fasten the guide rails of the bed plate with through screws in the case of the car guide rails and with flanges in the case of the counterweight guide rails. As a final step, check all the couplings, eliminating the occasional bumps with a body file.

V 0.00, Nov. 03

Page 10/41

MACSCM-07

PRODUCT TECHNICAL MANUAL SCM-07 Complete Lift 2.8 Assembly of car frame:





SEE INSTALLATION MANUAL SUPPLIED WITH CAR FRAME

This assembly stage shall be performed in the pit area. Take into consideration the distances and measurements that appear in the layout and elevation drawing, regarding its correct position in the shaft. To fasten all the parts, use the suitable tools, taking special care when positioning the slings in the corners of the beams of the frame (as shown in the above photograph), in order to lift it with the hoist. ASSEMBLY SEQUENCE:

1. 2. 3.

Assemble the two “L”s of the frame (these arrive at the site already assembled, including the wedging boxes), on the car guide rails and fasten them by inserting the top beam. This entire process shall be performed with the aid of a hoist (manual or electric) Position the centre part of the car frame (pulleys). Position the rest of the components of the frame.

“L” OF FRAME

4. 5.

FASTENING THE “L”S WITH THE TOP BEAM

Assembly of the scaffold or platform on the top part of the frame With the aid of the hoist, lift the frame-platform and position the rest of the guide brackets (as indicated in the photographs). • DO THIS BRACKET BY BRACKET DUE TO THE WEIGHT OF THE FRAME.

V 0.00, Nov. 03

Page 11/41

MACSCM-07

PRODUCT TECHNICAL MANUAL SCM-07 Complete Lift 2.9

Assembly of machine bedframe:





SEE INSTALLATION MANUAL SUPPLIED WITH SHAFT COMPONENTS

From the overhead area, begin this stage of the assembly by fastening the bedframe brackets on the counterweight guide rails. On these, position the main part of the bedframe, using the steel plates of different thicknesses if off-level. Having completed this step, fasten the arms to the main part of the bedframe and the set squares and brackets to the arms. The brackets must be attached to the car guide rails with fastening flanges. Next, assemble the fixed point in the bedframe. Continuing in the overhead area, and using the lifting system installed in the top part of the shaft, hoist the machine to its position on the bedframe. Next, fasten it definitively by screwing it to the main part of the bedframe and fastening it with the auxiliary elements supplied. The assembly sequence is shown on the following page. IMPORTANT: Position the bedframe on the right or left, depending on the layout.

EG. OF INSTALLATION, LAYOUT ON RIGHT, WITH FIXED POINT INSTALLED

V 0.00, Nov. 03

Page 12/41

MACSCM-07

PRODUCT TECHNICAL MANUAL SCM-07 Complete Lift Assembly sequence of bedframe and machine: 1. Position the seats of the machine bedframe on the counterweight guide rails.

6. Connect the fixed point in the bedframe to the main part of the bedframe. NOTE: Carry out this operation before lifting the main part onto the counterweight guide rails.

2. Connect the main part of the bedframe to the previously positioned seats, using wedges if necessary.

7. Connect the machine to the bedframe

3. Connect the set of arms to the main part of the bedframe

8. Position the reinforcement machine to machine

4. Connect the bracket to the arms (repeat this operation 4 times)

9. Connect the screen brackets to the bedframe

5. Connect the set squares to the brackets (Repeat this operation 4 times)

10. Assembly of protection screen pulley machine to bedframe

V 0.00, Nov. 03

Page 13/41

MACSCM-07

PRODUCT TECHNICAL MANUAL SCM-07 Complete Lift 2.10 Assembly of interlock housing.





SEE INSTALLATION MANUAL SUPPLIED WITH SHAFT COMPONENTS After assembling the bedframe, the following step is to position the interlock housing for the car frame. Perform this on the last bracket, located below the bedframe.

The interlock housing shall be connected to the counterweight guide rail by M-12 flanges which are included in the mechanics box. It is extremely important that the two interlock housings are at the same height for the correct actuation of the interlocking locks.

V 0.00, Nov. 03

Page 14/41

MACSCM-07

PRODUCT TECHNICAL MANUAL SCM-07 Complete Lift 2.11 Positioning of fixed point in beam or wall.





SEE INSTALLATION MANUAL SUPPLIED WITH SHAFT COMPONENTS Next, position the fixed point in the driving ropes, which, depending on the layout drawing of the installation, may be; 1- Fixed point in beam: When the space is standard 2- Fixed point in wall: When the space is reduced (less than 80) The measurement that marks the fixed point to be positioned is indicated in the following diagram.

PLAN VIEW OF LAYOUT DISTANCE, WHICH DEFINES THE FIXED POINT IN THE WALL OR BEAM. UP TO 80 mm à WALL FROM 80 mm à BEAM

CLOSE-UP OF DISTANCE (*), ACCORDING TO LAYOUT DRAWING

- Two possible cases are described below:

PHOTO OF FIXED POINT OF ROPES FROM CAR TO BEAM

FIXED POINT OF ROPES FROM CAR TO CONCRETE WALL

V 0.00, Nov. 03

Page 15/41

FIXED POINT OF ROPES FROM CAR TO BRICK WALL

MACSCM-07

PRODUCT TECHNICAL MANUAL SCM-07 Complete Lift 2.12 Assembly of counterweight frame.





SEE INSTALLAITON MANUAL SUPPLIED WITH COUNTERWEIGHT FRAME

The following step is the assembly of the counterweight frame to the guide rails, since this arrives from the factory fully assembled. Insert this with the aid of a mechanical hoist, on the first length of guide rails.

DRAWING OF COUNTERWEIGHT FRAME, LAYOUT ON RIGHT

EG. OF INSTALLATION, LAYOUT ON RIGHT

2.13 Inserting Weights in Counterweight Frame.




SEE INSTALLATION MANUAL SUPPLIED WITH COUNTERWEIGHT FRAME IMPORTANT: Before positioning the lift in configuration, insert the necessary weights in the counterweight in order to balance the car frame, in accordance with the drawing specifications.

V 0.00, Nov. 03

Page 16/41

MACSCM-07

PRODUCT TECHNICAL MANUAL SCM-07 Complete Lift 2.14 Assembly of Driving Ropes.





2.14.1 How to unwind the ropes. The ropes are supplied in rolls or coils. The smaller diameter, flexible and shorter ropes are supplied in rolls, as well as the ropes that are easy to handle. The thick and long ropes are packed in bobbins. There are several ways to unwind a rope, but they must all be carried out carefully, to avoid curling the rope. Curling may cause deformation at certain points that unbalance the rope irreparably. (Fig. A) Although this straightens before assembling the rope, these points have a weak resistance as a result of the deformation, and because there are always ridges left which deteriorate prematurely due to abrasion (Fig. B)

Fig. A

Fig. B

When the rope is supplied wound on a bobbin, to unwind it, place the bobbin so that it may turn freely on an axis resting on two supports. (Fig.C) If the rope is packed in a roll, this is undone by rolling it forward so that the turns are unwound without distortion. (Fig.D) If the rolls are heavy and large, and difficult to manage by hand, it is better to place the roll on a support in the form of a wheel, and turn the roll on this. (Fig.E).

FIG. “C”

FIG “D”

FIG “E”

If these recommendations are not followed when unwinding the ropes as shown in figures F and G, a number of acute twists will be caused in the ropes and permanent deformations may appear, or at the least the ropes will become “lively” and will react irregularly on the devices which support and operate the installation.

FIG. “F”

V 0.00, Nov. 03

FIG. “G”

Page 17/41

MACSCM-07

PRODUCT TECHNICAL MANUAL SCM-07 Complete Lift 2.14.2 Attaching the rope to the rope socket. Firstly, the close-up is shown of how the rope passes through the rope socket and some approximate measurements to attach them properly.

RECOMMENDED DISTANCES FOR THE ROPES (1) Insulating tape (2) Rope clamps (3) Rope Close-up of the attachment of the terminals at the fixed point in the bedframe and the fixed point in the beam.

FIXED POINT IN BEDFRAME

FIXED POINT IN BEAM

2.14.3 Assembly of driving ropes. When starting the assembly of the ropes in the shaft, position yourself in the area of the shaft with the car frame and scaffold assembled on the top part of the frame. Raise this assembly (frame-platform) to the overhead space with the aid of a mechanical or electric hoist. TWO WORKERS must carry out this operation, one at the top of the scaffold (IT IS EXTREMELY IMPORTANT TO WEAR COMPULSORY PERSONAL PROTECTION AGAINST FALLS) and the other worker in the pit of the shaft, in order to pass the ropes up and down with the aid of a cord. The worker at the top of the scaffold shall attach the rope to the rope socket which is positioned at the fixed point in the beam or wall, as shown in the previous point, and drop the rope down to the pit. He shall then go down to the bottom part of the car frame, where the pulleys are located. With the aid of the cord, he shall then lift the rope, passing it through the grooves of the car frame pulleys, and then through the grooves of the machine traction pulley, then dropping the rope again. The worker in the pit catches the rope and is then in charge of passing it through the groove of the deflection pulley of the counterweight frame. Finally, the worker at the top wall catches the rope with the cord and attaches this to the rope socket in the fixed point in the bedframe. NOTE: The ropes shall be attached one after the other. Until the first rope is attached to the fixed point in the beam or wall and to the fixed point in the bedframe, do not assemble the second rope.

V 0.00, Nov. 03

Page 18/41

MACSCM-07

PRODUCT TECHNICAL MANUAL SCM-07 Complete Lift 2.14.4 Travel of ropes.

SEQUENCE OF PASSING ROPES A- FIXED POINT IN BEAM B- ROPES ENTER CAR FRAME C- ROPES LEAVE CAR FRAME D- ROPES ENTER MACHINE TRACTION PULLEY E- ROPES LEAVE MACHINE TRACTION PULLEY B- ROPES ENTER DEFLECTION PULLEY OF COUNTERWEIGHT FRAME B- ROPES LEAVE DEFLECTION PULLEY OF COUNTERWEIGHT FRAME H- FIXED POINT IN BEDFRAME

THE ASSEMBLY SHALL BE PERFORMED ROPE BY ROPE. THE FIRST ROPE SHALL BE ATTACHED TO THE FIXED POINT IN THE BEAM AND END AT THE FIXED POINT IN THE BEDFRAME

V 0.00, Nov. 03

Page 19/41

MACSCM-07

PRODUCT TECHNICAL MANUAL SCM-07 Complete Lift 2.15 Fastening the Controller Box.




SEE INSTALLATION MANUAL SUPPLIED WITH THE PRE-ASSEMBLED INSTALLATION FOR SCM LIFTS Fasten this with the brackets supplied, bearing in mind that as a prior step a provisional assembly shall be performed to position the terminal box. CAUTION: Under no circumstances must the controller box be installed in private premises.

1. 2. 3.

The controller box shall be fastened on the landing of the last floor, next to the door frame, so that it is installed with the door. The box shall be located on the machine side with the gripping mechanism on the side of the door in which it is positioned. Before assembling the controller box, the braking resistance must be positioned, as indicated in the preassembled manual. VERY IMPORTANT: This connection will be carried out voltage-free in the inverter. The controller box shall be assembled and fastened in a similar way to the door frames. To see the assembly sequence, consult the pre-assembled technical manual.

ELECTRICAL PART OF CONTROLLER BOX

V 0.00, Nov. 03

Page 20/41

GENERAL VIEW

MACSCM-07

PRODUCT TECHNICAL MANUAL SCM-07 Complete Lift 2.16 Connecting the terminal box.





SEE INSTALLATION MANUAL SUPPLIED WITH PRE-ASSEMBLED SCM This box, along with the necessary connectors, makes it possible to start up the machine and to use it for the assembly of the mechanical part of the ascent, and in this way, move the car up and down before performing the electrical installation. CAUTION: It will be necessary to supply power to the controller and connect the machine to this.

2.17 Performing the Electrical Installation of the Machine.





• Disconnect the general switches of the installation. • Protect yourself from electrical discharges by using tools with an insulator of no less than 1000V. • Work clothing must not be made of fabric with plastic components (it is advised that this is made of cotton).

SEE INSTALLATION MANUAL SUPPLIED WITH PRE-ASSEMBLED SCM AND WITH SASSI LEO MACHINE (DISC BRAKE MODEL) The electrical installation shall not vary much with respect to conventional installation. However, special care must be taken when routing the ropes through the shaft, since this determines the behaviour of the electromagnetic compatibility of the installation, as well as possibly interfering with car or door movement. All of the rope routing and the electrical part are explained in detail in the pre-assembled technical manual.

V 0.00, Nov. 03

Page 21/41

MACSCM-07


2.18 Assembly of overspeed governor.





SEE INSTALLATION MANUAL SUPPLIED WITH SHAFT COMPONENTS At this stage of the assembly, install the overspeed governor, which will allow you to move with the lift safely. Begin by assembling the top part of the overspeed governor (see diagram in documentation supplied with this component), located in the overhead area, positioning this in the position indicated in the plan view drawing of the top part of the governor. Then, install the bottom part of the governor in the pit area, as indicated in the installation drawing. Finally, position the governor rope by fastening it to the control lever of the wedging box, which should have been correctly adjusted previously. NOTE: To connect the rope to the frame, see the frame and wedging box manual .

PHOTO OF TOP PART OF GOVERNOR

PLAN VIEW OF LAYOUT OF TOP PART OF GOVERNOR

V 0.00, Nov. 03

Page 22/41

MACSCM-07


2.19 Assembly of Landing Doors.





SEE INSTALLATION AND ASSEMBLY MANUAL OF LANDING DOORS Firstly, assemble the car floor, following the instructions included in the load-weighing switch installation manual, the car assembly manual and using the measurements shown on the installation drawing. Once you have assembled the car floor, you are ready to assemble the landing doors. Use the suitable tools for this operation. During the assembly, take special care to follow the instructions of the landing doors assembly manual, as well as to check that each door installed is properly levelled and blocked with the relevant flap lock.

2.20 Assembly of Car.





SEE INSTALLATION MANUAL SUPPLIED WITH CAR 1. 2. 3.

4.

Before performing this operation, follow the points set out in ‘Shaft Layout and Inspection’. Make sure you recheck the weight content in the counterweight frame. Bear in mind the relevant clearances with respect to the landing doors. Assemble the car, connecting the floor to the frame and continuing the assembly as indicated in the car assembly manual.

TOP CAR FASTENING

V 0.00, Nov. 03

Page 23/41

MACSCM-07

PRODUCT TECHNICAL MANUAL SCM-07 Complete Lift 2.21 Assembly of Car Operator.




SEE INSTALLATION MANUAL SUPPLIED WITH DOOR OPERATOR

During the assembly of the different components and accessories of the electrical part, follow the points set out in ‘Shaft Layout and Inspection’ and that described in the section on the electrical installation of the machine. This component will be responsible for the suitable opening and closing of the telescopic panels of the doors.

2.22 Assembly of Rescue System of SCM-07 lift.




SEE INSTALLATION MANUAL SUPPLIED WITH MECHANICAL RESCUE SYSTEM CAUTION: This assembly must be performed by 2 workers The mechanical rescue system enables the car to be moved in the event of an emergency, until it is positioned at the height of the nearest landing, which will be indicated by the indicator LED located in the top part of the controller box. At this moment, the passengers may leave the lift safely. This system is comprised of two main subsets, known as the machine subset and cabinet subset, which are connected together by a flexible cable and a metal brake flexible cable. The components that are to be installed inside the shaft shall be assembled from the car roof. IMPORTANT: Carry out all the operations with the counterweight below, near the buffers. The brake flexible cable of the rescue system must always be tightened at the end of the inside of the shaft.

V 0.00, Nov. 03

Page 24/41

MACSCM-07

PRODUCT TECHNICAL MANUAL SCM-07 Complete Lift 2.23 Assembly of counterweight buffers and car frame.




SEE INSTALLATION MANUAL SUPPLIED WITH SHAFT COMPONENTS 1. 2.

To assemble the counterweight buffers, anchor these to the ground, using the holes of the bed plate prepared for this. To assemble the pillar-buffers of the car frame, position these inside the frame, as close as possible to the pulley structure.

HOLES IN BED PLATE

LOCATION OF PILLAR-BUFFER

PILLAR-BUFFER

BUFFER

2.24 Assembly of counterweight protection screen.




SEE INSTALLATION MANUAL SUPPLIED WITH SHAFT COMPONENTS

As a final component of the assembly of the mechanical part of the lift, assemble the protection screen of the counterweight frame. All the nuts and screws are in the mechanical box, including the steel plate flanges, which are used to connect the guides rails with the brackets.

Eg. Protection screen – counterweight frame layout

V 0.00, Nov. 03

Page 25/41

MACSCM-07

PRODUCT TECHNICAL MANUAL SCM-07 Complete Lift 2.25 Tools. The tools to which we will refer are the minimum that must be carried by the installation technician to perform the assembly, and are: • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

An electric or mechanical hoist for a minimum of 200 Kg of load. An installation template for the car and counterweight guide rails. A test button pendant. A travelling cable. A nylon or wire cord with the corresponding plumbs. Tool box or boxes A 300 gr plumb bob Two 1500 gr plumb bob Two extendable aluminium scaffolds A plumb line (tracer). A graduated metal set square. A spirit level. A hammer. A cold chisel. A 2 m flexible tape measure. An electric drill hammer. A small rotary hammer. A drill holder with adaptor for iron drill bit. An angle grinder. An electric welder. Grinding discs Two adjustable wrenches (One large and one small). A set of open wrenches from 6_7 to 27_29. A set of Allen wrenches from 2 to 12. A reversible ratchet handle. Box wrenches for controller. Combination pliers. Snipe nose pliers. Pliers for outer washers, with a curved blade Electrician scissors. A small, straight-bladed screwdriver. A medium, straight-bladed screwdriver. A large, straight-bladed screwdriver. A star screwdriver. A hexagon screwdriver. A fixed saw bow. Two steel hand saw blades. A round file. A flat file. Four quick adjustable grips. A self-gripping wrench. A voltage multimeter or tester. A scraper. Two drill bits (One large and one small). Widia concrete drill bits. Diameters 6,8,10,12,18. One long brickwork drill bit, diameter 12 x 165. Steel drill bits, diameter 2.25,3,5,7,9,11,13. A portable light with protection. An oil can. A hacksaw. A roll-up extension lead with several power sockets. A set of feeler gauges.

The above is the basic material required. The workers may use as many tools as they deem necessary, and may also use material from the site that is necessary to suitably perform their work. To avoid losing time, it may be a good idea to keep plugs, insulating tape, screws, terminals, terminal strips, rivets, etc., on hand, which may be necessary at any moment during the assembly.

Conclusion: Up to this point, we have covered the different steps of the installation and assembly process of the SCM-07 lift. Each point may be found in more detail in the specific manuals of the various components. By way of conclusion, below is a summary of the lift’s main features:

Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø

Being machine-room-less and with a fixed self-supporting structure supported on guide rails, the installation does not affect the building’s civil works, and requires a completely standard shaft. It generates the additional minimum loads, similar to those of a hydraulic lift. Its structure is extremely compact, and is built from conventional components. Due to easy access to the machine from the last floor, on the car roof, it is easy to maintain. By following this procedure and using the specific tools and the methodology proposed by MP, the installation time is similar to a conventional lift. Use of the frequency converter system with weight control enables reduced consumption, and maximum comfort, due a high stopping accuracy and the possibility of fully personalising the kinematics.

V 0.00, Nov. 03

Page 26/41

MACSCM-07

PRODUCT TECHNICAL MANUAL SCM-07 Complete Lift Chapter 3 • START-UP IMPORTANT: Before start-up, check that the following is in position and correctly installed: •Car and landing doors. •Limit and pre-limit switches. •Ropes and their attachments. •Counterweight protection screen. •Machine-bedframe set (check the correct tightening torque for the nuts and screws). • Electric wiring in car, control cabinet and shaft (for the duplex configuration, consult the operation sequence to connect both lifts which may be found in the manuals relating to the electrical part).

3.1 Inspection and testing a) Locking devices.

•

EFFECTIVE INTERLOCKING IN CLOSED POSITION AND SAFETY ELECTRIC CONTACT ESTABLISHED (*) Distance of 9 mm minimum

(*) 9

• •

Firstly, make sure that the landing doors are lined up with the car doors. There must be no friction between them or with the door frame. Check that the interlock and flap lock rollers are adjusted. Check the door interlock, making sure that once the landing door is closed the car moves. You may also try moving the door sideways when it is closed. There must be no movement. The car will only move when the interlocking elements are fitted as shown in the diagrams.

4

•

MAX. 2

REAR VIEW OF MECHANICAL LOCKING CAM SLIDE

V 0.00, Nov. 03

Page 27/41

MACSCM-07

PRODUCT TECHNICAL MANUAL SCM-07 Complete Lift b) Electric safety devices. 1. ELECTRICAL PROTECTIONS. Check that there are no loose contacts, and that the connections are tightly screwed, observing that: Differential switches: These will have the suitable trip response and be of the same intensity as the magnetocaloric switch or higher. They must be disconnected manually and with the trial test (see manual). Magneto-caloric switches: Each one of the elements that protect under normal working conditions will, as a maximum, be the double of the intensity consumed. When the current enters, it must go to the differential switch, always at the head end, from there to the magnetocaloric switch, and then to the installation. These tests shall be performed in the power and light circuit. 2.

CONTROLLER.

All cable connections must be checked, both at the inputs and the outputs, and especially the power connections must be correctly secured and adjusted, checking that there is no part of the wire outside the connection terminal. Check that all of the contacts are correctly adjusted, especially those corresponding to the auxiliary contact blocks of the contactors, making sure that they are properly adjusted in their housing. If necessary, dismantle relay capsule or contact blocks to adjust or blow on them to remove possible dust impurities. The thermal relay test shall be performed with the motor at the normal working temperature, after having made several journeys, forcing one of the motor stages to skip or blocking (disconnecting) the brake so that it does not open. The time that it takes to disconnect the controller must not exceed 10 seconds, nor be lower than 8. Check that the ground connection is connected properly in the controller and that the door is connected to the earth.

3.

CAR, EXTERIOR AND MAXIMUM TRAVEL TIME TIMERS. Check that the calls from the car station have preference over the calls from the exterior control stations, with a difference of 2 seconds, at the minimum. Otherwise, adjust the car and exterior timers, making sure that the waiting times are not very long. For example: car timers 2 seconds, exterior timers 4 or 5 seconds. The maximum travel time timer must be adjusted so that, always in the most unfavourable case, this time is longer than how long it takes to cover the distance of the two consecutive floors. With this timer, the cut-off of the controller is also controlled in the event of rope slip on the pulley. 4. ELECTRIC CONTACT OF THE GOVERNOR. Check that when the governor is operated, this contact cuts off the controller. Also check the electric contact of the tension pulley. This will cut off the controller in the event of rope lengthening. 5. CAR SAFETY GEAR TRIPPING. Check that the safety gear switch has cut off the controller. 6. OPERATING THE TOP CONTROL STATION. Check that the push buttons operate in the correct direction marked in each one, and that when the testing switch is pushed into this position, the lift no longer works and the car and exterior control stations stop operating. Check that when the stop button is pressed, the lift does not work. 7. OPERATING THE END-OF-TRAVEL. Check that these cut off the controller when the lift goes beyond the travel at the extreme floors, before the car or the counterweight make contact with the buffers. 8. CAR ROOF SAFETY. Check that when the slackening of the ropes, the STOP button and any other safety device installed in the car roof are activated, the power supply of the controller is cut off, stopping the lift. 9. SAFETY SWITCHES TO CLOSE CAR DOORS. Check that the door contacts work properly, the pin and sockets fit and the connecting wires are secured tightly. 10. PIT SOCKET AND STOP BUTTON. Check that there is a socket with a ground connection and Stop button to cut off the controller. 11. EMERGENCY LIGHTING. Check that the illumination level is normal and once the current is cut off it is sufficient. The emergency lighting shall have sufficient autonomy to remain lit for one hour. 12. CHECK STOPPING ACCURACY AND SMOOTHNESS. With regard to standard EN81-70, this gives us the following parameters: the lift in stopping accuracy shall be more / less 10 mm and in levelling accuracy shall be more / less 20 mm. 13. BELL PUSHES (Exterior and car). Check that these make the lift work and that the numbers correspond with the floors. Check that the light indicators operate in order (occupied, door open, etc….).

14. LOAD WEIGHING SWITCH AND INDICATOR SIGN, CHECK THESE ARE WORKING. Check that the indicator LEDs are working and that when the car is loaded with more than its nominal load, the lift does not work and in the load indicator all the LEDs light up, and the inside overload warning buzzer sounds. 15. POSITION INDICATOR. Check that this works, indicating the car position in accordance with the floor situation.

V 0.00, Nov. 03

Page 28/41

MACSCM-07

PRODUCT TECHNICAL MANUAL SCM-07 Complete Lift 16. PHOTOELECTRIC CELL. Check that these operate when faced with an obstacle, making the doors move back in the case of the automatic landing and car doors. 17. DOOR OPENING PUSH BUTTON. Press this button and check that the doors move back, provided that the backward movement has not been cancelled and in any case, always 5 cm before closing. 18. CAR DOORS. Check that the doors fully close the entrance gap, with no spaces of more than 3.5 mm. There should be no noise when opening or closing and the lift should not start moving with an obstacle measuring more than 1.5 cm in thickness inserted in the door half. Check that the doors do not rub together and make no noise when moving. 19. GROUND CONNECTION Check that all the doors are connected by a conductor cable to the ground of the lift through a terminal.

c ) Suspension fittings and their attachments Check with a gauge that the diameter and shape of the rope is that indicated in Document no. 5 “Complete list of lift components” and Document no. 8 “Basic rope characteristics”. Check the perfect condition of the rope attachments, nuts, locknuts and safety pins of the terminals or rope sockets both in the car and in the counterweight (electric lifts). d ) Braking system Check that the brake is working properly. To do this, the car must carry 25% more than the nominal load. The test shall be performed at nominal speed and during the downwards movement, cutting off the motor and brake power supply. The brake must be able to stop the lift alone. e) Measurement of intensity or power, and measurement of speed. To check the lift speed, the lift must carry the average nominal load, checking with a tachometer that the working speed is in keeping with the project data. Check the current intensity with an ammeter clip when the lift starts and when it is working, making sure that this is correct in accordance with the motor characteristics. Make this measurement in the three phases. f) Electrical installation 1. Measurement of insulation resistance of the different circuits. By using an Ohmmeter, check that the insulation resistance values are exceeded. Nominal voltage of circuit (V)

Testing voltage (DC) V

Insulation resistance (MS)

SEL

250

≥ 0.25

≤ 500

500

≥ 0.5

> 500

1000

≥1

The insulation resistance must be measured between each live and earth wire. To measure this, the electronic components must be disconnected. 2. Also check the continuity (connection between terminals) between the earth terminals of the machine room with the motor, controller, guide rails, governors, tension pulley and car and any component which may accidentally remain live.

V 0.00, Nov. 03

Page 29/41

MACSCM-07

PRODUCT TECHNICAL MANUAL SCM-07 Complete Lift 3.2 Car and Counterweight: Adherence: Check visually that there is no slip between ropes and pulley when operating normally: Mark the pulley and ropes with chalk at the same point, and check that there is no change in their relative positions, after making a full journey (up and down) with the car carrying 125% of the nominal load. Repeat the same operation with the car empty. Balancing of counterweight: To perform this test, all of the car fittings must be assembled. By loading the car with half of the peak load permitted will take the car to half of the travel, such that the counterweight is more or less at the same height. From the controller box on the last floor, and opening the machine brake, move the fly-wheel smoothly (See Rescue System Manual). Check whether the lift moves up or down; depending on this there will be an excess or lack of weight on the counterweight. It is better to leave a lack of counterweight rather than balancing it or leaving an excess (in other words, it is better that the car moves downwards). i) OVERSPEED GOVERNOR. 1. To check the tripping speed of the governor, by using a tachometer check the speed at which the governor works, making sure that this corresponds with the speed marked on the governor. For this purpose, the governor will not have the rope positioned. Work on the governor. 2. Check that when the governor contact is working it cuts off the controller. j) CAR SAFETY GEAR. Check that the safety gear has been properly assembled and adjusted. Check that the rollers or wedges do not rub with the guide rails, and therefore there must be sufficient space between the guide rails and car for the safety gear to work properly. 1. Descent test: With the car loaded with 125% of the nominal load which must be distributed evenly around the car surface area, lock the remote governor with the push button in the control cabinet. The lift will travel at testing speed. Make sure that the car stops opposite a landing door, in order to be able to unload it and free the safety gear. 2. Ascent test: Perform this in the same way, but with the car empty, and with the lift moving at nominal speed. After the test, check that there has been no deterioration that may make the normal use of the lift difficult. Replace the braking components (wedges, rollers) as necessary. A visual inspection is considered sufficient. k) BUFFERS. Energy accumulation type buffer (springs, buffers). Check this with the car carrying its nominal load in contact with the buffers, slackening the ropes and checking that the date corresponds with that given by the characteristic curve of the buffers. The distances established in Document no. 15 “Installation Drawings” must not be exceeded. l ) SOS DEVICE. Check that the two-way means of communication works properly. m) CAR MECHANICAL LOCKING SYSTEM. Check that the lock fits in its housing, that it moves easily in both directions and that the controller is disconnected when the frame and the car are locked. Load the car roof with 150 kg and check that the system resists without noticing any deterioration. (Caution: the car must remain empty). n) MECHANICAL RESCUE SYSTEM. Perform a simulation of the rescue operation, both in ascent and in descent. Check that after these operations the tension of the brake flexible cable is still suitable, and the mechanism that meshes the system returns to its initial position.

V 0.00, Nov. 03

Page 30/41

MACSCM-07

PRODUCT TECHNICAL MANUAL SCM-07 Complete Lift Chapter 4 • USE OF THE SCM LIFT 4.1

Purpose of instructions.

The purpose of this chapter is to provide the instructions necessary for the correct use of the SCM lift, in accordance with standard EN 81_1 and Royal Decree 1314/97, Attachment I, 6.2 (European Directive EC/95/16). This chapter provides the information necessary for the standard use of this lift by the user, stressing a series of points which, due to their difficulty or out of necessity, make the correct use of the lift possible.

4.2 Intended use of Lift The lift in question is manufactured to transport passengers in houses and public buildings, sometimes along with loads, the weights and dimensions of which must not exceed the lift capacity and the car dimensions. The transport of loads which may damage the installation or the car itself is completely prohibited. This lift may only be installed in those buildings in which there are no dwellings above the shaft used for the lift, nor passable areas underneath its travel. Inside the car there is a sign which specifies the lift’s nominal load, expressed in kilograms, as well as the maximum number of persons. The weight of the load permitted by the lift must never be exceeded (for this purpose, there is a device in the lift that notifies that it is overloaded, being necessary to remove the excess load). The number of passengers indicated on the sign must neither be exceeded, since this may cause the lift to become overloaded. The basic operation consists of the transfer of the loaded or empty car from one level to another. Therefore, the user stands in front of the access to the lift where there is an electric push button control panel. The control push buttons on the landing doors may have different symbols or abbreviations. Below, some of the symbols or abbreviations used in our range of lifts are shown.

CALL

LL

Control push button: calls lift to go up or down

Control push button: calls lift to go up

Control push button: calls lift to go down

Once the lift has been called, its presence is detected when the doors are opened (automatic doors), when the car inside light is visible (manual door with vision panel) or when a light or sound indicator in the electric landing control panel indicates. Once the door/s are open, you may access the inside of the car where there a number of controls and a sign which specifies the lift’s nominal load expressed in kilograms, as well as the maximum number of persons.

V 0.00, Nov. 03

Page 31/41

MACSCM-07

PRODUCT TECHNICAL MANUAL SCM-07 Complete Lift Among the controls, there are a series of push buttons which are listed below:

-1

0

1

Control push button to choose the floor desired (-2,1,0,1,2,3, etc ...)

Control push button for alarm (yellow).

Control push button to reopen doors.

Control push button to close doors.

Overload indicator.

There are also display panels indicating the floors, both inside and outside the car (landings).

The user may find other engravings on the control push buttons and indicators, since these may have been specified by the owners.

V 0.00, Nov. 03

Page 32/41

MACSCM-07

PRODUCT TECHNICAL MANUAL SCM-07 Complete Lift 4.3 Types of Controllers: Distinctions must be made regarding the operating of the lift depending on the type of controller: 4.3.1. Simple Automatic Controller At the moment when the car doors close, the passenger in the car has a preference of 3 seconds over the passengers on the landing to call the lift. Operating the controller in ascent: once the desired level has been pressed, the car will go directly to the chosen level. If there are several passengers, the passenger on the lowest floor must press the button first. Once the desired level has been reached and the passengers have left, the doors close, the level of the next floor is pressed, and so on. Operating the controller in descent: the passengers on the landings call the car by pressing the call push button, provided that the engaged sign is not lit, otherwise the call is not registered, nor will be attended. Once the car is on the landing, which may be indicated by the door vision panel or by the car presence light indicators, the landing and car doors may be opened, and during the seconds of preference over any other passenger on the landing, the car may be called with no interference, as described above. 4.3.2 Collective Simple Controller in Descent The lifts equipped with this controller have a memory which records calls to go up and down made by the passengers in the car. On the other hand, only the calls to go down made by the passengers waiting on the landings are recorded in this memory, not the calls to go up. Operating the controller in ascent: the controls in the car also have a preference of 3 seconds over those on the landings, from the moment when the lift is in the working position (closed doors). These also have preference after the entry of each passenger in the car, in lifts with automatic doors, with a photoelectric cell in the door threshold. As the passengers enter the car, they press the push buttons corresponding to the levels that interest them. Once the last passenger has entered the lift, the car automatically starts, stopping on the floors requested. It starts again once the last passenger for that floor has left and the doors have closed. During the ascent, the lift does not answer any floor request, except for the highest floor, provided that this is above the highest floor pressed by the passengers in the car to go up. Once on this floor, the passenger/s leave, and as always, once the doors have closed, they have 3 seconds preference over all the floors called to decide the direction of movement. If a button is pressed for the lift to go higher, the lift will go up, even if it is called from a lower floor. Operating the controller in descent: the passengers will call the descent, and the lift will go down, stopping automatically on all the floors called. 4.3.3 Collective Simple Controller in Ascent and Descent With the simple controller in ascent and descent, the car not only stops and collects passengers on landings during the descent, as the last controller does, but also during the ascent. Operating the controller in ascent: as the passengers enter the car, they push the press buttons corresponding to the levels desired, and the calls are recorded in the memory. Once the last person has entered and the doors close, the car is set in motion, stopping successively on the levels requested by the passengers in the car, as well as on the levels on which the passengers on the landings have pressed the call button to go up. The lift will not respond to the calls to go down, even if these are recorded in the memory. However, it does answer the call to go down from the highest floor above the last floor that has been called to go up. Operating the controller in descent: the car collects all the passengers on all the levels that have called the lift to go down. As the passengers enter, they press the push button for the level they desire to record it in the memory. and always in descent, the car will stop on all the levels in the order pressed by the passengers in the car and on the landings until it reaches the ground floor. 4.3.4 Duplex Controller The Duplex controller is a single controller for two lifts. In this controller, there is one single landing station on each floor and only one lift may be called. It will always answer the nearest lift. The operating of the car controls is exactly the same as that of the lifts with a simple automatic controller. The passengers will order their calls by firstly pressing the button for the lowest floor. Once this has been reached and the passengers have left, the button for the next floor is pressed, and so on the passengers press the buttons for the floors desired, in the order from the lowest to the highest. The passengers on the landings press the call push button, only when the red engaged sign goes out, and the lift car that is free will arrive. If the two are free, the nearest lift car will arrive. If there is only one lift free, after the call push button is pressed, this will light up to indicate that the call has been recorded, and the red engaged sign will light up. If the two lift cars are free, the white call push button will light up, but not the engaged sign, since there is still one lift free.

V 0.00, Nov. 03

Page 33/41

MACSCM-07

PRODUCT TECHNICAL MANUAL SCM-07 Complete Lift 4.3.5 Collective Duplex Controller in Descent This controller is a combination of the duplex controller and the collective simple controller in descent. The layout and operating is the same as the collective controller in descent as far as the controls and signals are concerned, as well as the response to the calls for the passengers in the cars. The difference lies in that it only has one single control on each floor for the two lifts. Operating the controller in ascent: as the passengers enter the car, they press the push buttons corresponding to the destination level, and the calls are recorded in the controller memory. Once the last passenger has entered and the doors have closed, the car is automatically set in motion, stopping successively on the levels recorded and restarting when the passengers have left and the doors close. During the ascent, the lift does not answer any call to go down from a passenger on the landing, except for the highest floor, provided that this is above the highest floor pressed by the passengers in the car to go up. Once on this floor, the passenger/s leave, and as always, they have 3 seconds to press the push button and decide the direction of movement. If they press a push button to go up, the car will go up, even if it has been called to go down. Operating the controller in descent: if the passengers call the lift to go down, it will descend, stopping automatically on all the floors that have been called and in the order called by the passengers that have entered the car, provided that these are for lower floors, until the load is completed. From then onwards, the calls from lower floors will not be answered. 4.3.6. Selective Duplex controller in ascent and descent This controller is a combination of the duplex controller and the collective controller in ascent and descent. Operating the controller in ascent: as the passengers enter the car, they press the push buttons corresponding to the levels desired. Once the doors have closed, the car automatically starts, stopping on all the floors called by the passengers in the car, and in addition on the floors on which the passengers on the landing have pressed the call push button to go up. The lift will not stop on the floors on which the passengers on the landings have pressed the call push button to go down, although it records them in the memory to answer these calls during its descent. However, it will answer the call to go down from the highest floor above the last floor that has been called to go up. Operating the controller in descent: once all the calls to go up have been answered, the car goes up to the highest floor of those recorded by the passengers of the floors to go down, and after the passengers have entered the car and registered their calls, the lift begins its descent, stopping on all the floors that have been requested to go down. The lift does not answer the calls to go up, except those of the lowest floor of those that have been called, provided that this is below the last floor recorded to go down. In any case, the calls and ascents between the two lifts are distributed in accordance with a programmed standard, according to the use of the building. Having described the operating of the controller, we must now recall a number of points to bear in mind for the use of the lift: • At the end of the travel (ascent or descent), the lift will stop at the requested level (to find out the stopping level, consult the number displayed or listen to the level announcer). Wait until the doors have opened and then leave the car. When the outer door is manual, the user must push this open. • The lifts have a controller device for an excess of load. This device is activated when the passenger load exceeds 110 percent of the authorised load. The passengers will notice a light indicator which indicates an overload and hear a warning sound. The lift will not start until the necessary passengers have left the car to avoid going over the peak load. • The passengers must enter and leave the lift as lightly and in the most orderly fashion possible, avoiding getting stuck in the door threshold. If the lift has a reopening system (photoelectric cell, etc.) make sure that you do not block its path, since this will prevent the car doors from closing. • Take care when entering or leaving as you may catch clothing or objects on the doors. Try to keep away from the doors. • If an unexpected situation should occur (lift stopping), try to keep calm. If the lift stops suddenly, press a level and if the lift does not respond, press the alarm push button. If this does not exist, press the outer communication control and wait for an answer. If it is necessary to perform a rescue operation, wait for the relevant instructions and explanations.

V 0.00, Nov. 03

Page 34/41

MACSCM-07

PRODUCT TECHNICAL MANUAL SCM-07 Complete Lift 4.4

Information on the Standard Use of the Elevator:

4.4.1 Keeping documentation The lift user must be familiar with the instructions for use of a lift. These instructions must be kept so that they may be consulted at any time. In the machine room or inside the enclosure, it is advised to keep the detailed instructions to be followed if the lift stops at the wrong time, and especially the instructions on the manual rescue operation or the electrical rescue operation, and those referring to the landing door unlocking key. 4.4.2 Events that require the Intervention of Trained Staff To perform a rescue operation of passengers, as well as to use the door emergency key, it is always necessary to request the presence of trained staff. The abovementioned operations may only be performed by staff who are properly trained to do so. 4.4.3 Safe loading and unloading Special care must be taken when the car is loaded and unloaded, avoiding getting clothes, bags, packets, etc, caught on the doors. The loading and unloading procedure must be carried out in an orderly fashion, avoiding getting stuck in the door threshold. If the lift has a reopening system (photoelectric cell, etc.) make sure that you do not block its path, since this will prevent the doors from closing. The dimensions and weight of the load must not exceed the capacity permitted by the lift. The number of passengers must not exceed that indicated on the sign inside the car. 4.4.4 Openings free of obstacles on floors Avoid possible interference with the door opening due to any dangerous steps or objects (flower pots, bins, etc.) which may block safe access to the car. 4.4.5 Open Shafts Special caution should be taken when the lift is installed in an open or partially open shaft, avoiding objects falling into the shaft, as well any the insertion of any element that may damage the mobile part of the lift and interfere with the safe functioning of the lift. 4.4.6 Control cabinet / Last Floor In the access to the control cabinet, there is always a sign or poster with the following notice at least “Lift control cabinet_Danger_Access prohibited to all unauthorised staff”. This notice restricts access to the control cabinet, and only authorised staff may enter (maintenance, inspection and passenger rescue) with a key. During inspections, maintenance, rescue, start-up, etc., it must be checked that both the machine, the bedframe and the car roof are properly lit. 4.4.7 Use of the Emergency Key As we described in the point “events that require the intervention of trained staff”, the use of the emergency key is restricted to trained staff. How to use the emergency key is described in the rescue operation manual. 4.4.8 Maintenance The owner of the lift, being responsible for its use and that it is maintained under safety conditions, must hire the maintenance services from a qualified company. This company must have an incidents book for the lift, in which they note the intervention reports when important anomalies occur or components are changed in the lift, as well as interventions due to accidents. The incidents book must be made available to the owner if the latter should request so. The owner must request, in due time, the compulsory inspections and provide the maintenance company with access to perform the inspections and tests. If the installation is out of use for a long period of time, the owner must request a general inspection of the lift from the maintenance company. When any user detects an anomaly in the functioning of the lift, the owner must notify this immediately to the maintenance company and place an “Out of Use” on all of the lift doors. When the landings of the lift doors are cleaned, special care must be taken not to spill products (liquids or solids) inside the lift shaft.

V 0.00, Nov. 03

Page 35/41

MACSCM-07

PRODUCT TECHNICAL MANUAL SCM-07 Complete Lift Chapter 5 • MAINTENANCE CAUTION ACCESS TO THE MACHINE ROOM (MACHINE, BEDFRAME, GOVERNOR, etc ... ), IS GAINED FROM THE DOOR ON THE LAST FLOOR, WHERE THE CONTROLLER BOX IS LOCATED. BEFORE ACCESSING THE CAR ROOF, STOP THIS AT A SUITABLE DISTANCE IN ORDER TO BE ABLE TO CROSS THE DOOR OPERATOR WITH EASE. DO NOT LEAVE THE OPEN CABINET UNSUPERVISED UNDER ANY CIRCUMSTANCES. THE CAR ROOF IS DESIGNED TO BEAR THE LOAD CAUSED BY THE PRESENCE OF TWO PERSONS DURING THE MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS.

5.1

Description of the electrical panel components:

Level indicator

Swinging supply connection Input supply network

Alarm indicator (in multiplex installations)

Upper panel Fixtures for installing rescue

Electrical protections Emergency electric control unit box(optional)

Lighting box and power socket Intercom set (optional)

Reserved space for rescue system Upper-lower connections panel Control relay. Fuses. General interruptor. Temperature probe.

Upper part

Transformer AMB1 o AMB2 board (according to installation) Lower panel

MicroBASIC board Thermoprobe board and brake bridge rectifier board

Lower door Shaft and car input installation Shaft and car installing connection

Inverter capacitors

Braking resistor cable output Braking resistor swinging

Speed governor remote operation

Machine room connections

Frecuency inverter Output filter Briefcase Contactors

Level indicator battery

V 0.00, Nov. 03

Input supply machine

Page 36/41

MACSCM-07

PRODUCT TECHNICAL MANUAL SCM-07 Complete Lift 5.2 Lift Shaft: Inspection and tests to be performed during the maintenance inspections of the lift shaft. During these tests and inspections in the shaft, in order to contact with the exterior, the worker must always carry a telephone which may be connected in any of the telephone connection boxes. In order to access the pit, use a ladder which is hanging on one of the pit walls. 1. Check that there are no water leaks in the pit and that it does not contain combustible materials or materials that may affect the functioning of the lift. Check that the pit is clean, dry and free of refuse. 2. The lift premises and pit must have sufficient artificial lighting, in order to perform the inspections properly: Check that the system is working. 3. Check that the car top control station (car roof) is working correctly and that the lift does not respond to the calls from the floors nor to those pressed inside the car whilst the inspection control device is connected. 4. IMPORTANT: The ladder to access the pit must be kept on its fastening bracket, on one of the side walls of the pit, after the maintenance work.

5.3 Guide rails Inspection and tests to be performed during the maintenance inspections of the guide rails. 1. Check the state of the car guide rails and counterweight, and their fastenings. Check for possible changes in the distance between guides. 2. Should automatic lubricators be required in the car and counterweight, the level of oil must be controlled and refilled if necessary. Chen the guide rails have no automatic lubricator, it is recommended that the guide rails are lubricated every 2 to 3 months, depending on the level of use. Always use the relevant lubricant for each material. An excess of lubrication may be as harmful as too little

5.4 Access Doors Inspection and tests to be performed during the maintenance inspections of the lift access doors. 1. Check that the series are working correctly in all doors. The lift will not operate if one of the contacts of the series fails. To check this in the case of automatic doors, prompt the failure by activating the lock. 2. Check that the mechanical locking of the door works properly. To do this, try moving the door sideways. There must be no movement.

V 0.00, Nov. 03

Page 37/41

MACSCM-07

PRODUCT TECHNICAL MANUAL SCM-07 Complete Lift 3. In the case of automatic doors, both in start-up and periodic inspections, make sure there is no interference or overlap between the grips of the mechanical locking, as well the possibility of disconnection due to the movement of the door panel. Therefore, make sure that the distance of 9 millimetres is respected, as shown in the figure.

4

(*) 9

Effective interlocking in closed position and safety electric contact established

MAX. 2

Rear view of mechanical locking cam slide (*) Distance of 9 mm, minimum. For this distance, only measure the straight surface from the end of the curve. 4. During the periodic inspections, the following must be controlled: locking, sensitivity to reopening of the door when a passenger is hit or about to be so, failure to start with the door open, wear and tear of the door guide shoes, contacts, carriage wheels, etc. Clean, adjust or change as necessary, (consult landing doors assembly manual).

5.5

Ropes:

Inspections and tests to be performed during the start-up inspections and maintenance inspections of the driving ropes and their fastenings. 1. Both in start-up and periodic inspections, check the state of the entire length of the cables. To do this, cut any broken wires. A broken cord or wires in one metre long of rope, makes it necessary to change all of the ropes. To detect broken wires, pass a cotton cloth along the length of the rope. Occasionally, broken wires occur due to wear and tear (friction); these can be checked visually. 2. Check the state of the rope fastenings to the counterweight and the car, especially the nuts of the rope attachments. 3. Check the lubrication of the ropes, bearing in mind that the ropes should be not covered with grease that makes it impossible to check their state. 5.5.1 Procedure to Replace the Ropes a) Lock the car in the bottom locking holder, and at the same time, hang the counterweight in the top part of the shaft, without exceeding the maximum load permitted by the hooks hanging in the overhead. b) Place additional safety slings on both frames.

V 0.00, Nov. 03

Page 38/41

MACSCM-07

PRODUCT TECHNICAL MANUAL SCM-07 Complete Lift c) Change ropes by working from the pit for the car frame and with the assembly scaffolds located on the last landing for the counterweight and machine frame.

5.6 Machine and Bedframe: Inspection and tests to be performed during the start-up and maintenance inspections of the lift, bedframe and mechanical brake, (see Manual for Use and Maintenance of Sassi Leo Machine). 1. Check the correct tightening torque for the screws and fastenings of the machine-bedframe assembly. 2. Check the state of the rope anti-slip system and the pulley protection assembly. 3. During the periodic inspections, it must be checked that the machine is clean, with particular attention paid to the ventilator and electric components.

1.

The disc brake of the machine does not require any type of adjustment, since it is delivered from the factory already fine-tuned and calibrated. If it is necessary to adjust it, consult the specific instructions of this device.

5.6.1 Procedure to Replace the Machine a) Lock the car in the top locking holder, and at the same time, hang the counterweight in the bottom part of the shaft, without exceeding the maximum load permitted by the hooks hanging in the overhead. b) Place additional safety slings on both frames. c) Dismantle the rope anti-slip system and the traction pulley protection. d) Remove the ropes of the driving pulley one by one, and leave them supported over the safety slings. e) Disconnect the electrical installation of the machine and dismantle the rescue system. f) Change the machine, ensuring its position hanging from the lifting system before dismantling the four fixing screws, without exceeding the maximum load permitted by the hooks hanging in the overhead. g) Remove the machine from the shaft without supporting it on the car roof. h) To assemble the new machine follow the process in reverse.

V 0.00, Nov. 03

Page 39/41

MACSCM-07

PRODUCT TECHNICAL MANUAL SCM-07 Complete Lift 5.6.2 Procedure to Replace the Pulley a) Lock the car in the top locking holder, and at the same time, hang the counterweight in the bottom part of the shaft, without exceeding the maximum load permitted by the hooks hanging in the overhead. b) Place additional safety slings on both frames. c) Dismantle the rope anti-slip system and the traction pulley protection. d) Mark each one of the ropes with its current position in the traction pulley to avoid them getting crossed or tangled up when they are repositioned. e) Remove the ropes of the traction pulley one by one, and leave them supported over the safety sling. f) Change the pulley. g) Reintroduce the ropes in the pulley.

5.7 Overspeed Governor: Inspection and tests to be performed during the start-up and maintenance inspections of the overspeed governor (consult overspeed governor installation and assembly manual). 1. Check that the governor works reliably and safely. The bearings must be checked and lubricated each year. 2. Check that the rope tension is maintained in the tension pulley. Make sure that the safety contact is working properly when slackening of the ropes occurs. 3. Check whether the governor rope has lengthened beyond the distance allowed, which may activate the safety contact in the tension pulley. If lengthening has occurred, trim the cable. 4. Check that the rope wires of the governor are not damaged. Should this occur, replace the rope. One method of finding out the state of the ropes is to check whether there are any broken cords or wires along a length of one metre. To detect these, pass a cotton cloth along the length of the cable. Occasionally, broken wires occur due to wear and tear (friction), these can be seen visually. 5. Frequently and safely check the functioning of the overspeed contact (governor contact). 6. Check the rope attachments and pulley grooves, cleaning foreign particles in order to ensure the proper functioning of the governor.

5.8

Buffers:

Inspection and tests to be performed during the maintenance inspections of the buffers. 1. Check the buffers and their state (check maintenance, installation and use of buffers manual).

5.9 Alarm Device and Emergency Stopping: Inspection and tests to be performed during the maintenance inspections of the alarm device. 1. Check that this works and that it is audible from outside the shaft by the persons responsible for providing help. 2. Check that all the stopping switches (pits, car roof and car stop control stations) work correctly. 3. Check that all the systems of the lift for alarms, emergencies and rescue procedures work properly (emergency lighting, telephones, etc).

5.10 Rescue System: 5.10.1 Inspection and Tests to be performed during the Maintenance Inspections of the Rescue System. 1. Check the functioning and state of the meshing system with the machine shaft and remote brake opening from the rescue controller. Check the tension of the brake flexible cables (consult the rescue system manual). 5.10.2 Inspection and Tests of the Car and Access thereto 1. Check the general state of maintenance of the car and its frame. 2. Check that the car lighting is permanently on. 3. Check that the stopping switch in the car roof works correctly. 4. The distance between the car door and access door must not be more than 20 millimetres, except in the case of simultaneous automatic doors, which may reach up to 30 millimetres. 5. Check that there are toe guards in the car and in the access doors. 6. Check that the lift does not start with the car door open and that, once in motion, it stops when the door opens, except in the case of automatic doors with floor levelling, in which case the levelling may be checked during the opening of the doors. 7. Check that the car door operates freely, as well as the sensitivity of this to an obstacle. 8. Check that car doors make contact. 9. Check that the panels slide correctly, as well as the state of the guide shoes. If there is wear and tear, change them. 10. Check that there is a load plate inside the car. 11. Check that the call push buttons on the landing and the push buttons in the car (for example, to select a level or close the doors) work properly. 12. Check that the two-way communication channel is working (car with exterior).

5.11 Counterweight 5.11.1

Inspection and Tests of Counterweight

1. Check the state of maintenance of the frame that supports the weights, especially the nuts, locknuts, guide shoe brackets, etc. 2. Check rope clamps, nuts, locknuts and safety pins of the terminals or rope sockets.

V 0.00, Nov. 03

Page 40/41

MACSCM-07

PRODUCT TECHNICAL MANUAL SCM-07 Complete Lift 5.12 Guide shoes 1. The guide shoes must be changed one by one, but not simultaneously. 2. When the old guide shoes are taken off, make sure that the frame does not move too much, in order to place the new ones on easily.

5.13 Safety gear 5.13.1

Inspection and Tests of Safety gear

1. Check the state of the wedging box, and the absence of foreign bodies inside it. 2. Check that there is no corrosion in the safety gear or wedging box (consult wedging box installation and assembly manual).

5.14 Batteries 1. Check the state of the large and small emergency batteries of the installation, and that these have sufficient electric charge.

5.15 Load weighing switches 5.15.1

Inspection and Tests of Load Weighing Switches (consult the load weighing switch installation manual).

5.16 Electrical Safety Circuits (consult the preassembled electrical installation manual). 5.16.1 Inspection and Tests of the electrical safety circuits 1. Check that the ground lines that connect the door frames, flap locks, motor casing or motors and control unit are in a good condition, connected to the earth or to the metal guide rails. 2. Check that grounding of the conductors of the safety circuits cause the lift to stop. 3. Check the correct functioning of all the safety devices and these cause the lift to come to a complete stop. 4. Check the proper functioning of the electric rescue equipment, if the installation is equipped with this. 5. Check currents and voltages as necessary.

5.17 Signs and Controllers (consult the preassembled electrical installation manual). 5.17.1 Inspection and tests of signs or controllers 1. In the case of closed shafts with access doors without vision panels, and not automatic, there must be a light indicator in front of the door that notifies of the presence of the car: Check that this works on each floor. 2. Check that the delay works, giving priority to controls from the car over exterior calls. 3. The final safety stop at the ends of the travel must be caused by the final safety switches which are different to those that normally stop the lift at the top and ground floors. Check they work correctly and that the car clearances in the guide rails do not hinder their functioning. Check the correct levelling on all floors, both with the car empty and at full load. 4. Check the state of the relays and contactors, as well as their behaviour if a phase produces an error or if they invert. 5. Check the last recordings of errors if the controller is equipped with the error storage device.

5.18 Controller Box 5.18.1 Inspection and tests to be performed on the controller box 1. There is electric lighting in the controller box and a safety switch which keeps the lift at a stop when necessary for inspection. Check that this works. 2. Check the general switch, contactors, relays, fuses and the level of artificial lighting. 3. Inspection of feasibility and safety in the access to the controller box for the safety of the maintenance staff. 4. Check the state of the controller box flap locks, and that these make it possible to close it without using a key. Lubricate the flap locks regularly. 5. After each inspection, clear the access to the controller box.

V 0.00, Nov. 03

Page 41/41

MACSCM-07

INSTRUCTIONS: PR-2500-UD (V.50) Date: 12-09-2002

Check: 01

DYNATECH PROGRESSIVE SAFETY GEAR PR-2500-UD (V.50)

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE AND MAINTENANCE


Check: 01

-1-


Check: 01

-2-


Check: 01

-3-


Check: 01

-4-


Check: 01

-5-


Check: 01

-6-


Check: 01

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE AND MAINTENANCE _______________________________________________________________ 1. GENERAL INDICATIONS. 2. SAFETY GEAR INSTALLATION. 2.1. TO THE SLING MAKER. 2.2. TO THE INSTALLER. 3. USE AND MAINTENANCE. 3.1

GUIDE RAILS.

3.1.1 GUIDE RAILS WITH A GRIPPING WIDTH OF 25mm OR GREATER. 3.1.2 GUIDE RAILS WITH A GRIPPING WIDTH OF 20mm. 3.2 SPEED GOVERNOR. 3.3 RANGE OF USE. 3.3.1 GUIDE RAILS WITH A GRIPPING WIDTH OF 25mm OR GREATER. 3.2.2 GUIDE RAILS WITH A GRIPPING WIDTH OF 20mm. 3.4 FRICTION PARTS REPLACEMENT. 3.5 MAINTENANCE. 3.5.1 CLEANING. 3.5.2 CORROSION. 4. GENERAL DRAWING. _______________________________________________________________

-7-


Check: 01

1.-GENERAL INDICATIONS. Each supplied set of safety gears has been regulated at the factory according to the required use characteristics: Total weight (P+Q) and the guide rail thickness. These characteristics, the EC type examination number and the serial number are shown on the protection plates attached to the safety gear boxes. It is absolutely forbidden: a) To combine and install safety gear boxes with different serial numbers. b) To use a set of safety gears for installations with different characteristics to the ones shown on the protection plates of their safety gear sets. c) To intervene on any safety gear component. DYNATECH DYNAMICS & TECHNOLOGY, S.L. will not be responsible of any damages caused by the unobservance of any point of these general indications.

2.-SAFETY GEAR INSTALLATION. The Standard requires that the safety gear installation must be done including a security contact of type AC - 15 or DC - 13 according to EN 60947 - 5 - 1.

2.1- TO THE SLING MAKER: The fixing holes for the safety gear must be made in the sling sides according to the dimensions and positions shown in the enclosed safety gear drawings, making sure the guide rail axis center to the sling beams.

-8-


Check: 01

Once the safety gear is well placed and its roller trains are attached to the driving bars, it should be checked that both trains act synchronized in accordance to the driving bar commands. The sling maker is responsible for the proper location of the safety gear on the sling as well as the adjustment checking and synchronized working of the driving bar. The pin of the train, in its rest position, must be at the central point of the protection plates.

Rest position

-9-


Check: 01

Downwards engagement

Upwards engagement

- 10 -


Check: 01

As a suggestion for the safety gear fixing to the sling, the tightening torque of 8.8 M12 screws is 79.09 Nm and 111 Nm for those of 10.9. Remark: The rollers for the downwards engagement marked with a “D” letter, must remain always at the lower part of the safety gear. The letters which rollers are distinguished with can be appreciated at first view trough the long hole of the protection plates.

2.2- TO THE INSTALLER: During the installation at the well, first of all, the guide rails must be introduced in the grooves of the safety gear housings. Then the position of the guide rail in the housing is adjusted as follows: the side of the guide rail, 1.5 mm from the brake block, the guide head, 3mm from the bottom of the groove (see drawings). For these adjustments the sliders will be handled without modifying the position of the safety gear in the sling because the sling maker - 11 -


Check: 01

must have properly fixed the safety gear in its final position. For the correct safety gear acting, the distances mentioned here above must be strictly respected by the installer.

To make easy the adjustment at work of the distances between the faces of the guide rails and the parts of the safety gears which are opposite the guide rail, it will be possible to use plates which will allow the emplacement of the guide rail in its correct position in the grooves of the safety gear. The plates must be removed once the adjustment operation has finished.

Remark: The installer must be sure that the sling maker has situated the rollers for the downwards engagement, marked with a “D” letter, at the lower part of the safety gear.

- 12 -


Check: 01

3.-USE AND MAINTENANCE. The non-fulfilment of the following prescriptions may produce deceleration values and breaking distances which could not be in accordance with the Standard.

3.1-GUIDE RAILS: 3.1.1.-GUIDE RAILS WITH A GRIPPING WIDTH OF 25mm OR GREATER.

a) The guide rails used can be either the cold-drawn or the planed type. The admissible tolerances for the guide rails thickness are between –0 and +0.10 mm. b) The progressive safety gear PR-2500-UD can be used with this type of guide rails until a nominal speed of 2m/s and the governor response maximum speed is 2.5 m/s. c)

If after the safety gear performance you find scratched guide zones placed within a

distance of less than 1 meter between them, it is recommended to substitute the affected guide parts. d) The guide rails must be lubricated with ISO VG 150 oil lubricant.

3.1.2.-GUIDE RAILS WITH A GRIPPING WIDTH OF 20mm.(for example T 65/A) a) The guide rails used can be either the cold-drawn or the planed type. The admissible tolerances for the guide rails thickness are between –0 and +0.10 mm. b) The progressive safety gear PR-2500-UD can be used with this type of guide rails until a nominal speed of 1m/s and the governor response maximum speed is 1.5 m/s.

- 13 -


c)

Check: 01

If after the safety gear performance you find scratched guide zones placed within a

distance of less than 1 meter between them, it is recommended to substitute the affected guide parts. d) The guide rails must be lubricated with ISO VG 150 oil lubricant.

3.2-SPEED GOVERNOR: The speed governor rope tension has to be big enough to warrant, during the governor performance, a traction of 300 Nm at least in the connection point of the safety gear driving bar.

3.3-RANGE OF USE: 3.1.1.-GUIDE RAILS WITH A GRIPPING WIDTH OF 25mm OR GREATER. Here below the standard P+Q board is shown. The nominal values are those of the central line.

-7'5% 567

658

764

859

963

1060 1178 1317 1454 1627 1808

P+Q

613

711

826

929

1041 1146 1274 1424 1572 1759 1955

+7'5% 659

764

888

999

1119 1232 1370 1531 1690 1891 2102

- 14 -


Check: 01

3.1.2.-GUIDE RAILS WITH A GRIPPING WIDTH OF 20mm.(for example T 65/A)

-7'5% 621 P+Q

671

+7'5% 721

3.4-FRICTION PARTS REPLACEMENT: The friction parts, brake shoes and rollers, can support three free fall upwards performances and three downwards performances, as it is exposed in the Standard EC typeexamination criteria. Anyway, after having intervene in a real situation it is recommended to replace the friction parts. In that case, contact Dynatech or its nearest distributor, in order to know the procedure to be followed.

In order to obtain a better control, the maintenance person may have a register of the safety gear performances. The safety gear serial number should be written in its register as well as each and every acting. It is not necessary the braking parts replacement, caused by normal inspection tests, unless the braking distance surpass the double of the one obtained at the very first test of the installation.

- 15 -


Check: 01

3.5-MAINTENANCE: 3.5.1.-CLEANING. It is very important to make sure that there is not any alien element inside the safety gear housing in order to guarantee the proper work of the moving parts.

3.5.2.-CORROSION. Dynatech safety gears have anticorrosive protection in all cases. However, a periodical checking must be done to make sure that all the moving elements of the safety gear are still in perfect work conditions. A wedging test is not necessary, but a simple check of its free movements and a visual checking of the surfaces general condition. These verifications must be done more often when the installation is placed inside a specially corrosive atmosphere.

4.-GENERAL DRAWING

- 16 -

1.5 d(mm) 21.529 22.029 22.529 23.029 23.529 24.029 24.529 25.029 25.529

e(mm) 32.75 32.75 32.75 34.75 34.75 34.75 34.75 34.75 34.75

f(mm) 77.929 78.429 78.929 79.429 79.929 80.429 80.929 81.429 81.929

27.50 27.00 26.50 28.00 27.50 27.00 26.50 26.00 25.50

h(mm)

h

8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

9,5

PR-2500-UD (V.50)

30,6

45

3

Date: 12-09-2002

Guide rail thickness

178

258

INSTRUCTIONS: PR-2500-UD (V.50) Check: 01

f e H C E T A N Y D Y G O L O N H C E T & S C I M A N Y D

d

3.5

72,75

120

- 17 -

MicroBASIC Control Board

I TECHNICAL DOSSIER VERSION 2.0 May 1999

PRE-ASSEMBLED ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION IEPMBAS SOFTWARE VERSIONS MB134 OR HIGHER

DECLARACIÓ N DE CONFORMIDAD DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY DECLARATION DE CONFORMITE ÜBEREINSTIMMUNGSERKLAERUNG Directiva del Consejo, relativa a la compatibilidad electromagnética, con la que se declara conformidad : Council Directive, concerning the electromagnetic compatibility, to which conformity is declared : Directive du Conseil, concernant la compatibilité électro-magnétique, par laquelle est déclarée la conformité : Richtlinie, in Bezug auf die elektromagnetische Kompatibilität, deren Übereinstimmung bestätigt wird :

89 / 336 / CEE Aplicación de las Normas :

Application of the Standards :

Application des Normes :

DRAFT pr EN 12015 (95) (94)

DRAFT pr EN 12016 (95)

EN 55011 (91)

EN 801-2 (91)

IEC 801-3 (84 + Rev.93)

IEC 801-4 (88)

Anwendung der Normen :

EN 50081-1 (94)

EN 50082-1

Fabricante / Manufacturer’s name / Fabricant / Hersteller Mecanismos y Accesorios, S.A. Dirección / Manufacturer’s address / Adresse Poligono NAVISA c / E - 41006 - SEVILLA - ESPAÑA Tipo de equipo / Type of equipment / Type d´équipement / Gerätetyp Maniobra de control para ascensores eléctricos y oleodinámicos Control driving for electric and oil-dynamic lifts Manoeuvre de contrôle pour ascenseurs électriques et hydrauliques Steuerungselektronik für Seil- und Ölhydraulikaufzüge Modelo / Model no. / Modèle / Modell MicroBASIC El abajo firmante, declara que el equipo antes especificado cumple con la Directiva y las Normas mencionadas I, the undersigned, hereby declare that equipment specified above conforms to the above Directive and Standard Je, soussigné, déclare que l´équipement décrit ci-dessus remplit les conditions contenues dans la Directive et les Normes mentionnées Der Unterzeichnende erklärt, dass das obenerwähnte Gerät der aufgeführten Richtlinie und den angegebenen Normen entspricht und diese erfüllt

Nombre / Full name / Prénom, Nom / Unterzeichnet GONZALO MADARIAGA PARIAS Cargo / Position / Responsabilité / Stellung PRESIDENTE MACPUARSA, S.A.

Lugar / Place / Lieu / Ort :

SEVILLA

Fecha / Date / Datum :

26/06/96

Firma / Signature / Unterschrift :

CONTENTS Chapter 1 • PRESENTATION GENERAL FEATURES ................................................................................................................................................................. 1 STANDARD DATA ........................................................................................................................................................................ 1 SPECIAL DATA ............................................................................................................................................................................ 2

Chapter 2 • MAJOR COMPONENTS AND THEIR FUNCTION MAJOR COMPONENTS AND CONFIGURATION ELEMENTS .................................................................................................. 3 FUNCTION OF RELAYS AND VARISTORS (VOLTAGE LIMITERS) RELAYS ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 4 VARISTORS (VOLTAGE LIMITERS) ............................................................................................................................................ 5

Chapter 3 • CONFIGURATION AND ADJUSTMENT OF PARAMETERS ELEMENTS FOR CONFIGURATION DIL Switches ............................................................................................................................................................................... 6 METHOD FOR PARAMETER ADJUSTMENT ............................................................................................................................. 6 RUN MODE ................................................................................................................................................................................ 6 PROGRAM MODE ....................................................................................................................................................................... 7 Modification of parameters (PROGRAM Mode) .................................................................................................................... 8 DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS Parameter

[ 0 ] • [ 1 ] • [ 2 ] • [ 3 ] • [ 4 ] ..................................................................................................................... 9

Parameter

[ 5 ] • [ 6 ] ......................................................................................................................................................... 10

Parameter

[ 7 ] • [ 8 ] • [ 9 ] • [ 10 ] • [ 11 ] ................................................................................................................ 11

Parameter

[ 12 ] ................................................................................................................................................................... 12

Parameter

[ 13 ] • [ 14 ] • [ 15 ] ...................................................................................................................................... 13

Parameter

[ 16 ] • [ 17 ] • [ 18 ] • [ 19 ] ........................................................................................................................ 14

Parameter

[ 20 ] • [ 21 ] • [ 22 ] • [ 23 ] • [ 24 ] ......................................................................................................... 15

Parameter

[ 28 ] ................................................................................................................................................................... 16

Chapter 4 • INFORMATION OFFERED BY CONTROL INDICATOR LIGHTS .................................................................................................................................................................. 17 POINTS ON THE DISPLAY ........................................................................................................................................................ 17 VOLTAGE VALUES ..................................................................................................................................................................... 17 DISPLAY WITH 3 DIGITS ......................................................................................................................................................... 18 INDICATION OF SPECIAL INFORMATION .............................................................................................................................. 18 STANDARD INFORMATION ..................................................................................................................................................... 19 DESCRIPTION OF BLOCKS OF INFORMATION ..................................................................................................................... 19 VIEWING OF CONDITIONS OF ELEVATOR COMPONENTS .................................................................................................. 21 TECHNIQUE OF REPRESENTATION OF ERRORS .................................................................................................................. 22

Chapter 5 • FUNCIONAMIENTO DE LA MANIOBRA BASIC FUNCTIONAL STEPS Luminous sequence ................................................................................................................................................................ 23 Return control (connection on final floor) ............................................................................................................................ 23 Criterion direction of correction ............................................................................................................................................. 23 Normal control ......................................................................................................................................................................... 24 Inspection control .................................................................................................................................................................... 25 Emergency control (only for hydraulic elevators) ................................................................................................................ 26

May 1999 • Version 2.0 • Control Board • MicroBASIC

i

CONTENTS DESCRIPTION OF SPECIAL FUNCTIONS Repeated door close or interlock error ................................................................................................................................. 27 Interruption of photoelectric barrier in car or opening of automatic hoistway door ..................................................... 27 Repeated door close or interlock error ................................................................................................................................. 27 Fireman control ........................................................................................................................................................................ 27 Fireman’s key switch in hoistway .......................................................................................................................................... 27 Fireman’s key switch in car .................................................................................................................................................... 28 Mixed selective control ........................................................................................................................................................... 28 Asymmetric elevators ............................................................................................................................................................. 28 Operation emergency power aggregate .............................................................................................................................. 29 Deletion of car calls ................................................................................................................................................................. 29 Re-levelling ................................................................................................................................................................................ 29 Levelling with open doors ....................................................................................................................................................... 31 Stopping on lowest floor (hydraulic elevators) .................................................................................................................... 31 Grave errors .............................................................................................................................................................................. 31 Stopping for opening and subsequent closing on final floor (hydraulic elevators, error F03) ..................................... 31

i

MicroBASIC • Control Board • Version 2.0 • May 1999

PRESENTATION

Chapter 1 GENERAL FEATURES

Monitor control for traction elevators and hydraulic elevators with a high cost/performance relation. Used in a very high number of installations (> 90%). Real time presentation of the condition of all components of the installation and memorising of functional errors.

STANDARD DATA • Traction elevator and hydraulic elevator with only one ‘PCB MicroBASIC’control board. • Configuration SIMPLEX : Universal ........................................................................................ 16 floors. Collective selective control during descent .............................. 10 floors. Collective selective control during ascent and descent .......... 6 floors. • Configuration DUPLEX : Universal ........................................................................................ 16 floors. Collective selective control during descent .............................. 10 floors. Collective selective control during ascent and descent .......... 10 floors. • With extension board AMB1: up to 16 floors, collective control, up and down direction, Simplex. • With extension board AMB2: up to 16 floors, collective control, up and down direction, Quadruplex, remote control possible. • Independent controllers will be supplied for Duplex and Quadruplex. • Speed regulation by adding 3VFMAC1 (freqency converter).Optimised quality/cost solution for speeregulation installations up to 1,6 m/sec. The product may be used for transformation of older installations with 1 speed into installations with high operating quality. • Voltage of safety circuit ............................................................... 110V ac. • Control voltage .............................................................................. 24V dc. • Call registration at 24V dc (standard) with protection against overload and short circuits. Outlets for position indicator (display). Standard : binary 24V dc. Optional: decimal for each voltage, dc or ac. • Outlet for door drive motor. Standard: single-phase 220V ac or 220V ac + interlock magnet signal. Optional: ac current motor with 110V, 220V or 380V alternate current; dc current motor with 12V, 24V and 48V direct current. • Signal voltage hoistway: direction indicator ascent and descent, occupied, free, door open. Signal voltage in car:direction indicator ascent and descent 24V dc. Standard: 24V dc. For other voltage values please procure information first. • Re-levelling and levelling with open doors (traction elevators and hydraulic elevators), with incorporated levelling device 538. • Real time detection of errors in the installation. Analyses more than 20 types of errors. Memorisation of the last 32 errors. • Display on PCB MicroBASIC, indicating the following points in real time: • Position of car. • Installation component which prevents movement of the elevator. • Type of call and floor served. • Registered hall calls ascent and descent. • Condition of elevator components. • Errors memorised.


1

PRESENTATION • For hydraulic elevator - equipped with trigger for emergency valve, for completion of run on the next floor in down direction or any other floor (e.g.: on first floor). • At minor increment of cost a complete system for the rescue of passengers may be added : • Traction elevator: Rescatamac 30. • Hydraulic elevator: Door opening function, 041, 042, 043. • Very ample range of functions. Up to 30 configuration parameters. • Fireman control with double key (car and hoistway). • Connection of load weighing device (overload and full load), with car signal voltage 24V dc. • Control emergency power aggregate. • Asymmetric elevators (on upper or lower floors). • Autocontrol of operating panels: If a call button remains blocked (active) for more than 60 secs., while the elevator is at floor-level, calls of this floor will be deleted, and the elevator continues to function normally. This floor will once again be served as soon as button is no longer blocked. • Outlet for break and interlock magnet at any voltage. • Optional signals with extension board MS - MPX: • Indicator light arrival (levelling). • Indicator light next run (direction indicator), both at any voltage, dc or ac. SPECIAL DATA Special functions may be set up in single installations, if desired. Access control functions.

2


MAJOR COMPONENTS AND THEIR FUNCTION

Chapter 2

MAJOR COMPONENTS AND CONFIGURATION ELEMENTS CONFIGURATION ELEMENTS Q1

R62

DL7 FF1

19

18

17

F5 / FF1

D9

R9

R61

UDN 2543

RMINV RL4

RME2 RL3

RME1 RL2

j i

U19

h g f

R17

C91

C89

FF2

d

DL10

R51

PR3

c

+24V

b

PR4 R53

C71

PR5

R49

PR6

a

R18

C49 C52

C51

DL10 +

R50

C68

C50

e

FF2

103

PR2

FT

C70

D82

D79

DL8

D80 D90

RMT

RM DL1 DL5 RMR R1

J4 R5

R10

RB

J2

RM RL10

RMR RL6

R3

RS DL4

D7

D68

P1 16

RVR DL6

R4

15

R6 D2

D3

14 13

RET RL21

74HC165

U2 C28

U1 C27

D1

DL3

RET

C29

C32

R39

C31

C30

D4

FM

F1 / FM

F4 / FT

D5

F6 / FL

D84

D95

k

DZ35

RME

V8

R48

FL

P2 + R75 C85

D87

RME

DL9

C73

RDIP

D62

EMERG

C69

R47

D83

20

C86

R14

U26

D10

R15

D56

74HC165

C54

21

D69

R64

U27

D48

R68

D47

R72

R70

D57

74HC165

C53

C56

D86

D58

D49 D54

C55

D59

D46

R45

D81

D50

R54

D60

D51

22

R52

C72

D85

D61

D52

UDN2987

D63

D53 UDN2987

UDN2987

D55

D43

23

D8 D96

R12

U7

D42

D41

LM2825

C75

R73

D40

D45

C92

C66

C76

24

D94

R46

C58

25

DZ1

X16

R63

R43

C65

C74

R11

C48

U6

U13

R82 R83 DZ34

C64 R69

DZ33

26

NO LEVEL DL11 D15

R7

R67

U15

ULN2003

C47

P5

J3

D92 R74

D78

D77

DZ32

D44

0VCC

UDN2981

27

P3

U30

R80

DZ26

DZ31

C63

R81

R79 D76

C62

RBCAB

+24

DZ30

U10

D88

D75

74HC14

C61 U5

RBCAB

C90 U28

TLP-521

C67

DZ29

28

R8

+5V

C57

74HC164

R57 DZ28

29

R65

U22

C44

VREG

ST9040

R55

RDIP

C60 R71

R85

TLP-521

U24

C81

U17

30

C79

74HC165

DM9368

C80

S/N

74HC165

C59

R59 R56

C45 U18

31

R78

U23 U4

DZ27

32

R24

R23

74HC165

D64

R19

U29

C88

R87 C78

X1 C77

U16

P4

C87 R76

R36 SW

C46

PL1 R60 U9

SW

T1 T2

R21

75176B

D1 IMP

R77

D2 SP

C34 C36

D3 SC

RMT2 RL7

RMT3 RL13

RMT1 RL12

RB RL8

RS RL9

RVR RL11

12 11 10

U3 C22

C21

C20

C19

C23

C25

C24

C26

C14

C7

C11

C8

C9

C12

C13

C10

C6

C15

C16

C5

C4

C17

C3

C18

RBEXT

9

DZ21

DZ20

DZ19

DZ18

DZ22

DZ24

DZ23

DZ25

DZ10

DZ6

DZ11

DZ7

DZ12

DZ8

DZ13

DZ9

DZ14

DZ5

DZ15

DZ4

DZ16

DZ3

DZ2

DZ17

8 RLS

RLB

RLDO

RMP

RZS

D12

ROPA

RZS

ROPC

ROPA

5

RL5

RL17

RL16

4

R32

ROPC

RL22

RL19

RL20

RMP

C2

RL14

6

D92

RL18

RLDO

D14

R28

RDIP

RLB

D11

RLS

R29

R30

R31

RDIP

R27

RDIP

7

C119

D66 RL1

D32 D33

D34

D35

D36

D38

D37

D39

D24

D23

D26

D21

D25

D22

D27

D20

D28

D19

D29

D18

D30

D17

D31

D16

RPA

R25

3

R26

2 D13

1

110

J1

CH1 CC1

C37 F3

CH2 109 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 +24

A

B

C

D

CC2

FOP 213 217 218 215 294 214 105 0VCC 104 226 220 228 10 2 0VCC 00 203 106 207 105 217 +12F 208 102 9 220

T T

V4

103 5 207 0VP 223 222 221 103 218

V3 V5

C38

PCB MICROBASIC SERIGRAPHY OF COMPONENTS JUMPERS J1 DO NOT FIX JUMPER IF CFE (EMERGENCY FINAL CONTACT) IS USED J2 FIX JUMPER, WITH THE EXCEPTION OF TRACTION ELEVATOR 1 SPEED J3 ONLY FIX JUMPER IN CASE OF UNIVERSAL CONTROL J4 FIX JUMPER, WITH THE EXCEPTION OF HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS WITH KLEEMAN AGGREGATE

FUSES

SIGNALISATION OF POINTS ON THE DISPLAYS D3

D2

D1

SC

SP

IMP PULSE: • ON. PULSE (LUMINOUS) • OFF. NO PULSE (NOT LUMINOUS)

FOP

FUSE PROCESSOR ( 3A )

FM

FUSE CONTROLLER ( 1A )

FT

FUSE CURRENT SOURCE 5 V DC 1A ), MAX. ( 1A )

FL

FUSE SIGNALS ( 1A ), MAX. ( 3A )

FF1

FUSE CURRENT SOURCE 24 V DC 3A ), MAX. ( 3A )

FF2

FUSE 20 VS ( 3A ), MAX. ( 3A )

DOOR CIRCUIT: • ON. CLOSED (LUMINOUS) • OFF. OPEN (NOT LUMINOUS) INTERLOCK CIRCUIT: • ON. CLOSED (LUMINOUS) • OFF. OPEN (NOT LUMINOUS)

CC1 CC2 CC3 CH1 CH2 TERMINALS CONNECTION IN CAR AND HOISTWAY

P1 P2 P3 TERMINALS CONNECTION WIRING IN CONTROLLER

P4 TRANSMISSION CABLE CIRCUIT (RS - 485) FOR DUPLEX CONNECTIONS WITH EXTENSION MB1 AND AMB2

PINS PIN 103

PIN CONNECTION HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS WITH SPECIAL AGGREGATE

PIN RME

PIN CONNECTION TIMER FOR RME (HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS WITH INTERLOCK MAGNET)

PIN 207

PIN CONNECTION WITH LEVELLING DEVICE 538. INDICATOR LIGHT BETWEEN FLOORS


3

MAJOR COMPONENTS AND THEIR FUNCTION FUNCTION OF RELAYS AND VARISTORS (VOLTAGE LIMITERS) Relays

4

RB :

Descent. Active when car initiates or realises a descent, 24V dc. With red indicator light.

RCAB :

Car call. Deletes car calls during inspection (terminal 109), 24V dc.

RBEXT :

Hall call. Deletes hall calls (terminal 110), 24V dc, if jumper J3 is fixed (configuration Universal) and relay is connected during service of elevator.

RET :

Start (hydraulic elevators). Ventilation (traction elevators), 24 V dc.

RPA :

Control relay RZS. Connected directly at microprocessor, permits connection of RZS, each time that the safety contact CPS (terminals 00, 103) is closed, 24V dc.

RLB :

Indicator light descent, 24V dc.

RLDO :

Indicator light free (not active) and occupied (active), 24V dc.

RLS :

Indicator light ascent, 24V dc.

RM :

Run. Active when car is moving, 24V dc. With red, flashing indicator light.

RMP :

Door circuit. Relay with 110V ac which is activated when ‘semiautomatic’hoistway doors are closed, if contacts of safety circuits have been closed previously. With indicator light: Exactly on central digit of PCB MicroBASIC display.

RMR :

Inspection. Active during inspection control, 24V dc. With red indicator light.

RMT :

Voltage applied to control. There are 3 relays. Active during normal operation. Not active during emergency control ‘hydraulic elevators’24V dc. With green indicator light.

ROPA :

Relay opening of automatic door, gives command to open doors.

ROPC :

Relay closing of automatic door, gives command to close doors.

RS :

Ascent. Active when car initiates or realises an ascent, 24 V dc. With red indicator light.

RVR :

High speed. Active during high-speed run of car. No activation if elevator is equipped with speed regulation


MAJOR COMPONENTS AND THEIR FUNCTION RZS :

Safety zone. Active when contact CPS ‘terminals 00, 103’is closed, and microprocessor commands bridging of door circuits, interlocks and car doors. This occurs when car is in unlocking zone (and the safety contact or circuit connected to terminals 00 and 103 is closed). If, in this case, the car is running in slow speed, control starts advanced door opening (levelling with open doors). This also happens during re-levelling with open doors. 110V ac.

Varistors (voltage limiters) V3, V4 and V5: Varistor 275V ac. A protection filter has been developed for the MicroBASIC printed circuit board. If supply with 220V ac for energising of board is higher than varistor voltage, this protection filter brings about the activation of the thermomagnetic switch. If the voltage value of 220V ac increases with respect to grounding, the filter causes activation of differential switch. V8 : Varistor 36V dc. Protects 24V entry for supply of logic part of board. Blows (FT) if voltage exceeds nominal voltage of varistor, and thereby prevents circuits from being damaged. V9 : Varistor 36V dc. Protects 24V entry for supply of other circuits which use MicroBASIC printed circuit board, receiving 24 V dc from it. Blows (FT) if voltage exceeds nominal voltage of varistor, and thereby prevents circuits from being damaged.


5

Chapter 3

CONFIGURATION AND ADJUSTMENT OF PARAMETERS ELEMENTS FOR CONFIGURATION Microswitch bank SW1 and PL1 button are used for adjusting the parameters in the controller. They are situated in the upper left-hand area of the PCB MicroBASIC printed circuit board. By means of them the chosen parameter value may be indicated on the display with 3 digits. DIL Switches RUN Mode. Bank of [ SW.1 ]

1

PROGRAM Mode. Bank of [ SW.1 ]

1

2 3 4 5 6 7 8

2 3 4 5 6 7 8

ON OFF

ON OFF MICROSWITCH ( 1 ) IN (OFF) POSITION NORMAL FUNCTIONING MODE OF ELEVATOR

MICROSWITCH ( 1 ) IN (ON) POSITION FUNCTIONING MODE INPUT OF CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS

METHOD FOR PARAMETER ADJUSTMENT General method for adjustment of parameters: Disconnect controller (thermomagnetic switch [ IG ]) and check which type of parameter shall be altered. In RUN mode (Microswitch no. 1 [ OFF ]), only 3 parameters may be changed, whereas in PROGRAM mode (Microswitch no. 1 in [ ON ] position), more than 20 different parameters may be altered. RUN mode is used if only one of the timers (TG, TE oder MTR) is meant to be changed. For this purpose microswitch no. 1 is brought in (OFF) position. By means of the 7 remaining microswitches the exact time of each timer may now be defined. Once the microswitch positions are fixed, control is once again activated (thermomagnetic switch [ IG ]), and the elevator begins normal service, operating according to the new timer values. PROGRAM mode is used for changing any other parameter. For this purpose, microswitch no. 1 is brought in (ON) position and the controller is connected (thermomagnetic switch [ IG ]). Subsequently, PCB MicroBASIC starts showing information on the three-digit display. The following steps occur in the PROGRAM mode. Once the parameters are changed, control is once again disconnected, RUN mode is actuated and timer values are defined (see previous paragraph). Finally, control is re-activated, and elevator begins normal service. That is, after changing one parameter in PROGRAM mode, control must be disconnected, RUN mode must be selected, and timers must be adjusted. Finally, control is once more connected.

RUN Mode Normal functioning mode of elevator. Select by bringing microswitch no. 1 (microswitch bank SW1) in [OFF] position, pointing upwards). In this mode, 3 parameters may be adjusted by means of the other 7 microswitches: TG General timer (microswitch 2 - 3 - 4), timer which defines the following points: • maximum door closing time (detection interlock error). • time passing between end of run and initiation of the following (collective selective operation). In the universal functioning mode, this value corresponds with value of car timer. Chart : Parameter selection [TG] 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SW1 ON OFF

2 Seg.

ON OFF

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SW1 ON OFF

6

8 Seg.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SW1 5 Seg.

ON OFF

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SW1 ON OFF


10 Seg.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SW1 6 Seg.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ON OFF

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ON OFF

SW1 12 Seg.

SW1 7 Seg.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SW1 ON OFF

15 Seg.

CONFIGURATION AND ADJUSTMENT OF PARAMETERS ABOUT [MTR]

TE Hall call timer (microswitches 5 - 6).

MAXIMUM RUNNING TIME

By means of parameter 23, ‘PROGRAM mode’, these times may be tripled (special situations).

Once the general timer is finished, this timer records the time, from which the elevator serves a hall call without previously chosen direction. In universal functioning mode this timer coincides with the classical hall call timer. Chart : Parameter selection [TE] 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ON OFF

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

SW1 4 Seg.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

SW1

ON OFF

2 Seg.

ON OFF

MTR

SW1

SW1 ON OFF

6 Seg.

10 Seg.

Maximum running time (microswitches 7 - 8).

Defines maximum running time of elevator between two consecutive floors. If this value is exceeded, there is an error concerning maximum running time. This points to an abnormal functioning situation (for example rope slip on traction sheaves). Chart : Parameter selection [MTR] 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ON OFF

SW1 8 Seg.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ON OFF

SW1 16 Seg.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

SW1 12 Seg.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

SW1

ON OFF

ON OFF

20 Seg.

PROGRAM Mode In order to enter PROGRAM mode, microswitch no. 1 must be changed into ‘bank SW1 [ON] position, pointing upwards’. In PROGRAM mode, more than 20 parameters may be changed, by means of which the control functions of the installation may be adapted with accuracy. Control parameters are always adjusted at the factory. Their values are functionally adapted to the characteristics of the order. On one page of this document, the parameter values are listed, as adjusted at the factory. That is, under normal conditions it is unnecessary to modify parameters in the PROGRAM mode.


7

CONFIGURATION AND ADJUSTMENT OF PARAMETERS Modification of parameters (PROGRAM mode), using : • Switch bank SW1 Microswitch .............................. No. 1 ............................ always in [ON] position PROGRAM mode. Microswitch .............................. No. 2 - 3 - 4 - 5 - 6 ...... defines binary number of parameter. Microswitch .............................. No. 7 - 8 ...................... defines new value of selected parameter.

ON

SW.1

OFF

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 In ( ON ) position PROGRAM mode

Defines binary number of parameter :

ON OFF

Parameter ( 0 )

Defines new value of selected parameter :

ON OFF

2 3 4 5 6 ON OFF

7 8 Parameter ( 1 )

ON OFF

2 3 4 5 6 ON OFF

Value ( A )

Value ( B )

7 8 Parameter ( 2 )

ON OFF

2 3 4 5 6

Value ( C )

7 8 ON OFF

ON OFF

Parameter ( 31 )

Value ( D )

7 8

2 3 4 5 6

• PL1 Button Once the number of the parameter and its new value have been selected, they are memorised by pressing of button on PCB MicroBASIC . • 3 - digit display In PROGRAM mode, digits on left-hand side and in center indicate the number of the recently selected parameter, the digit on the right-hand side represents the memorised value of this parameter. That is, the new value only appears as digit on display, once it has been defined and once PL1 button is pressed, as by pressing the button the new value is memorised :

Selected parameter. Possible values : ( 00 ) ( 01 ) ... ( 31 )

8


Actual value of selected parameter : Possible values : (A)(B)(C)(D)

CONFIGURATION AND ADJUSTMENT OF PARAMETERS DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS PARAMETERS ADJUSTABLE IN PROGRAM MODE : PARAMETER [ 0 ] [ 1 ] : Number of floors of the installation. Functional adjustment of parameter No. 0 and parameter No. 1 to number of floors. Chart : Adjustment of parameters [ 0 ] [ 1 ] FLOORS

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11 12

13

14

15

16

PARAMETER [0]

B

C

D

A

B

C

D

A

B

C

D

A

B

C

D

PARAMETER [1]

A

A

A

B

B

B

B

C

C

C

C

D

D

D

D

PARAMETER [ 2 ] : Floor on which fireman’s key switch is located. Value A : Value B : Value C : Value D :

Key switch on lowest floor (first floor). Key switch on 2. floor. Key switch on 3. floor. Key switch on 4. floor.

PARAMETER [ 3 ] : Type of hoistway doors. Value A : Value B : Value C :

Semiautomatic hoistway door (irrespective of whether there are car doors, or whether there are none). Automatic hoistway door. Mixed, for all semiautomatic doors and for one (defined through the main floor) automatic door.

PARAMETER [ 4 ] : Function. Value A :

Only 1 or 2 hall calls are accepted (Simplex or Duplex, respectively). Function according to number of floors: Up to 10 floors: Connection of calls identical with selective control, descent. Possibility of memorising 1 car call. Signalisation of hall calls (levelling) is equivalent to registration of hall calls. From 11 to 16 floors: Special connection of calls. See diagrams. Only 1 car call is accepted. Hall call signalisation «levelling» may be procured by adding a MS-MPX printed circuit board controlled by terminals 117, 118, 119 and 120 of parcel CH1 (PCB MicroBASIC). Maximum number of calls : Simplex : 16 Duplex : 16

Value B :

Selective control, descent. Maximum number of floors : Simplex : 10 Duplex : 10

Value C :

Mixed selective control. This value is valid for Simplex and Duplex elevators, versions inferior to MB134, and for Duplex from this version onwards (inclusively). In functioning mode ‘mixed selective control’, several lower floors may be defined as ‘selective control, ascent’, defining the others as ‘selective control, descent’. Parameter no. 6 defines how many lower floors belong to ‘selective control, ascent’. It may be that the highest floor of those defined as ‘selective control, ascent’receives a call in the ascent and descent mode, the lower ones with call ‘ascent’, and the higher ones with call ‘descent’(see value B of parameter No. 5). Maximum number of floors: (1 call button on floor ‘descent’) 10; (2 call buttons on floor ‘descent’) 9.

Wert D :

Selective control, ascent and descent. Maximum number of floors : Simplex : 6 Duplex : 10


9

CONFIGURATION AND ADJUSTMENT OF PARAMETERS PARAMETER [ 5 ] : Type of installation. Value A :

Simplex. Always fix this value in elevators with Simplex universal control, ‘selective control, descent’, ‘selective control, ascent and descent’, or ‘mixed selective control’with only 1 call button on floor «descent» (this floor must be the highest with hall call, ascent). See value C of parameter 4.

Value B :

Simplex, mixed selective control, 2 calls, descent. This value may only be selected if the value of parameter 4 is (C): Elevator ‘Simplex, mixed selective control’. By means of this parameter several lower floors may be defined as ‘selective control, ascent’, defining the others as ‘selective control, descent’. Value B is selected if the highest floor of ‘selective control, ascent’(as a rule, floor «descent») is to be provided with a double button: ascent and descent. Thus, calls below this level will be ‘ascent’calls, and calls above this level will be ‘selective control, descent’. In this situation, the maximum number of floors is 9.

Value C or Value D : Elevator 1 or elevator 2 in Duplex. If control is Duplex, one PCB MicroBASIC must be configured with value C, and the other with value D. The assignation is indifferent, with the exception of ‘Duplex, ascent and descent’(value D for parameter 4), as hall calls ‘descent’will be connected in (elevator 1), and hall calls ‘ascent’ in (elevator 2). PARAMETER [ 6 ] : Number of floors ‘ascent’in ‘mixed selective control’. Value A : Value B : Value C : Value D :

2 floors. 3 floors. 4 floors. 5 floors. Defines the number of lower floors with ascent button in the configuration ‘mixed selective control’(see value C of parameter 4). Floors above the defined floors are provided with descent buttons. If the value of parameter 5 is B ‘mixed selective control, 2 descent buttons on floor’, the highest floor of those defined in parameter 6, there must be 2 call buttons, ascent and descent. Floors above this floor are defined as ‘descent’.

See examples : CONNECTION HALL CALLS (CH1)

PARAMETER

4

6

C

A

B

MIXED

SIMPLEX

3 F lo o r s

C

MIXED

C MIXED

10

5

B SIMPLEX 2 ON «DESCENT»

Floor

Floor

Floor

Floor

Floor

Floor

Floor

Floor

Floor

Floor

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Floor

Floor

Floor

Floor

Floor

Floor

Floor

Floor

Floor

Floor

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Floor

Floor

Floor

Floor

Floor

Floor

Floor

Floor

Floor

Floor

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

C 4 FLOORS

B SIMPLEX 2 ON «DESCENT»

111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120

A 2 FLOORS


CONFIGURATION AND ADJUSTMENT OF PARAMETERS PARAMETER [ 7 ] [ 8 ] : Number of floors in lower and upper zone, respectively (asymmetric elevator) Value A : Value B : Value C : Value D :

0 1 2 3

This function is only valid for Duplex installations. It facilitates definition of how many floors one of the two elevators does not serve in the lower zone (parameter 7) or in the upper zone (parameter 8), with respect to the other elevator. Value A is selected for the elevator which arrives at all floors. The elevator which does not serve any floor receives value B, C, or D.

IMPORTANT NOTE Both PCB MicroBASIC must have the same value for parameters 0 and 1 (number of floors of the installation), corresponding to the number of floors of the elevator which serves all of these. In an asymmetric elevator, the terminals for connection of car calls corresponding with the floors not served must be free. That is, if an elevator is asymmetric on 2 floors in the lower zone, terminals 111 and 112 of plug CC1 remain free. PARAMETER [ 9 ] : Type of elevator Value A :

Traction elevator 1 or 2 speeds. Note: Jumper J2 must always be fixed in value A, B and C, as well as in D, except in traction elevators with 1 speed.

Value B :

Hydraulic elevator.

Value C :

Traction elevator speed regulation with 3VFMAC1, change 1C .

Value D : Traction elevator speed regulation with 3VFMAC1, change 2C . PARAMETER [ 10 ] : Auxiliary timer For traction elevator. Timer for ventilation: Value A : Value B : Value C : Value D :

5 sec. 10 sec. 18 sec. 30 sec.

For hydraulic elevator. Timer delta connection: Value A : Value B : Value C : Value D :

0,2 sec. Select this value in case of direct start. 1 sec. 2 sec. 3 sec.

PARAMETER [ 11 ] : Functions auxiliary entries Facilitates definition of specific functions of auxiliary entries, terminals ( j ) and ( k ) of terminals P2, and PIN no. 20 of terminals P3. Value A :

PIN ( j P2 ). STOP Function. If voltage on this PIN (+24) disappears, the controller immediately stops the elevator and remains in this condition, until once again energised, and until a car call is pressed, producing a return to normal service. During the described period no hall calls are served. PIN ( k P2 ): Unlocking zone for realisation of re-levelling. Once control decides to start re-levelling (hydraulic elevator), it analyses the voltage value on this PIN. If there is no voltage, it ‘understands’that the elevator is below floor level and initiates re-levelling in upward direction.


11

CONFIGURATION AND ADJUSTMENT OF PARAMETERS If there is a voltage of 24V dc, control knows that the elevator is above floor level and starts re-levelling in down direction. See parameter no. 24. PIN No. 20 ( P3 ) : Door close button. As soon as voltage 24V dc is applied to this PIN, the door opening timer is switched off, and closing of door is initiated immediately (only if there are car calls). Make sure that voltage appears on this pin ‘door close button connected’, when door is fully opened. Instead of the procedure described above, doors with three-phase door drive motor must be provided with a contact (normally closed) of the door opening relay. Value B :

PIN ( j P2 ) STOP Function. See value A, PIN ( j P2 ). PIN ( k P2 ) : Unlocking zone for re-levelling. See value A, PIN ( k P2 ). PIN No. 20 ( P3 ) : Operation emergency power aggregate. As soon as voltage 24V dc is applied to this pin, control knows that it is being supplied by an emergency power aggregate (not by mains). Depending on the value of parameter no. 12, control will now initiate one or the other action.

Value C :

PIN ( j P2 ). STOP Function. See value A, PIN ( j P2 ). PIN ( k P2 ). Unlocking zone for re-levelling. See value A, PIN ( k P2 ). PIN No. 20 ( P3 ). Command to initiate re-levelling. PCB MicroBASIC initiates re-levelling, once the following factors occur simultaneously: A) Car is between floors. B) PIN no. 20 is energised with 24V dc. If parameter 11 is given any other value, re-levelling is already initiated once a) ‘car is out of service’.

Value D : PIN ( f P2 ). Outlet for gong relay. Actuates gong at arrival on floor. PARAMETER [ 12 ] : Type of aggregate ( hydraulic elevator) Value A :

Standard.

Value B :

Kleeman. Delays power failure of pump behind floor on which car is stationed (ascents) for 1 second. In this case, control is provided with a special circuit for internal connection.

12


CONFIGURATION AND ADJUSTMENT OF PARAMETERS PARAMETER [ 13 ] : Functions auxiliary outlets Facilitates definition of the specific functions of auxiliary outlets, PINs (h) and (i) of terminal block (P2). Value A :

Levelling, interlock magnet. PIN (h/ P2) activates the relay for the neutral feeder of the signal voltage of ‘levelling’. It is activated while elevator is moving in slow speed, and remains activated after end of run, until timer (TG) is finished.

. PIN (i /P2) activates a relay which in turn actuates the interlock magnet. Value B :

Levelling and standstill, interlock magnet. PIN (h /P2) activates the relay for the neutral feeder of the signal voltage of ‘levelling’and ‘standstill’. It is activated while elevator moves in slow speed, and remains activated after end of run, until timer (TG) deactivates after end of operation ‘levelling’. It is also activated whilst elevator is situated at floor-level, without starting a run (standstill). PIN (i /P2) activates a relay which in turn actuates the interlock magnet.

Value C :

Travel-direction indicator, (arrows), interlock magnet. PINs (h) and (i / P2) activate two relays for the neutral feeder of the travel-direction indicator for descent and ascent. Parameter No. 20 facilitates definition of different functional logics for the travel-direction indicator. PIN (g/ P2), PIN for signalisation (complete), except if this value is activated temporarily and deleted afterwards, during use of this PIN for connection of a relay which in turn actuates the interlock magnet.

Value D : PIN (h /P2) for special hoistway signals, basically for elevators with universal function. Signal remains permanently luminous if semiautomatic door is open (contact of ‘doors open circuit’). Intermittent signal, with intervals of 1 sec., during movement of elevator. In other situations, signals are not active. PIN ( i / P2 ) activates relay which actuates interlock magnet.. PARAMETER [ 14 ] [ 15 ] : Main floor Functional adjustment of parameters 14 and 15 to floor defined as main floor : Chart : Adjustment of parameters [ 0 ] [ 1 ] FLOORS

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10 11 12 13 14 15 16

PARAMETER [0]

A

B

C

D

A

B

C

D

A

B

C

D

A

B

C

D

PARAMETER [1]

A

A

A

A

B

B

B

B

C

C

C

C

D

D

D

D


13

CONFIGURATION AND ADJUSTMENT OF PARAMETERS PARAMETER [ 16 ] : Time of return to main floor Control permits return of elevator to floor defined as main floor (floor defined in parameter 14 and parameter 15), after a certain amount of time has passed. It is possible to initiate this function only when elevator is situated on certain floors (see parameter 17). Value A :

Return function to main floor not initiated.

Value B :

Return function initiated immediately after completing service of memorised calls.

Value C :

Return after 1 minute without operating.

Value D : Return after 9 minutes without operating. PARAMETER [ 17 ] : Floors on which return to main floor is initiated The function of return to main floor may be limited to a fixed number of floors on which elevator is situated. Value A :

Function of return to main floor is initiated, irrespective of the floor on which elevator is situated.

Value B :

Function of return to main floor is initiated only if elevator is on the next floor in down direction.

Value C :

Only in case of the two next floors in down direction.

Value D : Only in case of the three next floors in down direction. Note: In case of hydraulic elevators, the following parameter values become obligatory for compliance with standard EN - 81.2 : • Parameter 14 • Value A. • Parameter 15 • Value A. • Parameter 16 • Value D. • Parameter 17 • Value A. For return to lowest floor after passing of 9 minutes. PARAMETER [ 18 ] : Deceleration for re-levelling Time during which elevator must be situated between floors, for initiation of re-levelling. Value A : Value B : Value C : Value D :

0.5 sec. 1 sec. 2 sec. 5 sec.

PARAMETER [ 19 ] : Deletion of car calls Control is provided with different functions for deletion of car calls. Multiple car calls may occur, due to improper handling of operating panel (example: 1 single passenger presses all car buttons). Value A :

Without deletion. If this value is selected, control does not take any action in case of multiple car calls.

Value B :

No deletion during reversal of door circuit or photoelectric cell contact. If, by means of this system, control discovers that in 2 consecutive runs of an elevator, there has been no opening of door circuit or actuation of photoelectric barrier (in series with door open button), all car calls are deleted, as nobody has entered or left car during both runs.

14


CONFIGURATION AND ADJUSTMENT OF PARAMETERS Value C :

Maximum number of car calls: 3. Limits number of car calls which may be registered by control.

Value D : Maximum number of car calls: 6. Limits number of car calls which may be registered by control. PARAMETER [ 20 ] : Options for travel-direction indicator Value A :

The travel-direction indicator is activated while elevator is moving in one direction and calls not yet served are memorised, during slow speed and until start for serving of next call (moment at which it is deactivated). If there are no calls not yet served, both arrows remain luminous, until timer (TG) is finished.

Value B :

Equivalent to value A, with the exception that both arrows remain luminous indefinitely if there is no memorisation of calls not yet served.

Value C :

Equivalent to value B, with the exception that both arrows are deactivated, if there is no memorisation of calls not yet served.

PARAMETER [ 21 ] : Return floor Initiates return control for correction, at activation of elevator or in case of miscorrection between floors. Possible options: Value A : Correction on the lowest floor. Value B : Correction on the highest floor. PARAMETER [ 22 ] : Levelling with open doors Initiation of preopening function of doors during levelling: Value A : Value B :

Not active Active

PARAMETER [ 23 ] :

Tripling time timer MTR (maximum running time and triple), TG (general timer)

Option only applicable to installations with very long running times between two consecutive floors (more than 20 seconds). Value A :

No. Normal option (values indicated in section RUN mode).

Value B :

Yes. The new values for MTR are 24, 36, 48, and 60 seconds.

Value C :

Triples times selected in TG, section RUN mode.

Value D : Triples MTR and TG. PARAMETER [ 24 ] : Decision criterion for re-levelling direction In this parameter, the decision criterion for direction of movement during re-levelling is defined. Value A : Value B :

Re-levelling function disconnected. For terminal.


15

CONFIGURATION AND ADJUSTMENT OF PARAMETERS Depending on the presence or absence of voltage on PIN K (terminals P2), re-levelling will be realised by control in one direction or the other : • No voltage on PIN K .................. re-levelling in up direction. • 24V dc on PIN K ........................ re-levelling in down direction. PARAMETER [ 28 ] : Viewing of parameters By pressing PL1 all parameters introduced sequentially may be viewed in this parameter.

16


Chapter 4

INFORMATION OFFERED BY CONTROL There are three ways in which all information offered by control, concerning installation, condition of components, etc., is supplied by PCB MicroBASIC : • Indicator lights (LEDs). • Display with 3 digits, controlled by button. • Outlet for position indicator: Each time the position indicator in car (or hoistway) alternatively displays the two lower (lowest) floors, there is information about a grave error of the installation, which leads to a complete stop of the elevator.

INDICATOR LIGHTS PCB MicroBASIC D3

D2

D1

SC

SP

IMP

NO LEVEL EMERG DL11

DL7

+5V DL9

DL10 +24V

DL8

RM

DL1

RB

RS

RVR

RMT

DL5

RMR

DL3

DL4

DL6

POINTS ON THE DISPLAY IMP :

Entry of pulses from pulse generator. At appearance of voltage 24V dc on terminal 203, indicator light is switched on. In case of correct functioning, this happens 2 times, while car is moving from one floor to the next (including lowest and highest floor).

SP :

Active when door circuit (and the previous safety contacts) are closed. That is, terminal 104 is energised with a voltage of 110 Vac.

SC :

Active when all circuits are closed. That is, terminal 106 is energised with a voltage of 110Vac.

VOLTAGE VALUES 5V :

Active if there is a voltage of 5V dc for supply of microprocessor zone. In case of no voltage, check fuse (FT).

24V :

Active if there is a voltage of 24V dc for supply of the relay actuation zone, as well as of all components of the installation which work with this voltage. In case of no voltage, check fuses (FF1) and (FF2).


17

INFORMATION OFFERED BY CONTROL NO LEVEL :

Green indicator light. Active while elevator is not on floor-level, levelling device closed: Terminal 207 connected to 0V dc.

EMER :

Red, intermittent indicator light. Only for hydraulic elevators, during operation of emergency control and only if, at initiation of emergency operation, the following points are accurate: • Battery voltage is adequate (> 10 V dc) at disconnection of mains supply. • All safety contacts and circuits closed • Elevator is not on floor-level (jumper J1 fixed), or contact CFE, connected between terminals 5 and 0V dc, is closed (jumper J1 not fixed).

RMT :

Green indicator light. Active during normal operation of controller. If fuses (FF1) and (FF2) blow, indicator light is switched off. Its condition informs about the condition of relays (RMT1, RMT2 and RMT3).

RM :

Red, intermittent indicator light. Active during movement of elevator. Informs about the condition of run relay (RM).

RMR :

Inspection control connected. Active in case of voltage 24V dc on terminal 208 Informs about the condition of relay (RMR).

(inspection switch activated).

RB :

Active at initiation or realisation of a descent. Informs about the condition of relay (RB).

RS :

Active at initiation or realisation of an ascent. Informs about the condition of relay (RS).

RVR :

Active during initiation or realisation of a high-speed run. Informs about the condition of relay (RVR).

DISPLAY WITH 3 DIGITS • On the 3-digit display, full information about a multiplicity of data concerning the elevator is indicated. • Denomination of digits :

A

B

C Display on PCB MicroBASIC

INDICATION OF SPECIAL INFORMATION Specific information is provided in special situations : • Activation of control: At activation of control the number of the software version is displayed for 3 seconds. Always indicate the number of the respective software version when contacting the MP group about any technical problem concerning control. • Return process ‘correction’: While elevator is being returned, ‘effects correction at final floor’, information concerning position of elevator appears on display (flashing). • Error in installation: Irrespective of the information actually on display, any error occuring in the installation is displayed, until ‘PL1 ’button is pressed. The error remains memorised, for later display.

18


INFORMATION OFFERED BY CONTROL STANDARD INFORMATION Different blocks of information are shown on display. In order to proceed from one block to the next, press ‘PL1 ‘button for a short time. Once the last block is on display, renewed pressing of button leads to return to 1. block of information: Block 1 : • Car position. • Reasons preventing movement of car. • Floor and type of call served by car. Block 2 : Memorised car calls. Block 3 : Memorised hall calls ‘descent’. Block 4 : Memorised hall calls ‘ascent’. Block 5 : Conditions of elevator components. Block 6 : Memorised errors.

DESCRIPTION OF BLOCKS OF INFORMATION Block 1 : Alternating information about position of car.

0

X Position of car

(0) indicates viewing of position of elevator

• Viewing of information while elevator is not moving: Number of the component which mainly prevents movement of elevator, and position of elevator, are displayed alternatingly.

0

X No. of installation component the condition of which prevents movement of elevator

The (A) indicates the component which mainly prevents movement of elevator

• Display of information during movement of elevator: Alternating information about type of call and floor served by elevator, and about actual position of elevator : SERVES CAR CALL ON FLOOR 7

SERVES HALL CALL ‘DESCENT’ON FLOOR 8

SERVES HALL CALL ‘ASCENT’ON FLOOR 4


19

INFORMATION OFFERED BY CONTROL Block 2 :

Informs cyclically about all memorised car calls. The following figure shows the manner in which car calls to floors 2, 5 and 9 appear on display :

1 sec.

Block 3 :

Informs cyclically about all memorised hall calls ‘descent’. The following figure shows the manner in which memorised hall calls ‘descent’to floors 3, 7, 8 and 10 appear on display :

1 sec.

Block 4 :

1 sec.

1 sec.

1 sec.

Informs cyclically about all memorised hall calls ‘ascent’. The following figure shows the manner in which memorised hall calls ‘ascent’to floors 1 and 6 appear on display :

1 sec.

1 sec.

Block 5 :

Conditions of elevator components. This block contains information about the conditions of the different components of the installation. Each component is provided with a number. If this number is flashing, the respective circuit is open, not active; if the number is not flashing, the circuit of the component is closed or connected. Once this block is entered, indication is as follows :

N o in f o r m a tio n is d is p l a y e d in th e s e d i g i t s

If you wish to enter this block, wait 2 seconds until appearance of the following :

20


INFORMATION OFFERED BY CONTROL IMPORTANT NOTE ABOUT VIEWING If digits are blinking, condition of component is contrary to value indicated in chart.

T h a t is , in f o r m a tio n is b e in g p r o v id e d c o n c e rn in g t h e c o n d itio n o f c o m p o n e n t n o . 1 . B y p re s s in g o f ‘ P L 1 ‘ b u tto n t h e o t h e r c o m p o n e n t s m a y b e v ie w e d c o n s e c u tiv e ly, u n til th e la s t o n e i s r e a c h e d . A t re n e w e d p r e s s in g o f b u tto n t h e ( E ) a p p e a r s w i t h o u t i n f o r m a tio n . If b u tto n is n o t p r e s s e d a g a in a fte r w a r d s , w e r e m a in in b lo c k 5 ; if b u tto n i s p r e s s e d o n c e a g a in , w e e n te r b l o c k 6 :

(•)

DO NOT PRESS

PRESS

PRESS

PRESS

PROCEED TO NEXT BLOCK

L e a v e ‘ P L 1 ‘ b u tto n p r e s s e d fo r s e v e r a l s e c o n d s , i n o r d e r t o a r r i v e a t p o i n t ( • ) m o r e q u i c k l y .

VIEWING OF CONDITIONS OF ELEVATOR COMPONENTS

The (E) indicates condition

Block 6 :

Number of elevator component: Not flashing: Circuit closed or connected Flashing: Circuit open or disconnected

Memorised errors and defects. In this block, the last 64 errors and defects which have occured in the installation may be viewed. At occurence of a new error it appears on display, irrespective of the block which is actually being viewed, and is memorised on PCB MicroBASIC. In the process, the oldest memorised error is deleted (if already 64 errors were memorised). At entry into this block of information the error which has occured last appears first. This means that the errors indicated start with the youngest and finish with the oldest. Each error is provided with a number informing about its age. Accordingly, error no. 3 must have occured after no. 5.


21

INFORMATION OFFERED BY CONTROL TECHNIQUE OF REPRESENTATION OF ERRORS

PREVIOUS BLOCK

PRESS

PRESS

FOLLOWING BLOCK

DO NOT PRESS

1 sec.

1 sec.

ERROR CODE

AGE OF ERROR

FLOOR ON WHICH ERROR OCCURED 01 : LOWEST FLOOR

• The following information is displayed cyclically, with an interval of 1 second : A) Age of error and error code. B) Floor on which it occured. • If (PL1) button is pressed for less than 1 second, the next error (older than the previous one) appears, and so forth. • If (PL1) button is pressed permanently at display of any error, the following appears :

PRESS

FOLLOWING BLOCK

DO NOT PRESS

VIEWING OF ERRORS

•

22

B y re le a s in g o f b u t t o n a n d r e n e w e d p r e s s in g t h e f o l l o w i n g b l o c k i s e n t e r e d .


CONTROL FUNCTIONS

Chapter 5

This chapter deals with the following points: • Basic functional steps • Description of special functions • Functional problems Knowledge of the information offered by control, listed in detail in chapter 4, is prerequisite for any practical use of the following information. The information offered by control appears in the shape of indicator lights (LEDs), and on displays with 3 digits.

BASIC FUNCTIONAL STEPS Luminous sequence Actuation of main switch ‘IG’leads to the following : • LED indicator light (DL9) + (5V) on, red: supply in microprocessor zone. • LED indicator light (DL10) + (24V) on, red: supply with 24V dc. • LED indicator light (DL8 , RMT) on, green: supply with 24V dc correct. These 3 LED indicator lights must always be active during normal operation. In the course of 3 seconds after the luminous sequence, a number corresponding with the software version appears on the 3 displays. Always keep this number ready when contacting the MP group (technical department).

Return control (connection on final floor) Characterised by the following points: The information of block 1 indicated on display is blinking, during movement the following appears : Both indications are blinking.

1 sec.

Criterion direction of correction If car is situated on intermediate floors, correction is effected on furthest floor, as defined in parameter no.21 (value A: lowest floor; value B: highest floor). If car is situated in outer zones (upper or lower), with open prelimit switch and without levelling (contact 207 ÷ 0V dc closed) : • Lower prelimit switch open: car is sent to 2. floor. • Upper prelimit switch open: car is sent to penultimate floor. If car is situated in outer zones (upper or lower), with open prelimit switch and with levelling (contact 207 ÷ 0V dc open), there is no movement of the elevator, and in 1. block of information (position of elevator) the position of the elevator is indicated. After completion of return control, information is displayed in block 1 (position of elevator), not flashing. Return control always begins after luminous sequence, when the elevator undergoes a miscorrection (example: through lack of pulses), and after completion of an inspection control. All other indicator lights and relays are connected as in normal control.


23

CONTROL FUNCTIONS Normal control Once the elevator is stopped, the following information alternatingly appears on the displays: • In case of semiautomatic hoistway doors.

1 sec.

ACTUAL POSITION OF CAR

• In case of automatic hoistway doors.

1 sec.

ACTUAL POSITION OF CAR In the first case, there is indication of door circuit being closed (central point on display active): SP (door circuit), and of there being no possibility for starting, as door contacts are not closed (A08); logical, as in this case, there is no closure (whereby interlock magnet is actuated or car doors are closed), as long as there is no door movement. In case of automatic hoistway doors, door circuit is bridged (central point on display always active). At closing of interlock circuit, display-point on left-hand side is activated. This is normally the case, as elevator is stationed with closed doors. The information (AAA) shows that elevator is ready for service and capable of realising any requested run. It may happen that the information does not appear as described above. For example: • The central display-point is not active (SP): indicates that door circuit is open. • (A08) or (AAA) do not appear: another cause prevents readiness for service (example: (A07) photoelectric barrier in car covered). See code chart/components which prevent run of elevator in chapter 5. If a call is actuated in this situation, and the elevator is ready to serve this demand, the normal sequence is as follows: • Closure of car door and actuation of interlock magnet. For this purpose, relay (ROPA) is deactivated, and relay (ROPC), as well as high-speed relay (RVR, LED DL6), are activated. In case of traction elevators, relay ascent (RS, LED DL3) or relay descent (RB, LED DL4) are activated, whereby the corresponding contact (relay) is connected. If there is an interlock magnet, the external relay of PCB MicroBASIC, (RLE), is connected. In case of hydraulic elevators, only relay (RLE) which actuates the interlock magnet is connected. • Once all circuits are closed (display-point on left-hand side active, interlock circuit), relay ‘RM’, with intermittent, red LED indicator light: ‘DL5 ’, is activated. In case of hydraulic elevators, ‘RS, with DL3 LED indicator light’or ‘RB, with DL4 LED indicator light’, is activated. In case of hydraulic elevators, relay (RET, without LED indicator light, in the upper left-hand corner of the relay block on PCB MicroBASIC) produces the delay between the main switch relay (CG) and run (CM, direct start) or the time of the star phase (star/delta start). • During movement, information block 1 on displays alternatingly shows actual position of elevator, and type of call as well as floor served. Between two floors, the photoelectric barrier (fork) receives 2 pulses each time. These appear on the display-point on the right-hand side (IMP). Furthermore, the DL11 (NO LEVEL) LED indicator light is active (green) the whole time, with the exception of the short moment of levelling at each stop.

24


CONTROL FUNCTIONS • At change of speed (once the last pulse of the photoelectric barrier (fork) is reached), relay (RVR, LED DL6) is deactivated. During the whole distance in slow speed, information block 1 of the displays has the following indication :

1 sec.

ACTUAL POSITION OF CAR

• Once the point of levelling is reached (contact 207: 0V dc, open), LED indicator light (DL11 NO LEVEL) is switched off and relay (RM, intermittent LED indicator light DL5) drops. Shortly afterwards, relay ascent RS, red LED indicator light (DL4) or relay descent (RB, LED indicator light DL3) also drops. Inspection control Inspection control is initiated by actuation of inspection switch. By means of this switch the circuit between terminals 24V dc and (208) is closed: • • • •

Relay of PCB MicroBASIC is activated (RMR, LED indicator light DL1). Any activity of control just taking place is stopped. Car and hoistway doors (if open) are closed. Block 1 of the displays has the following information:

1 sec.

INDICATES THAT INSPECTION CONTROL IS OPERATING

• If, for example, (A06) appears instead of (AAA), information is provided that car may not be moved in inspection control, as door circuit is open, see relation between codes/ the component which prevents movement, in document 4. In order to make the elevator move in inspection control, the same point (terminal) (208) is used as operating panel (ascent and descent) which at actuation of buttons for last and first car call, respectively, is supplied with (24V dc).

PLEASE NOTE .. ! : During inspection control, elevator may not be moved further than prelimit switches; that is, once, during ascent, the upper prelimit switch is reached, the elevator stops and is only able to continue in down direction. • Indication of information on display (block 1). At pressing of ascent the following appears :

1 sec.

CAR MOVES UPWARDS DURING INSPECTION


25

CONTROL FUNCTIONS ABOUT INSPECTION At each pressing of ascent or descent (during inspection) the following appears, respectively: (SSS) or (bbb). If car is not moving, movement is prevented by a component; that is, in this last case, (AAA) does not appear, but instead a code is displayed indicating the component which prevents movement (for example: (A08), interlock circuit or car door circuit open).

• At pressing of descent the following appears :

1 sec.

CAR MOVES UPWARDS DURING INSPECTION

• In order to change from inspection control to normal function, change inspection switch (contact between 208 and 24V dc is opened), disconnect relay (RMR, LED DL1) and actuate correction control.

Emergency control (only for hydraulic elevators) In case of hydraulic elevators, MicroBASIC control is provided with a thermomagnetic switch (IB, 6A) which must always be activated, except if control will not be operating for a longer period. Thus, the battery may be recharged by means of PCB MicroBASIC loader during normal function, and will be able to supply energy in case of emergency control. Normal voltage of battery must be between 13 and 13.8V dc (except in unloaded condition). Check regularly for correct voltage. PCB MicroBASIC is provided with a drain sensor for the lower battery voltage. Once this voltage reaches a value of 9V dc, emergency control is disconnected and stopped. Emergency control may be actuated in case of the following : • Power failure (energy supply from mains disconnected), therefore LED indicator lights (RMT, DL8), (24V, DL10) and (5V , DL9) are switched off. • Thermomagnetic switch (IB, 6A) is activated. • There must be a factor informing about end of emergency control. There are two possibilities : A ) Emergency control is finished once elevator has reached next floor in down direction. For this purpose, magnet switches 326, 327, 328 or photoelectric barrier (fork) (MAC 523/12) may be used: Supply is from points (+12F) and 0V dc, and their outlet (NIVELADOR) (=levelling device) is connected to terminals 207 and 0V dc. In this case, jumper J1(lower right-hand area of PCB MicroBASIC) must be fixed. LED indicator light (NO LEVEL, DL11, green) is always luminous while elevator is between floors. That is, in this case, elevator will only realise emergency control if LED indicator light (NO LEVEL) is active. B ) In the second case, emergency control is completed at any other point of the run of the elevator, generally on the lowest floor. In this context, the following points must be accurate: • Do not fix jumper J1 (lower right-hand area of PCB MicroBASIC). • Install additional contact in hoistway which is connected to terminals 5 and 0V dc and normally closed. Opening of this contact leads to end of emergency control. • In addition to the points mentioned, it is necessary that all contacts of the safety circuit are closed, so that emergency control may be carried out. • If all previously mentioned points are accurate, there is a voltage of (12Vdc) which is the voltage the battery has at this moment, minus the voltage drop on cables at terminals 281 (+) and 280 (-) (points of connection of emergency valve). Indicator light (EMER, LED indicator light DL7 , red, intermittent) is switched on while outlet for emergency valve is energised. (NO LEVEL) indicator light stays on, until elevator is at floor-level.

26


CONTROL FUNCTIONS DESCRIPTION OF SPECIAL FUNCTIONS Repeated door close or interlock error Control realises closing of doors and actuation of interlock magnet during a maximum time (TG). If circuit cannot be closed, command is given to open doors, and/or interlock magnet is disconnected. This is followed by a renewed attempt at closing, and accordingly up to 12 times. If circuit cannot be closed, elevator changes into condition called ‘temporary out of service FST’. On PCB MicroBASIC display, error F05 is indicated which remains memorised for later display. In this situation, the elevator does not serve any hall calls. In order to return to normal function there must be a car call. Interruption of photoelectric barrier in car or opening of automatic hoistway door If ray of photoelectric barrier in car is interrupted (if door open button is pressed or microswitch for door sensitivity is open) or semiautomatic hoistway door remains open for more than 48 seconds, elevator changes into a temporary out of service and does not serve any hall calls (error F12 or F11 are indicated, respectively). In order to return to normal function it is sufficient that the respective component change into the closed circuit condition for five consecutive seconds. Repeated door close or interlock error If car is provided with automatic hoistway doors, and if it is stopped with closed doors, doors may be opened : From outside : By pressing of call button. From car :

By pressing of door open button or of call button for the floor on which car is situated.

If doors are just being closed for running, closure may be interrupted : From outside : By pressing of call button corresponding with service defined as next service to be carried out by car From car :

By interrupting ray of photoelectric barrier, by actuating microswitch for door sensitivity (presence of obstacle), or by pressing of door open button or of call button of the floor on which car is situated.

In this case, door opening time is equivalent to door closing time, plus 2 seconds. After the end of a run, command is given to open doors within a fixed time (TG). Once this time has passed, command is given to close doors, if calls not yet served are memorised or if hoistway doors are automatic. Fireman control MicroBASIC control permits connection of 2 fireman’s key switches, one in hoistway and one in car. Fireman’ s key switch in hoistway Is usually located on main floor of building. Activation by closing of circuit between terminals (10, CH2) and (+24 CH1). If fireman’s key switch is actuated while elevator is moving, elevator stops run at next floor and starts in direction of the floor, on which fireman’s key switch is located, without opening doors. If no stop was necessary (as the actual direction of movement is adequate for reaching floor of fireman’s key switch), all calls are simply deleted, and the elevator is brought to floor of fireman’s key switch.


27

CONTROL FUNCTIONS ABOUT ASYMMETRIC ELEVATORS In both elevators parameters 0 and 1 (number of floors of the installation) must be configured with the same value. This value coincides with the total number of floors of the installation. The displays for binary input connected to both controllers must have the same programming (sequence). This must also coincide with the total number of floors of the installation. In parcel for connection of car calls (CC1), terminals corresponding with floors on which elevator does not stop (in case of absence of button on car operating panel) must remain free.

If, at actuation of fireman’s key switch, elevator is stationed on fireman floor, doors always remain open. In this situation, no call is served (neither hall calls, nor car calls), until fireman’s key switch is no longer actuated, neither in car, nor in hoistway. Fireman’ s key switch in car Activation by closing of circuit between terminals (9, CC2) and (+24, CC1). Fireman’s key switch in car may only be actuated, once key switch in hoistway is activated and elevator is stationed. If installation is provided with fireman’s key switch in hoistway, but there is none in car, terminals (9, CC2) and (+24, CC1) must be bridged. This leads to the same effect as if fireman’s key switch in car had been actuated permanently. Procedure after activation of fireman’s key switch in car: Once elevator is stopped with open doors, no call is served. After activation of key switch in car, a call on car operating panel (car call) may be served, but no further calls will be registered and no hall calls will be served. Closing of doors is controlled by pressing of car call button. While button remains pressed, doors close. However, if it is released before complete closure, doors begin once again to open. Once closure is completed (elevator starts moving), no further pressing is necessary. Fireman’s control is finished, once key switch in hoistway is deactivated. If there is key switch in car, it must also be deactivated, in order to make sure that there will be no undesired operations at later actuations of fireman control. Mixed selective control This function is only applicable in case of Simplex control. In addition to the current functions of selective control, descent and ascent, MicroBASIC facilitates operation in mixed selective control. Several hall calls to lower floors may operate as selective control, ascent. The remaining higher floors then operate as selective control, descent. This may for example be useful in case of buildings with garages. Configuration technique : PARAMETER 4 :

With value C, operates in mixed selective control.

PARAMETER 5 :

With value B, facilitates provision of the highest floor of those configured as selective control, ascent, with 2 hall call buttons, one for ascent and one for descent. In order to achieve this function, parameter 4 must have value C.

PARAMETER 6 :

Defines number of lower floors which operate in mixed selective control.

Mixed selective control is applicable to buildings with up to 10 or 9 floors, thus parameter 5 receives value B (two hall call buttons on main floor). Asymmetric elevators This function is only applicable in case of Duplex control. If one of the elevators of a Duplex installation has no access to any one floor, it is called asymmetric.

28

PARAMETER 7 :

Defines number of floors in lower zone on which elevator does not stop.

PARAMETER 8 :

Defines number of floors in upper zone on which elevator does not stop. That is, asymmetry may occur in lower and upper zone; moreover, one elevator may be asymmetric on lower floors and the other may be asymmetric on upper floors.


CONTROL FUNCTIONS Operation emergency power aggregate This function is only applicable to Duplex elevators. If parameter 11 is configured with value B, there is a special entry to control, informing control about whether energy to motor is supplied by conventional mains or by an alternative emergency function (example: emergency power aggregate). Once entry is connected to (+24), control understands that there is a case of emergency (function ‘emergency power aggregate’, active). It operates in the usual manner, with the exception that calls not yet served are only served once the other elevator is stopped. In this manner, the emergency function only provides energy for one elevator at a time. Deletion of car calls Car calls registered due to improper handling of car operating panel are deleted automatically (example: a single person presses all call buttons). By means of parameter 19 this function may be activated with the following options: Value A :

Function not activated, no deletion of car calls.

Value B :

Deletes all registered calls, if in two consecutive runs circuit of semiautomatic door (connection 103/104) does not open or contact of photoelectric barrier in car (connection 2/24V dc) does not change over. This option must not be used if elevator has neither semiautomatic hoistway doors, nor a photoelectric barrier in car.

Value C/D :

Registration of up to 3 or 6 car calls, respectively.

Re - levelling

FZS FB

E D

FLOOR

C

RE-LEVELLING DURING DESCENT

B

FS

ZONE (CPS)

RE-LEVELLING DURING DESCENT

A ZONE (CPS)

K2 00

K3

K1 103

Relation to MicroBASIC control : Door zone. Zone which defines moment at which car stops. Established by contact connected to terminals 207 and 0V dc (levelling device) : Open : Closed :

Within door zone. Outside of door zone.


29

CONTROL FUNCTIONS Re-levelling zone: Once car reaches this zone, control is informed that re-levelling must be initiated. Conventionally, this function is fulfilled by means of the same levelling component (levelling device) and/or contact of safety zone, in order to keep the number of components in hoistway as low as possible. As standard in MicroBASIC, re-levelling is initiated at leaving of door zone, that is, when contact between terminals 207 and 0V dc (levelling device closed) closes. Normally, this solution is acceptable. Exceptions are cases in which door zone is very short (hydraulic elevators with great stopping precision) and/or in which frequency and risk of misregulation are very high (example: hydraulic car elevators). For such situations, there is an entry by means of which, at energising with 24 V dc, control is informed that re-levelling zone is reached (only in this case re-levelling begins). For this purpose parameter 11 must be configured with value C. In this case, an additional component must be fixed in hoistway which closes contact (by energising with 24 V dc at entry). Re-levelling direction. If car escapes from door zone in up direction, re-levelling must occur in down direction. If car escapes in down direction, re-levelling must occur in up direction. Depending on the value of parameter 24, controller offers two possibilities for re-levelling : Value A : Re-levelling function deleted. Selected if there shall be no re-levelling of elevator (generally in case of traction elevators). For traction elevators 1 speed always select value A. Value B : By means of terminal. Special input indicating that, depending on the voltage applied, elevator chooses one or the other direction for re-levelling : • No voltage: Re-levelling in up direction. • 24V dc: Re-levelling in down direction. Normally, in case of hydraulic elevators, parameter 24 is given value B. If there is only re-levelling in up direction, no additional component needs to be installed. Safety zone. Zone within unlocking zone of hoistway doors in which a safety contact or circuit may be fixed for bridging of door circuits, interlock and car (connections 103, 104|104, 105|105, 106), so that re-levelling will take place with open doors (EN-81). Safety zone is defined by its safety contact or circuit which is connected between terminals (00) and (103) : • Safety circuit open: outside of safety zone. • Safety circuit closed : within safety zone. PCB MicroBASIC always connects terminals (00) and (106) internally (thereby bridging door circuit, interlocks and car), when re-levelling is initiated or when car finishes slow-speed run (see special function ‘levelling with open doors’). If at beginning of re-levelling, there is a voltage of 110 V ac on terminal (00, that is, a safety contact or circuit is bridged (103 with 00)), controller starts re-levelling, without changing condition of doors. Further features of re-levelling in MicroBASIC control systems : Parameter 18 permits delaying initiation of re-levelling. Control always effects re-levelling as quickly as possible. In certain situations re-levelling control is not actuated, as this would make no sense in practice (example: elevator initiates new run). The installation (levelling device 538)+ kit magnetic switch (magnetic kit) 327/328, is provided with all functions for re-levelling and for levelling with open doors. These functions are applicable to hydraulic elevators as well as to traction elevators.

30


CONTROL FUNCTIONS Levelling with open doors Parameter 22 permits decision about whether this function is to be actuated. Levelling with open doors may be realised during slow speed of car (in levelling zone). A safety contact or circuit must be used which informs about door unlocking zone and which in turn bridges door circuits, interlocks and car (terminals 103, 104|104, 105|105, 106). Connection at points (00) and (103, of CC2). This component is also used for re-levelling with open doors. During slow-speed run, PCB MicroBASIC tests voltage on terminal (00). If there is 110 V ac, this terminal is connected internally with (106, thereby bridging circuit), and command is given to open doors. Stopping on lowest floor (hydraulic elevators) If elevator remains stationed for more than 7 minutes without running, it is automatically returned to lowest floor. Only in case of hydraulic elevators. Grave errors ( F1 | F2 | F3 | F4 | F9 | F14 | F10 | F15 | F16 | F17 | F26 | F27 ) If there is a grave error in the installation, so that the elevator may not carry out any further runs, it changes into a ‘permanent out of service’, immediately after discovery of grave error. In this case, the error (Fxy) appears on the PCB MicroBASIC displays. The error is memorised for later displays. On the car display (and/or display in hoistway, if existing) the 1. and 2. floors are indicated. Stopping for opening and subsequent closing on final floor (hydraulic elevators, error F03) If, after reaching of final floor and opening of final limit switch, car starts another run (final limit switch is closed), car is stopped on lowest floor, and no further runs will be carried out. It changes into a permanent out of service. On display, error (F03) is indicated.

VERY IMPORTANT NOTES The controller analyses this situation by testing voltage on terminal (103). That is, we definitely discover when any contact (not only the final limit contacts) between terminals 102/220 or 103 opens for more than about 3 seconds. This function only operates in hydraulic elevators, during normal function or in case of fireman control (not during inspection). By changing over of inspection switch permanent out of service may be annulled.


31

AFFILIATED COMPANY • MP THE ARGENTINE San Antonio, 1111/15/19 Capital Federal Buenos aires - The Argentine Tf. +54.1.3027877 Fax. +54.1.3032321 e-mail : [email protected] Contact : Mr. Abraham Lera

• MP AUSTRIA Triesterstrasse, 14 2351 Wiener Neudorf - Austria Tf. + 43 2236 865626 Fax. + 43 2236 86562620 e-mail : [email protected] Contact : Mr. Alvaro Rein

• MP BRAZIL Av. Guido Caloi, 1985, G-8 CEP 05802 - 140 Capela do Socorro/Sao Paulo, SP - Brazil Tf. + 55 11 58903338 / 58911245 Fax. + 55 11 58903308 e-mail : [email protected] Contact : Mr. Juan López Herrera

• MP CHINESE N.1003, The Gateway Building 10, Yabao Road, Chaoyang District 100020 Beijing - Chinese Tf. + 8610 65915851 Fax. + 8610 65915852 e-mail : [email protected] Contact : Mr. Guillermo Maestre

• MP CZECH Porícanská 465/3 194 00 Praha 9 Czech Republic Tf. + 420 2 90051417 Fax. + 420 2 861518 e-mail : [email protected] Contact : Mr. Pavel Dvorský

• MP DEUTSCHLAND Krokusstrasse 9 D - 12357 Berlin - Deutschland Tf. + 49 30 66 06 100 Fax. + 49 30 66 06 10 60 e-mail : [email protected] Contact : Mr. Peter Erdmann

• MP GREECE 461, Irakliou Ave. 14122 N. Iraklio, Athens - Greece Tf. + 30 1 2840155 Fax. + 30 1 2845183 e-mail : [email protected] Contact : Mr. Juan Ant. R. Toquero

• MP ITALY Via Lodi, 1 Muggio, Milano - Italy Tel. + 39 039 792100 / 792154 Fax. + 39 039 791912 e-mail : [email protected] Contact : Mr. Alberto Sordi

• MP THE NETHERLANDS Drukkersweg, 6 2031 EE Haarlem - The Netherlands Tf. + 31 (0) 23 5477834 Fax. + 31 (0) 23 5477839 e-mail : [email protected] Contact : Mr. Rowan Lebbink

• MP POLAND UL Dozynkowa, 9 H61-662 Poznan - Poland Tf. +48.61.8266033 Fax. +48.61.8266033 e-mail : [email protected] Contact : Renata Jezewicz/Wieslaw Mielcarski

• MP PORTUGAL Rua das Lasge, 166; Z. Ind. San Caetano Valadares, Oporto - Portugal Tf. + 351 2 7117971 Fax. + 351 2 7120949 e-mail : [email protected] Contact : Mr. José Guerra

LISBOA Subcidiarie Bairro 16 Novembro, lote 50 1ªsq. Tires 2775 Parede - Lisboa Subcidiarie Tf. + 351 1 4843078 Fax. + 351 1 4843087 Contact : Mr. José Guerra

• MP SOUTH AFRICA 28 Visagie Street, Guaranty House 2º floor Pretoria Central - South Africa Tf. + 271 2 3253234 Fax. + 271 2 3256266 e-mail : Contact : Mr. Tony Barbosa

• MP CHILE Edificio Puerto 1 Local 3 San Francisco 251 - Santiago (Centro) - Chile Tf. + 56 2 3611982/83 Fax. + 56 2 3611984 e-mail : [email protected] Contact : Patricio Mora

• MP THAILAND Suite 1401, level 14, 140 One Pacific Place Sukhumvit Road Bangkok 10110 - Thailand Tf. + 66 2 6535036 Fax. + 66 2 6535130 e-mail : [email protected] Contact : Mr. Eric Tanguy

• MP UNITED KINGDOM 13/14 Chartwell Business Centre The Avenue Bromley, Kent BR1 2BS - United Kingdom Tf. +44 (0) 20 8466 0810 Fax. +44 (0) 20 8466 0737 e-mail : [email protected] Contact : Mr. Gary Gilbertson

• MP TURKEY Kartal Caddesi, 71 B1450 Yakacik - Istambul - Turkey Tf. + 90 216 3772880 Fax. + 90 216 3094392 e-mail : [email protected] Contact : Mr. Tibet

BRANCH OFFICE IN SPAIN • MP BARCELONA Pol. can Parellada, c/ Colón 485, nave 10 08228 Les Fonts de Terrassa - Barcelona Tf. + 34 93 7317333 Fax. + 34 93 7310838 e-mail : [email protected] Contact : Mr. Daniel Rodriguez

• MP BILBAO Pol. San Lorenzo, Pabellón 5 48930 Bedía - Vizcaya Tf. + 34 94 6313585 Fax. + 34 94 6313529 e-mail : [email protected] Contact : Mr. Octavio Pérez

Pol. Navisa, Calle E. Tfno. : + 34 95 4630562 Fax : + 34 95 4657955 41006 Seville. SPAIN

• MP MADRID Pol. Fin de Semana, c/ Gumersindo Llorente, 62 28022 - Madrid Tf. + 34 91 3294943 Fax. + 34 91 3293719 e-mail : [email protected] Contact : Mr. Enrique Fuentes

• MP VALENCIA Pol. nº1 de Catarroja, c/ Proyecto 32, nave 2C 46470 Catarroja - Valencia Tf. +34.96.1272540 Fax. +34.96.1272528 e-mail : [email protected] Contact : Mr. Javier Lera

Technical Dossier v0.00, JULY 01 English / MSCM02Uk

Installation • Assembly • Start-Up Use • Maintenance • Repair

Lift SCM 02

GENERAL TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 • PASSENGERS RESCUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 1.1 Procedure for a Passengers Rescue Operation in a SCM Lift. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 1.2 Procedure for opening landing doors with the emergency key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Chapter 2 • INSTALLATION AND ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1 The Works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2 Materials Unloading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3 Life Rope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4 Shaft Ranging and Check-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5 Shaft Supports Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6 Guides Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7 Machine Bedframe Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.8 Bedframe Assembly Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.9 Placing the Machine On the Bedframe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.10 Securing the Electric Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.11 Carrying Out the Electrical Installation of the Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.12 Executing the Connection of the Revision Hose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.13 Car and Counterweight Frame Assembly (wedge boxes should be assembled) 2.14 Traction Ropes Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.15 Machine Pulley Covers Kit Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.16 Instructions for Weights in the Counterweight Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.17 Assembly of the Speed Governor and its Rope in the Car . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.18 Car and Counterweight Buffer Support Pillars Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.19 Doors Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.20 Car Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.21 Doors Operator Assembly in the Car . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.22 Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6 6 6 7 7 11 12 16 17 18 19 20 20 21 22 24 24 24 25 26 26 27 27

Chapter 3 • COMMISSIONING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 3.1 Checks and Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 3.2 Car and Counterweight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Chapter 4 • USE OF THE LIFT SCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1 Purpose of These Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2 The Intended Use of the Lift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3 Types of Control Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.1 Simplex Automatic Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.2 Simplex Collective Control Unit in Descent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.3 Simplex Collective Control Unit in Ascent and Descent . . . . . 4.3.4 Duplex Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.5 Duplex Collective Control Unit in Descent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.6 Duplex Selective Control Unit in Ascent and Descent . . . . . . . 4.4 Information on the Normal Use of the Lift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4.1 Keep the Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4.2 Situations that Require Professional Intervention . . . . . . . . . 4.4.3 Entering and Exiting Safely . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4.4 Lift Accesses Free from Obstacles at The Landings . . . . . . . . 4.4.5 Open Shafts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4.6 Control Unit Cabinet / Upper Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4.7 Description of the Different Control Unit Cabinet Components 4.4.8 Use of the Emergency Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4.9 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

34 34 34 36 36 36 36 36 37 37 38 38 38 38 38 38 38 38 39 39

Chapter 5 • MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1 Description of Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2 Lift Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3 Guides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4 Landing Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5 Ropes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5.1 Procedure for Replacing the Ropes . . 5.6 Machine and Bedframe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.6.1 Procedure for Replacing the Machine 5.6.2 Procedure for Replacing the Pulley . . 5.7 Speed Governor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

40 40 41 41 41 42 43 43 43 44 44

v0.00, JULY 01

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

Page 2 / 46

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

MSCM02UK

Lift SCM 02

5.8 Buffers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.9 Alarm Device and Emergency Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.10 Rescue System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.10.1 Checks and Tests To Be Carried Out During the Maintenance Inspections of 5.10.2 Checks and Tests on the Car and Access to the Car . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.11 Counterweight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.11.1 Checks and Tests on the Counterweight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.12 Guide Shoes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.13 Safety Gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.13.1 Checks and Tests on the Safety Gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.14 Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.15 Load Weighing Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.15.1 Checks and Tests on the Load Weighing Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.16 Safety Electric Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.16.1 Checks and Tests on the Safety Electric Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.17 Signalling and Control Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.17.1 Checks and Tests on the Signalling or Control Units Affecting Safety . . 5.18 Electric Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.18.1 Checks and Tests on the Electric Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

v0.00, JULY 01

Page 3 / 46

.............. .............. .............. the Rescue System .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. .............. ..............

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

MSCM02UK

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

44 44 44 44 44 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 46 46

Lift SCM 02

Chapter 1 • PASSENGERS RESCUE 1.1 Procedure for a Passengers Rescue Operation in a SCM Lift. 1.

Contact the lift technician. SAFETY DEVICES should always remain ACTIVE.

2.

TURN OFF THE MAIN SWITCH OF THE LIFT in the upper compartment of the electric cabinet, next to the lift door at the upper floor.

3.

CHECK TO SEE THE POSITION OF THE CAR. TRY TO CALM TRAPPED PASSENGERS DOWN and inform them that the rescue operation is going to take place and the car will move. Tell them no to try to open the doors or leave the car until they are told to do so safely.

4.

CHECK THAT ALL LANDING DOORS ARE CLOSED AND BLOCKED AND CAR DOORS ARE CLOSED. Put up an “OUT OF ORDER” sign at each entrance.

5.

SELECT THE MACHINE PULLEY TURNING DIRECTION (UPWARDS OR DOWNWARDS AS SUITABLE, TO RUN THE CAR TO THE NEAREST LEVEL ) with the left handle of the upper compartment.

6.

RUN THE CENTRAL LEVER, which operates on the machine pinion, while executing a slight swaying movement with the lever, until it does fully go down, which means that the rescue device is perfectly connected. Then, secure the lever with a through bolt.

7.

LOOSEN THE MACHINE BRAKE, by pulling the lever VERY SLOWLY and move it to turn the pulley manually. WARNING : AT THE END OF EACH CYCLE, LOOSEN THE BRAKE HANDLE. The car may go up or down by itself; in the event of car overspeed (continuous noise and vibration in the rescue lever) loosen the brake immediately. If the car is blocked by the safety gear operation, or if it does not move, contact a qualified technician.

8.

LOOSEN THE BRAKE ONCE THE POSITION IS REACHED. THE CAR SHOULD REMAIN WITHIN THE INTERLOCK AREA; the level LED, installed on the check-up control station of the upper compartment, lights up when the car is at floor level.

9.

OPEN LANDING DOORS WITH THE EMERGENCY KEY to free the passengers. Follow the instructions of the emergency key. WARNING : If the car is not exactly at floor level, pay special attention to protect the passengers when leaving the car.

10. ONCE THE PASSENGERS ARE OUT, MAKE SURE THAT ALL DOORS ARE CLOSED AND CORRECTLY BLOCKED. 11. LEAVE ALL DEVICES AND RESCUE SYSTEM OPERATIONS IN THEIR INITIAL POSITION. 12. WARN THE TECHNICAL DEPARTMENT so that the lift is checked before it is restarted.

WARNING : The lift should not have power supply until the assistance of the technical department.

v0.00, JULY 01

Page 4 / 46

MSCM02UK

Lift SCM 02

1.2 Procedure for opening landing doors with the emergency key. In the event of an emergency, the landing door release key should be used to have access to the lift shaft or car. For safety reasons, only trained staff familiar with the rescue procedure are authorised to use this key. WARNING : Should it be necessary to open the landing door to determine the position of the car or to free the passengers, be particularly careful to avoid falls into the lift shaft. Do not leave landing doors open unless the entrance is properly protected and safe, thus avoiding falls into the lift shaft. 1.

LOCATE AND PREPARE THE DOOR RELEASE KEY.

2.

TURN OFF THE MAIN LIFT SWITCHES IN THE CONTROL UNIT CABINET.

3.

LOCATE THE DOOR RELEASE TRIANGLE AT THE DOOR FRAME. All doors have a door release triangle. In the case of MACPUARSA doors, it is located at the door lintel.

4.

INSERT THE KEY INTO THE TRIANGLE, TO ENGAGE THE DEVICE. TURN THE KEY IN THE APPROPRIATE DIRECTION TO RELEASE THE DOOR.

5.

SIMULTANEOUSLY, OPEN THE DOOR BY PRESSING THE DOOR EDGE MANUALLY.

6.

ONCE THE LANDING DOOR IS OPEN, THE CAR DOOR IS NO LONGER BLOCKED AND CAN BE OPENED MANUALLY WITHOUT USING THE KEY.

DOOR

Emergency Door Release Key Emergency Door Release Operation

View of The Emergency Door Release Triangle

v0.00, JULY 01

Page 5 / 46

MSCM02UK

Lift SCM 02

Chapter 2 • INSTALLATION AND ASSEMBLY EVERYTHING DETAILED HERE IN THE MATTER OF SAFETY IS EXPLAINED IN GENERAL TERMS. TOGETHER WITH THIS DOSSIER ALWAYS HAVE A DOSSIER FOR THE PREVENTION OF LABOUR RISKS WITH YOU, SINCE ALL SAFETY MEASURES ARE MORE WIDELY DETAILED. 2.1 The Works

Obligatory Head Protection

•

• • • •

Obligatory Feet Protection

Always use a safety helmet within the area where the works are taking place, since it will protect you against a possible fall of objects. Also use boots with the soles protected against cutting objects and the upper area of the toes protected with metal reinforcement against knocks and crushing due to the fall of materials of a high weight. The lift shaft should always be clean and free from obstacles, with its accesses being protected against the fall of objects and people, and should be built according to the plan specifications. Ensure that the lift shaft has the necessary hooks in the clear overhead for the loads assembly and elevation, which must have been previously installed by the builder. Check that power supply is three-phase and single-phase. There should be an area to store the materials, which should be as near the shaft as possible.

2.2 Materials Unloading When unloading materials, use the elevation devices available in the works (wheelbarrows, cranes, hand carriages, etc ... ) for weights higher than 25kg. Before making great efforts, use neoprene lumbar belts which will avoid injuries to your back.

Materials will be unloaded in the works by one or several operators of the company in charge of the installation, with the help of the works staff, who will provide the appropriate means to facilitate the tasks of unloading and distributing the material. The • • • fall. •

• • • • •

following must be taken into account when distributing and storing materials: Materials should be near the lift shaft. They should be located in a place into which water or rubbish may not fall, and far from machines generating dust. They should not be located in a place for passing through and their storage should not entail any danger for people in the event of The person receiving the material will buy it, together with a dispatch sheet, in order to check the most important elements, such as: • Car and counterweight frame dbg. • Machine and bedframe. • Door number, type and hand. • Number and type of car and counterweight guides. • Number and diameter of traction ropes and overspeed governor. • Number of rope hitches. • Number and type of car and counterweight guiding. Guides will be supported on three points to avoid buckling. If it is necessary to place them on a finished floor, some material should be put under them (paper, plastic, etc ...), so that the floor does not get dirty with the guide grease. When introducing the guides into the lift shaft, the lower part should be supported on the front side of the pit, and the upper part on the rear corners of the shaft. Leave doors in a safe place, where there is no risk of fall or deformation. If possible, place them at the different floors using a crane. Traction or hydraulic lift equipment should be unloaded together with the bedframe at the upper floor of the installation. In the case that some material had to be left in the open air, something which you should absolutely avoid, make sure that you cover it with plastics in such a way that it does not get dry. Do not leave it supported directly on the floor; it should be placed on pallets, bricks, planks, etc. Check the plastics the material was protected with when manufactured. Never leave the car in the open air, since it could be seriously damaged by water and moisture.

v0.00, JULY 01

Page 6 / 46

MSCM02UK

Lift SCM 02

2.3 Life Rope

The first operation you should perform inside the shaft is installing the “life rope”, prepared to bear the weight of two persons, and hooks at each of the shaft accesses. It is also important to use safety belts.

Obligatory individual protection against falls

2.4 Shaft Ranging and Check-Up

Obligatory head protection

Obligatory feet protection


Obligatory face protection

Obligatory hands protection

CAUTION Protect yourself against the fall of objects through the shaft and falls in the vacuum Be careful when drilling, welding, cutting and tightening To go down to the pit use a ladder Use the tools created to that purpose, placing them in the shaft, according to the installation plan; once the cords are suspended proceed to the check-up of each of their axis, floor by floor, to ensure the minimum dimensions indicated in the plan. See sketch. Select the tools for the upper and lower part in the clear overhead and pit respectively. Using the plugs supplied, secure the open pipe 1250 mm in length at a distance of 100 mm lower than distance X which is shown in the bob plumb scheme and ranging plan, trying to prevent the last guide support from interfering in the case of distance X. Fix the squares inside the torn pipe as shown in the sketch, in such a way that the bob plumbs remain in the exact position indicated in the scheme. Then, check these minimum measurements floor by floor. Once ensured, fix the side cords to the lower part, thus turning the intermediary crosspiece, as shown in the sketch. With the central bob plumb, using some colouring, mark a vertical line at the wall in the points corresponding to each guide support. This mark should later coincide with the medium point of each support. Once this operation is performed, the bob plumb can be removed. Two portable scaffolds are supplied to facilitate the ranging and subsequent assembly of supports at each landing door. They have an angular part supported on the corner of the shaft with the floor level, and a tensile part faced to the wall. Scaffolds are light and manageable; in the following pages some pictures show how to use them and how they should be adjusted.

v0.00, JULY 01

Page 7 / 46

MSCM02UK

Lift SCM 02

Ranging; Upper part, clear overhead

Ranging; Lower part, Pit

Scaffolds supplied

Tools for Ranging

v0.00, JULY 01

Page 8 / 46

MSCM02UK

Lift SCM 02

Plumbing Cord

Plumbing Cord with Colouring

Plumbing Cord

Distance ‘Y’ = 151 300

v0.00, JULY 01

Page 9 / 46

Distance ‘X’

149

MSCM02UK

Lift SCM 02

Usage of mobile scaffolds and their packing together with the guide scantlings

IMPORTANT Maximum load per scaffold : 150 kg When working in the scaffold and near the shaft, the use of the life rope is obligatory

The bottom of the scaffolds is adjustable by 50 mm each time. If they cannot be adjusted at the exact distance of the shaft bottom, fix the bottom of the scaffold slightly above the shaft bottom.

v0.00, JULY 01

Page 10 / 46

MSCM02UK

Lift SCM 02

2.5 Shaft Supports Assembly






Having used a bob plumb with some colouring, according to the distance of the ranging bob plumb scheme, make the coloured mark of the wall coincide with the slot in the medium point of the support.

Marking the wall with the colouring of the central bob plumb

1 : Mark 2 : Support

The height for each support is shown in the installation elevation plan

The medium point of the support should coincide with the colouring mark

IMPORTANT In order to secure each support, use the horizontal tear first. Once it is pre-fixed in that position, check the correct level of the piece, and finally, fix it with the vertical drill of the end. Then assemble the support arms, without tightening them.

2º 1º

v0.00, JULY 01

Page 11 / 46

MSCM02UK

Lift SCM 02

2.6 Guides Assembly






For the guides assembly, place the guides start-up base according to the shaft dimensions and then proceed with the simultaneous commissioning of car and counterweight guides, being the supplied scantlings of great use.

Assembled guides start-up base NOTES In order to introduce the guides into the shaft, use a spring governor, which should be introduced in one of the upper holes of the guide coupling. Distances depending on finished floor.

IMPORTANT Before the assembly, cut the section remaining in the counterweight guides (the male side), according to the distances in the elevation plan, see scheme è

In counterweight guides, all female parts should be installed upwards. In car guides, downwards.

v0.00, JULY 01

Page 12 / 46

MSCM02UK

Lift SCM 02

Clean the guides provisionally using a degreasing liquid to remove wax from the sliding part.

Guides Scantling

A : Start-Up Base B : Car Guides C : Counterweight Guides

A : Fixture to Counterweight Guide B : Bob plumb Register C : Fixture to Car Guide

v0.00, JULY 01

Installation of the 1st section of guides with 2 scantlings.

Page 13 / 46

MSCM02UK

Lift SCM 02

Two guide scantlings are supplied. They should be installed approximately 0.5 metres above and below the end of the guide sections, fixing them to the guides. Once they are fixed, make the register of each scantling coincide with the bob plumbs, (thus leaving 1-mm space between the cord and the angular register).

1 mm

1 mm

Once the position of the car and counterweight guides is defined, fix them to the shaft support, and then proceed with the installation of the next section. Notes •

•

•

• • •

Do not secure the start-up base to the floor until the position of the guides is not determined in relation to the bob plumbs; car guides should be fixed with through bolts, and counterweight guides, with flanges. The base should be placed centred in relation to the guides. In order to go up floor by floor, carrying out the same operations for each guide section, use the 2 portable scaffolds supplied. In the event that a counterweight guides coupling coincides with the fixing support to the shaft support, the latter should be installed below. The guide tooling should be perfectly levelled in both planes. Guides should be correctly aligned in the coupling. Finally, check all the guide couplings and in the case there were any ribs, remove them using a file.

v0.00, JULY 01

Page 14 / 46

MSCM02UK

Lift SCM 02

Car and counterweight guides fixture to shaft support

General view of the guides and shaft supports

v0.00, JULY 01

Page 15 / 46

MSCM02UK

Lift SCM 02

2.7 Machine Bedframe Assembly





A : Counterweight guides


Fixture to car guides

Bedframe wedging

v0.00, JULY 01

Page 16 / 46

MSCM02UK

Lift SCM 02

2.8 Bedframe Assembly Sequence

Main part

Fixture to counterweight guides

Upper arms

Joining arms to the main part

Fixture to car guides through flanges

Lower support for the interlock

Joint to main part

Flanges to car guides

General view of the bedframe and its components. In the lower part there are supports for the frame interlock inside the pit, to be assembled on the first guide support.

v0.00, JULY 01

Page 17 / 46

MSCM02UK

Lift SCM 02

2.9 Placing the Machine On the Bedframe






Perform as explained in the first paragraph of section 2.2. Using the elevation system installed on the upper part of the shaft, lift up the machine to its final position on the bedframe.

View of the machine on the bedframe

Lighting inside the clear overhead

A : Rope holding system

Load elevation system

v0.00, JULY 01

Page 18 / 46

MSCM02UK

Lift SCM 02

2.10 Securing the Electric Cabinet






Secure the electric cabinet using the supports supplied for that purpose, taking account of the fact that a provisional assembly should be carried out as a previous step to place the revision hose. WARNING : Under no circumstances should the cabinet be installed inside an enclosure or a private place. Firstly, fix the brackets in relation to the floor level, in order to install the panel and fix it according to the scheme. See the installation dossier supplied together with the preassembled electrical installation.

v0.00, JULY 01

Page 19 / 46

MSCM02UK

Lift SCM 02

2.11 Carrying Out the Electrical Installation of the Machine • • •

Disconnect the main switches of the installation. Use tools with an insulator not less than 1000V against possible electrical discharges. The working uniform should not be made of fabric with plastic components (cotton recommended).

See the installation dossier supplied together with the preassembled electrical installation and the installation dossier for the Machine Sassi Leo (Model with Disc Brake). 2.12 Executing the Connection of the Revision Hose






See the installation dossier supplied together with the preassembled electrical installation.

v0.00, JULY 01

Page 20 / 46

MSCM02UK

Lift SCM 02

2.13 Car and Counterweight Frame Assembly (wedge boxes should be assembled) Before carrying out this task, follow the steps in section 4º and perform as explained in the first paragraph of section 2.2.






To assemble the frames, take account of the distances and dimensions in the plan for their correct location in the shaft.

A : Counterweight frame B : Car frame

Once they are pre-fixed to the plan dimensions, proceed with the installation of the ropes. See the assembly dossier for car and counterweight frames and wedge boxes (safety gear).

Car mechanical interlock system assembly

v0.00, JULY 01

Page 21 / 46

MSCM02UK

Lift SCM 02

2.14 Traction Ropes Assembly Before carrying out this task perform as explained in section 4 and the first paragraph of section 2.2.






Try to unroll them one by one and in the same direction that they were coiled, in order to avoid loops in them, holding the rope roll and unroll it little by little. The following drawings show how to attach the ropes to the rope sockets. This is how to attach the ropes to the car frame as well as to the counterweight frame. The first drawing shows in detail how to pass the rope through the rope socket.

v0.00, JULY 01

No

Part Name

Qty

1

Rope Socket

-

2

Rope

-

Page 22 / 46

MSCM02UK

Lift SCM 02

The next drawing shows in detail how the rope clamps are attached. Place two rope clamp clevis for each one of them. Once the rope is attached, it is a good idea to affix the end of the rope to the rope itself (for example, with insulating tape). Short rope clamps with springs should be installed on the counterweight and long rope clamps without springs, on the car frame.

Rope hitch in counterweight

v0.00, JULY 01

Page 23 / 46

MSCM02UK

Lift SCM 02

2.15 Machine Pulley Covers Kit Assembly



2.16 Instructions for Weights in the Counterweight Frame Before carrying out this task, perform as explained in the section ‘Shaft Ranging and Check-Up’.






Before placing the lift in hitch, introduce the necessary weights to counterweight the car frame, as detailed in the plan. 2.17 Assembly of the Speed Governor and its Rope in the Car






IMPORTANT : Before placing the lift in hitch, introduce the necessary weights to counterweight the car frame, as detailed in the plan. See the installation and assembly dossier for the speed governor.

v0.00, JULY 01

Page 24 / 46

MSCM02UK

Lift SCM 02

2.18 Car and Counterweight Buffer Support Pillars Assembly Before commissioning a lift under revision ensure that there are no obstacles inside the shaft, and check that all accesses to the shaft are duly protected, thus preventing people not responsible for the installation from leaning over. Also make sure that people travelling in the assembly platform are not using the “life rope” during the travel.

A : Counterweight screen B : Counterweight buffer support pillar C : Counterweight buffer

v0.00, JULY 01

Page 25 / 46

MSCM02UK

Lift SCM 02

2.19 Doors Assembly






The car floor assembly should be carried out according to the installation of the car frame, as explained in the safety gear installation dossier, the car assembly dossier and the dimensions detailed in the assembly plan. Once the car floor is assembled, proceed with the installation of the landing doors. Use the appropriate tools. Check that the corresponding lock blocks the door once it is installed. Perform as explained in the section ‘Shaft Ranging and Check-Up’ and the first paragraph of section 2.2, (see landing doors assembly and installation dossier). 2.20 Car Assembly






Before carrying out this task, perform as explained in section ‘Shaft Ranging and Check-Up’ and the first paragraph of section 2. Likewise, do not forget to check the weight in the counterweight frame again. The rest of the car should be installed, taking account of the corresponding spaces in relation to the landing doors.

IMPORTANT : Before working from the car roof, and as a step for the car assembly, you should install the protection handrail.

v0.00, JULY 01

Page 26 / 46

MSCM02UK

Lift SCM 02

2.21 Doors Operator Assembly in the Car (see the installation dossier of the reveco operator).




In the assembly of the different components and accessories of the electrical part, perform as explained in section ‘Shaft Ranging and Check-Up’ and section ‘machine electric installation’. 2.22 Tools The following tools are absolutely necessary to carry out the assembly of the different lift components: • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

An electric or thermal hoist with a minimum load of 200 Kg. A gauge for car and counterweight guides. Control station with a plug. A control unit hose. A wire or nylon reel o with their corresponding plumbs. Tool box or boxes. A 300 gr bob plumb. Two 1500 gr bob plumbs. Two tensile aluminium scaffolds. A tracer bob plumb (drawing pen). A metal graduated bracket. A level. A mallet. A flat chisel. A 2 m metre. A hammer drill. A small normal drill. A drill chuck with an adaptor for iron bits. A wheel. A welding machine. Revolving cutters. Two adjustable spanners (a big one and a small one). A high security key set, 6-7 to 27-29. An Allen key case, 2-12. A reversible ratchet-spanner. Box spanners for squaring. A pair of universal pliers. A pair of round-nosed pliers. A pair of curved-nosed pliers for external washers. A pair of electrical scissors. A small straight-nosed screwdriver. Un medium straight-nosed screwdriver. Un big straight-nosed screwdriver. A star screwdriver. A stecker screwdriver. A fixed saw bow. Two steel handsaw blades. A rat-tile file. A flat file. Four pairs of tongs for quick adjustment. A pressure jaw. A multimeter or voltage tester. A conical smoother. Two brushes (a big one and a small one) Bits for widia concrete. Diameters, 6,8,10,12,18. A long through bore bit; diameter, 12 x 165. Bits for metals; diameter, 2.25,3,5,7,9,11,13.

v0.00, JULY 01

Page 27 / 46

MSCM02UK

Lift SCM 02

• • • • •

A protected portable computer. An oilcan. Adjustable G Clamp. A wound extension piece with different sockets. A thickness gauge set.

This is the basic material. People responsible for the assembly of the different lift components can use as many more tools as they deem necessary, and get the necessary material for the correct execution of their work. To avoid losing time, use plugs, insulating tape, screws, terminals, strips, rivets etc ..., which may be necessary at any time during the assembly operations.

v0.00, JULY 01

Page 28 / 46

MSCM02UK

Lift SCM 02

Chapter 3 • COMMISSIONING

IMPORTANT Before a lift is commissioned, check the existence and correct installation of : • Car and landing doors. • Final limit switches and terminal stopping switches. • Ropes and rope hitches. • Counterweight protection screen. • Machine-bedframe set (check that nuts and screws are correctly tightened). • Electric wiring in the car, control unit cabinet and shaft (in duplex configuration, please consult the sequence of operations to connect both lifts in the dossiers concerning the electrical section). 3.1 Checks and Tests Locking Devices. • • • •

First of all, make sure that landing doors are aligned with the car doors. They should not rub against each other or against the door frame. Check to see if interlock rollers and lock rollers are adjusted. Check the door interlock to make sure that once the landing door is closed the car moves. Try to move the door sideways when it is closed; there should be no movement at all. The car will not be able to move until the locking elements are engaged as shown in the diagrams below:

Effective interlock in closed position and safety electric contact established Minimum height 9mm.

(*) 9

(*)

Interlock Cam Slide Closing Zone 4

a)

MAX. 2

Rear view of the mechanical interlock cam slide

v0.00, JULY 01

Page 29 / 46

MSCM02UK

Lift SCM 02

b) Safety Electric Devices (Appendix A / Regulations). 1.

ELECTRIC SAFETY MEASURES. Ensure that there are no loose contacts and that all the connections are secured; observe the following: Differentials : These must have an appropriate triggering sensitivity (300 mA. Max for power and 30 mA. for lighting) and should have at least the same current as the magnetothermic. They should be disconnected manually and should be tested. Magnetothermics : They should have a maximum of twice the power as the elements they protect under normal working conditions. Ideally the current input should go to the magnetothermic, which should always be in the front and then to the differential. Finally, it should go to the installation. Theses checks should be carried out in the power and lighting circuit. 2.

CONTROL PANEL. Check that the phase and inversion failure relay is present and works when necessary. Check all wire connections, both input and output, and especially heavy current connections, making sure that they are properly tightened and correctly adjusted. There should not be any wires outside the connection terminal. Ensure that all the contacts are properly adjusted, especially those which correspond to the contactor auxiliary contact blocks; check that they are properly adjusted in their housing. If necessary, disassemble the relay capsule or contact blocks to adjust them or blow to remove any possible dust. The thermal relay test should be performed with the motor at its normal working temperature, after having made several trips. Remove a phase from the motor or block (disconnect) the brake so it does not open. The time required to disconnect the control unit should not be more than 10 seconds or less than 8. Check that the earth connection is well connected in the control panel and that the door (if any) is earthed.

3.

CAR, OUTSIDE, AND MAXIMUM TRAVEL TIME TIMERS. Ensure that the car control station commands are given preference over the outside control stations for at least two seconds. If not, adjust the car and outside timers in such a way that the waiting times are not very long. For example: car timer, 2 seconds; outside timers, 4 to 5 seconds. The maximum travel time timer should be adjusted so that the maximum travel time is longer than what it takes the car to travel the distance of two consecutive floors, always in the least favourable case. In the case of two-speed lifts, at slow speed, the maximum travel time should be 5 seconds above this time. This timer also controls the stopping of the operation if the ropes begin slipping on the sheave.

4.

GOVERNOR ELECTRIC CONTACT. Check that when the governor contact is tripped, the operation stops. Also check the tension pulley electric contact. This contact should stop the operation if a rope is stretched.

5.

CAR SAFETY GEAR. Verify that the safety gear contact stops the operation.

6.

REVISION OF THE CONTROL STATION OPERATION. Ensure that pushbuttons work in the correct direction. Check that the revision switch shuts down the lift operation as well as the car and outside control stations. Check that the lift stops when the stop button is pressed.

7.

FINAL LIMIT SWITCHES. Ensure that the operation is stopped when the lift overshoots the top- and bottom- stops before the car or counterweight makes contact with the buffers.

8.

SAFETY MEASURES IN THE CAR ROOF. Make sure that the slack rope switch, the STOP button and any other safety devices installed on the car roof cut off the power to the control unit and stop the lift when actuated.

9.

CAR DOOR CLOSING SAFETY CONTACTS. Make sure that the door contacts function properly, that the male and female parts fit together well and that the connection wires are well tightened.

10. PIT ELECTRICAL OUTLET AND STOPPING DEVICE. Check that there is a socket outlet base with an earth connection and a device for stopping the lift operation. 11.- EMERGENCY LIGHTING. Ensure that the lighting is sufficient with power on and off. The emergency lighting should be able to function for an hour.

v0.00, JULY 01

Page 30 / 46

MSCM02UK

Lift SCM 02

12. CHECK STOPPING PRECISION AND SMOOTHNESS. Ensure that for one-speed lifts, with half a load, the lift stops with no more than a 3-cm difference at the floor level of the car and landing, both going up and down. For two-speed lifts, this difference should be no more than 1 cm. Check that for two-speed lifts, the gears shift smoothly and the car moves slowly for at least the last 10 cm before stopping. 13. CALL BUTTONS (Landing and Car Pushbuttons). Check that they cause the lift to work and the numbering corresponds to the floors. Check that the different light indicators (“occupied”, “door open”, etc.) work properly. 14. LOAD WEIGHING DEVICE AND INDICATOR SIGN, CHECK OPERATION. Make sure that the leds of the indicator sign work and that the lift does not move if the car load exceeds the rated load. In that case, all the leds light up in the load indicator, and the inside overload warning buzzer sounds. 15. POSITION INDICATOR. Check that it works. The number on the position indicator should correspond to the floor the car is on. 16. PHOTOELECTRIC CELL. Ensure that it works in automatic landing doors and car doors, and that it causes them to reopen when there is an obstacle. 17. DOOR OPENING PUSHBUTTON. Press and check that the doors are reopened, except when this command is cancelled. In any case, this should always take place within 5 cm before closing. 18. CAR DOORS. Make sure the doors completely close off the entrance opening and there are no gaps greater than 3.5 mm. The doors should not make any noise when closing or opening and the lift should not start moving if there is an object greater than 1.5 cm in width stuck between the doors. The doors should not rub against each other, and should make no noise under operation. 19. EARTH CONNECTION. Ensure that all doors are connected to the lift’s earth through terminal. c ) Suspension elements and their attachments. Check that the rope diameter (use a gauge) and form are appropriate as per Document no. 5, “Complete List of Lift Components” and Document no. 8 “Basic Rope Features”. Ensure that the terminal and socket rope hitches, nuts, locknuts and safety pins, both in car and counterweight (electric lifts) are in perfect condition. d ) Braking system. Check the correct operation of the brake. For that purpose, the car should be loaded with 25% over the rated load. The test should be carried out with the car descending at rated speed by cutting off the power supply to the motor and brake. The brake should be able to stop the lift by itself. e ) Power or current measurement and speed measurement. In order to check the lift speed, load the car with half the rated load and using a tachometer, make sure that the working speed corresponds to that described in the plans. Use an ammeter clip to check the current at start-up and under operation and make sure they are correct according to the motor features. This measurement should be taken in the three phases.

v0.00, JULY 01

Page 31 / 46

MSCM02UK

Lift SCM 02

f)

Electrical installation.

1. Measurement of the insulation resistance for the different circuits. Using an ohmmeter, check that they exceed the insulation resistance values. Nominal Voltage of the Circuit (V)

Test Voltage (DC) V

Insulation Resistance (M5)

SEL

250

≥ 0.25

≤ 500

500

≥ 0.5

> 500

1000

≥1

The insulation resistance should be measured between each live conductor and earth. The electronic components should be disconnected to carry out these measurements 2.

Also check the continuity (the union of the earth terminals to each other) between the machine room earth terminals and that of the motor, control station, guides, governors, tension pulley and car and any other element that is subject to accidental drop in voltage.

g ) Final limit switches. Check that the final limit switches stop the lift operation when the lift goes past the end stops. h ) Checking adherence and verification of balance between the car and counterweight. Adherence : Check visually that there is no slippage between ropes and pulley under normal operation. Counterweight balance : Load the car with half the maximum load allowed and take it to the middle of the travel, so that the counterweight is more or less at the same distance from the machine room. Apply the brake by hand and slowly move the flywheel. If the lift tends to ascend or descend there is either too much or too little weight in the counterweight. It is advisable to load the counterweight with slightly less weight than required rather than perfect equilibrium or too much weight. 3.2 Car and Counterweight Adherence : Check visually that there is no slippage between ropes and pulley under normal operation: Using a piece of chalk mark the pulley and ropes at the same point and check there is no difference in their position, after the car has run up and down with 100% of the rated load. Perform this operation again with the car empty. Counterweight balance : In order to carry out this test, all car decoration should be finished. Load the car with half the maximum load allowed and take it to the middle of the travel, so that the counterweight is more or less at the same distance from the machine room. Apply the brake by hand and slowly move the flywheel. If the lift tends to ascend or descend there is either too much or too little weight in the counterweight. It is advisable to load the counterweight with slightly less weight than required rather than perfect equilibrium or too much weight (that is to say, it is better if the car tends to go down). i)

OVERSPEED GOVERNOR. 1. Use a tachometer to check the governor triggering speed; ensure that the speed corresponds to that indicated on the overspeed governor. For that purpose, the governor should not have a rope attached. The operation must be carried out directly on the governor. 2. When the governor contact is tripped, operation should be interrupted.

j)

CAR SAFETY GEAR. Check the correct installation and adjustment of the safety gears. Ensure that neither the rollers nor the wedges rub against the guide rails. There should be enough space between the guides and the car to allow the lift to operate correctly. 1. Test in descent: Load the car with 125% of the rated load, evenly distributed over the car area, and lock the overspeed governor pressing the pushbutton in the control unit cabinet; the lift should run at checking speed. Ensure the car remains in front of a landing door, so as to unload it, thus unblocking the safety gear. 2.

Test in ascent: This test is carried out in the same way, but with the car empty and the lift moving at rated speed. After performing this test make sure that no deterioration has been caused that might affect the normal use of the lift. Replace braking components (wedges, rollers), if necessary. Visual check is considered to be sufficient.

v0.00, JULY 01

Page 32 / 46

MSCM02UK

Lift SCM 02

k)

BUFFERS. Energy storage type buffers (springs). For this test, the car with its rated load should be placed on the buffers and the ropes should be made slack. Check the compression corresponds to that given by the characteristic curve of the buffers. Do not exceed the distances indicated in Document no. 15 “Installation Plans”.

l)

INTERCOM. Check the correct operation of the bidirectional communication device.

m)

MECHANICAL CAR LOCKING DEVICE. Make sure that the latch fits in its housings, that it moves correctly in both directions and that the control unit is disabled when frame and car are locked. Load the car roof with 150 kg and check the system resists without any appreciable damage. (Warning: the car must remain empty).

n)

MECHANICAL RESCUE SYSTEM. Perform a simulated rescue operation, both in ascent and descent. After performing these operations, check that the towrope stretching is still correct and that the pinion engaging the machine shaft remains in its initial position.

v0.00, JULY 01

Page 33 / 46

MSCM02UK

Lift SCM 02

Chapter 4 • USE OF THE LIFT SCM 4.1 Purpose of These Instructions This chapter includes the necessary instructions for the normal use of the lift SCM, in accordance with standard EN 81-1 and Royal Decree 1314/97 Appendix I, 6.2. This dossier provides the necessary information for the normal use of this lift by the user, placing great emphasis on certain points which, due either to difficulty or necessity, will enable the correct use of it. 4.2 The Intended Use of the Lift These lifts are designed to transport passengers in residential and public buildings. They may also be used to transport goods whose weights and dimensions should not exceed the total load of the lift and the dimensions of the car. It is absolutely forbidden to transport goods that might damage the installation or the car itself. There is a sign inside the car indicating the rated load of the lift in kilograms and the maximum number of passengers allowed. The load permitted by the lift should never be exceeded (for that purpose, there is a device in the lift that indicates when overload occurs; in this case, the excess of load should be removed). Likewise, the number of passengers specified should never be exceeded as this could cause an overload. The basic operation of the lift consists in the movement of the car (loaded or empty) from one floor to another. For that purpose, the user should stand in front of the entrance to the lift, where there is an electric control station. Pushbuttons next to the landing doors may have different symbols or abbreviations. Some of the symbols or abbreviations used for this range of lifts are detailed below.

Call Button : calls the lift to go up or down

Up Button : orders the lift to go upwards

Down Button : orders the lift to go downwards

Once the lift has been called, you will observe it has arrived when the doors open (automatic doors), when the inside light of the car can be seen (manual door with vision panel) or when a light or an acoustic signal in the electric landing control station so indicates. Once the doors are open, you can go into the car where there is a control station and a sign specifying the rated load of the lift in kilograms, as well as the maximum number of passengers.

v0.00, JULY 01

Page 34 / 46

MSCM02UK

Lift SCM 02

There is a series of pushbuttons in the control stations, which are detailed below:

Car pushbutton to choose the desired floor level (-2,-1,0,1,2,3, etc ...)

Alarm button to ring the alarm (yellow).

Door Open button to re-open the door(s).

Door Closed button to close the door(s).

Intercom button for external communication.

Overload indicator.

There are also displays which indicate the floor the lift is on, both inside and outside the car (floors).

The user may also find other messages on the control panels and indicators, since they may have been specially requested by the owners.

v0.00, JULY 01

Page 35 / 46

MSCM02UK

Lift SCM 02

4.3 Types of Control Units The lift operates differently depending on the type of control unit : 4.3.1 Simplex Automatic Control Unit As soon as the car doors close, the passenger in the car has three seconds to move the car before the passengers at the floors can call the lift. Control unit operation in ascent: once a button is pressed, the car goes directly to the corresponding floor. If there is more than one passenger, the one who is going to the lowest floor should press his floor first. When the desired floor is reached and the passenger has left the lift, the doors will close and the button should be pushed by the passenger going to the next lowest floor, and so on. Control unit operation in descent: the passengers call the lift to their floors by pushing the call button, as long as the “occupied” signal is not lit; otherwise, the call will not be registered and the lift will not come. Once the car is at the floor, which can be noticed by looking through the door vision panel or through a light signal indicating the presence of the car, the passenger can open car and landing doors, and during the few seconds of preference that the passenger in the car is given over another passenger at a landing, he can order the movement of the car, as explained before, without any risk of interference. 4.3.2 Simplex Collective Control Unit in Descent Those lifts provided with this control unit have a memory which registers the up and down commands of the passengers in the car. However, this memory only registers the down commands of the passengers who are waiting at the floors, not their up commands. Control unit operation in ascent: pushbuttons in the car are also given a three-second preference over those at the landings, from the moment when the lift is about to move (doors closed). In lifts with automatic doors with a photoelectric sensor at the door threshold, they are also given preference whenever a passenger enters the car. As the passengers enter the car, they press the buttons corresponding to the floors they want to go to. Once the last passenger is in, that car begins moving automatically, and it stops at the floors requested. When the last passenger has left the car at each floor, the doors close and the lift starts to move again. In ascent, it does not answer any call from the landings, except for the one from the highest floor, provided that it is above the highest one requested by the passengers going up inside the car. When the car reaches this floor, passengers get in and, as detailed before, once the doors are closed they are given a three-second preference over the landing calls, to choose the direction of the travel. If someone presses a button to go further up, the lift will go up even though it has previously registered calls to go down. Control unit operation in descent : passengers will give the down command and the lift will automatically descend and stop at those floors from which the command was given. 4.3.3 Simplex Collective Control Unit in Ascent and Descent With the simplex collective control unit in ascent and descent, the car does not only stop and pick up passengers from the different landings on its way down, just like the previous control unit, but also on its way up. Control unit operation in ascent : as the passengers enter the car and press the buttons that correspond to the floors desired, these commands are registered in the memory of the lift. Once the last person has gone in and the doors have closed, the lift begins to move. It stops successively at those floors requested by the passengers inside the car as well as those floors where passengers at the landing have pressed the “up” button. It will not respond to the calls from landings to go down, even though it does register them in its memory. The lift will respond, however, to the “down” button of the highest floor above the last floor it has been ordered to go up to. Control unit operation in descent : the car picks up all passengers from those floors where the down button has been pressed. As the passengers enter, they press the button for the floor they want to go to, which is registered in the memory. As it descends to the ground floor, the car stops at all those landings requested by the passengers of the car and landings. 4.3.4 Duplex Control Unit Duplex control unit consists in a single control unit for two lifts. There is only one landing control station at each floor and only one car can be called. The nearest car will always come. The operation of the car control station is exactly equal to that of lifts with simplex automatic control unit. Passengers must order their calls, pushing the button for the lowest floor first. Once the car has reached that floor and the passengers have left the lift, the button for the next floor should be pressed, and so on. The passengers in the car should press the buttons corresponding to the floors they want to go to from the lowest to the highest one.

v0.00, JULY 01

Page 36 / 46

MSCM02UK

Lift SCM 02

The passengers at the landings should wait until the red “occupied” sign is no longer lit before calling the lift. The free car will then go to that floor. If both lifts are free, the nearest car will go to the floor from which the call was given. If only one lift is free, once the button has been pressed, it will light up to indicate that the call has been registered and the red “occupied” sign will also light up. If both cars are free, the white call button will light up, but not the “occupied” sign, since one of the lifts is free. 4.3.5 Duplex Collective Control Unit in Descent It is a combination of duplex control unit and simplex collective control unit in descent. It operates in the same way as the collective control unit in descent with regard to the control stations and signals and the way the commands are carried out for the passenger in the car. The difference is that there is a single landing control station at each floor for both lifts. Control unit operation in ascent: as the passengers enter the car they press the buttons that correspond to the desired floors and these commands are registered in the memory of the control unit. Once the last passenger is in and the doors are closed, the car automatically begins to move and it stops successively at the floors requested, starting to move again once the passengers have left and the doors have closed. On its way up, it does not respond to any call to go down from the passengers at the floors, except for those from the highest floor, provided that this floor is above the highest floor requested by the passengers in the car. When the passengers at the highest floor have entered the car, they have three seconds to press a button and choose the direction of the travel. If they press a button to go upwards, the car will ascend, even though calls to go down were previously registered. Control unit operation in descent: if passengers press a button to go down, the lift will descend, stopping automatically at all floors from which the calls were registered (provided that they are lower floors) as well as the floors requested by the passengers in the car. Once the lift has reached the lowest floor requested, it will not respond to calls from lower floors. 4.3.6 Duplex Selective Control Unit in Ascent and Descent It is a combination of duplex control unit and collective control unit in ascent and descent. Control unit operation in ascent: as the passengers enter the car, they press the buttons which correspond to the floors they want to go to. Once the doors are closed, the car automatically begins to move and it stops at all floors requested by the passengers inside the car and at those floors where passengers at the landings have pressed the “up” button. It will not stop at those floors where passengers at the landings have pressed the “down” button, although this will be registered in the memory of the lift for the moment when the lift goes back down. The lift will, however, respond to the “down” button at the highest floor above the last floor requested by the passengers inside the car. Control unit operation in descent: once the lift has responded to all the “up” commands, the car goes to the highest floor registered by a passenger from a landing to go down. Once the passengers have entered the car and their calls have been registered, it begins to go down. It stops at all floors where the “down” button has been pressed. It does not respond to the “up” commands, except for those from the lowest floor requested, provided that this floor is below the last one registered to go down. Anyhow, the distribution of calls and ascents between both lifts takes place according to a program, which depends on its intended use within the building. Now that we have seen how the different control units work, there are certain points to keep in mind regarding the use of the lift: •

Once the lift has finished the travel (either upwards or downwards) the lift will stop at the floor requested (in order to know the floor the lift is at, you only need to look at the number indicated on the display or listen to the floor announcement device). Wait until the doors have opened and exit the car. When the landing door is manual, the user will have to push it open.

•

The lifts have an overload control device. This device will be activated when the load of passengers exceeds 110% of the authorized load. A light will come on and an acoustic signal will sound in the car to indicate an excess of load. When this happens, the lift will not start up again until a sufficient number of passengers get out of the car to lessen the load below the overload level.

•

Passengers should enter and exit the lift as quickly and orderly as possible and should avoid stopping in the doorway. If the lift has a re-opening system (photoelectric cell, etc.), be sure not to remain in its path since this will prevent the car doors from closing.

•

Upon entering and exiting, make sure that your clothes or other objects do not get caught in the door. To ensure that this does not happen, do not stand too close to the door.

•

Should an unexpected situation arise (e.g. the lift stops) the passengers should try to remain calm. If the lift stops unexpectedly, press a floor button, and if the lift does not respond, press the alarm button. If there is no alarm button, press the exterior communication button and wait for a response. If a rescue operation is necessary, wait for instructions as to what to do.

v0.00, JULY 01

Page 37 / 46

MSCM02UK

Lift SCM 02

4.4 Information on the Normal Use of the Lift 4.4.1 Keep the Documentation The person using the lift should be familiar with the instructions for using a lift. These instructions should be kept so that they can be consulted at any time. The detailed instructions to be followed in case the lift stops unexpectedly -and, especially, the instructions that correspond to the manual rescue operation or the electrical rescue operation, as well as the landing door release key- should be kept in the machine room or inside the machine room door. 4.4.2 Situations that Require Professional Intervention Whenever it is necessary to perform a passenger rescue operation or use the emergency door key, professional workers should be called in. These operations should only be performed by properly trained staff. 4.4.3 Entering and Exiting Safely When entering or exiting the car, passengers should remember to be careful not to get clothes, bags, packages, etc. caught in the door. Passengers should enter and exit in an orderly fashion and should not stop in the doorway. If the lift has a re-opening system (photoelectric cell, etc.) be sure not to remain in its path since this will prevent the car doors form closing. The dimensions and weight of the load should not exceed those allowed by the lift. The number of passengers should not exceed that indicated on the sign inside the car. 4.4.4 Lift Accesses Free from Obstacles at The Landings Any possible interference within the access to the lift - a stairway or any other object (e.g. plants, wastepaper bins, etc.)- should be avoided. 4.4.5 Open Shafts If the lift is installed in an open or partially-open shaft, special precautions should be taken to prevent objects from falling into the shaft and to keep out anything that might damage the lift’s moving parts and interfere with its safe operation. 4.4.6 Control Unit Cabinet / Upper Floor There should always be a sign at the entrance to the control unit cabinet indicating “Lift Control Panel - Danger - Authorized personnel Only”. This inscription restricts access to the control unit cabinet; only authorized personnel (for maintenance, verification and passengers rescue operation) can go in using a key. During the inspection, maintenance, rescue, start-up operations, etc., make sure that the machine as well as the bedframe and the car roof are correctly lit. 4.4.7 Description of the Different Control Unit Cabinet Components Upper Part • • • • •

Main switches Protection box Emergency device Inspection box Lighting switches

Lower Part •

Control Panel

For a more detailed description of switches, see chapter on maintenance.

v0.00, JULY 01

Page 38 / 46

MSCM02UK

Lift SCM 02

4.4.8 Use of the Emergency Key As we have said, when a situation requires the intervention of trained personnel, the use of the emergency key is restricted to the trained personnel. The use of the emergency key is described in the rescue operation manual. 4.4.9 Maintenance The owner of the lift, as the person responsible for its use and its safety conditions, should contract a qualified company for the maintenance of the lift. This company should have a book of incidences of the lift, where a record is kept of repairs when important problems or accidents occur or parts are replaced in the lift. This book should be at the disposal of the owner should he request it. When necessary, the owner should request the compulsory inspections and facilitate the access to carry out these checks and tests. If the installation has not been used for a long time, he/she should request the maintenance company to execute a general check-up of the lift. Whenever any user detects a problem in the way the lift operates, the owner should immediately communicate this anomaly to the maintenance company and put up “Out of Order” signs at all lift doors. When the landing doors are being cleaned, special care should be taken so as not to spill or drop any products (liquid or solid) into the lift shaft.

v0.00, JULY 01

Page 39 / 46

MSCM02UK

Lift SCM 02

Chapter 5 • MAINTENANCE

WARNING THE ACCESS TO THE MACHINERY ( MACHINE, BEDFRAME, SPEED GOVERNOR, etc ... ), TAKES PLACE FROM THE LAST FLOOR DOOR, WHERE THE ELECTRIC CABINET IS LOCATED. BEFORE GETTING ACCESS TO THE CAR ROOF, STOP THE MACHINERY FROM AN APPROPRIATE DISTANCE IN ORDER TO LOCK THE DOOR OPERATOR EASILY. UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHOULD THE CABINET BE LEFT OPEN WITHOUT SURVEILLANCE. THE CAR ROOF IS DESIGNED TO BEAR THE LOAD OF TWO PEOPLE DURING THE MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS.

5.1 Description of Components R S T N t

Protection panel : FF . . QF . . FA . . QAC QAH QASM TC . . SAH . SAC .

. . . . .

. . . . . . .. .. ..

. . . . . . . . .

power differential. power magnetothermic. lighting differential. car lighting magnetothermic. shaft lighting magnetothermic. machine room lighting magnetothermic. earth connection. shaft lighting switch. car lighting switch.

Machine panel :

R S T

FANOX

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

control unit transformer. level led relay. rated speed relay. revision relay. safety series relay. direction relay. brake relay. speed governor operation pushbutton. speed governor reset pushbutton. temperature probe. brake rectifying plate. thermal probe. condenser. frequency changer. contactors. output filter. level led battery. speed governor operation fuse. speed governor reset fuse. level led fuse. VK2P load weighing device supply fuse.

S T

BTST

TRM . . . KRL . . . KRNS . . KRREV . KSG . . . KRSE . . KRFR . . SLV . . . SRLV . . BTST . . GRF . . . TS . . . . COND . 3VFMAC K1, K2 . FS . . . . BAT . . . F1 . . . . F2 . . . . F3 . . . . F4 . . . .

211C

212C

211H

212H

LV1

LV2

205

206

204

210

212

U V W t

BAT

v0.00, JULY 01

Page 40 / 46

MSCM02UK

Lift SCM 02

5.2 Lift Shaft The following checks and tests should be carried out during the lift shaft maintenance inspections. In order to communicate with the outside, the maintenance personnel should always have a telephone susceptible of connection to any of the existing telephone coupling boxes when these checks and tests are being carried out inside the shaft. Use a ladder -it hangs at one of the pit walls- to get into the pit. 1.

Check that there are no water leaks in the pit or combustible substances that might cause a malfunction of the lift. Ensure that the pit is clean, dry and free from waste.

2.

The lift shaft and pit should have enough artificial lighting to perform this inspection properly: check that the system works.

3.

Check that the revision pushbutton panel (car roof) woks properly and that the lift does not respond to calls either from the floors or from the inside of the car when the revision control device is on.

4.

IMPORTANT : The ladder to get into the pit should be put back into its place, one of the pit side walls, after the maintenance operations.

5.3 Guides The following checks and tests should be carried out during the guides maintenance inspections. 1.

Check the condition of the car and counterweight guides and their fixture. Check any possible dbg variation.

2.

If the lift has automatic greasers on the car and counterweight, check the oil level, and refill if necessary. If the lift does not have an automatic greaser, it is advisable to grease the guides every two or three months, depending on how much the lift is used. Use the appropriate lubricant for each type of material. Excessive lubrication can be as detrimental as not enough lubrication

5.4 Landing Doors The following checks and tests should be carried out during the lift landing doors maintenance inspections. 1.

Check the correct operation of the circuit in all the doors. Should only one of the contacts of the circuit fail, the lift will not work. With automatic doors, in order to check this, cause the malfunction by actuating the lock.

2.

Ensure that the mechanical interlock of the door woks properly. To do so, try to slide the door sideways: the door should not move.

v0.00, JULY 01

Page 41 / 46

MSCM02UK

Lift SCM 02

3.

With automatic doors, both in commissioning and in periodic inspections, check that the unlatching parts of the mechanical interlock do not interfere with each other or overlap. Likewise, make sure that the door does not come unlatched due to door panel displacement. Also check that the 9-mm distance is not exceeded, as shown in the diagram.

(*) 9

Interlock in closed position and safety electric contact established

4

Interlock Cam Slide Closing Zone

MAX. 2

Rear view of the mechanical interlock cam slide (*)

4.

Minimum distance, 9mm. For this distance, only measure the straight surface from the end of the curve.

The following should all be checked during the periodic inspections: the interlock; sensitivity of the door when a passenger is either hit or about to be hit by the closing door; that the lift does not start when the door is open; the wear of the slide shoes; the contacts; the door suspension carriage rollers; etc. If necessary, the different components should be cleaned, adjusted or replaced (see landing doors assembly dossier).

5.5 Ropes The following checks and tests should be carried out during the commissioning and maintenance inspections of the traction ropes and rope hitches. 1.

Upon commissioning as well as in periodic inspections, check the condition of the ropes in their entirety. For that purpose, count the broken wires. A broken cord or its equivalent in wires, in a one-metre length of rope, requires that all the ropes be replaced. In order to find fractured threads, pass a cotton rag along the rope. Threads fractured due to wear (abrasion) must be detected visually.

2.

Check the condition of the counterweight and car rope hitches; in particular, check that the nuts of the rope hitches are securely fastened.

3.

Check the lubrication of the ropes. Make sure that the grease on the rope does not impede its inspection.

v0.00, JULY 01

Page 42 / 46

MSCM02UK

Lift SCM 02

5.5.1 Procedure for Replacing the Ropes a)

Lock the car in the lower locking support, and at the same time, hung the counterweight in the upper part of the shaft, without exceeding the maximum load allowed for the hooks located in the clear overhead.

b)

Put additional security slings in both frames.

c)

In car frames, change the ropes from the pit and in counterweight frames and machine use the assembly scaffolds located on the last floor.

5.6 Machine and Bedframe The following checks and tests should be carried out during the commissioning and maintenance inspections of the machine, bedframe and mechanical brake (see Use and Maintenance Dossier of the Machine Sassi Leo). 1.

Check the screws and fixtures of the machine-bedframe set are correctly fastened.

2.

Check the condition of the rope holding system and the pulley protection set.

3.

During the periodic revisions, check that the machine is clean, paying special attention to the ventilation fan and the electric components.

4.

The disc brake of the machine does not need to be adjusted. It is supplied set up and callipered. Should any adjustment be necessary, see the specific instructions for this device.

5.6.1 Procedure for Replacing the Machine a) b) c) d) e) f) g) h)

Lock the car in the upper locking support, and at the same time, hung the counterweight in the lower part of the shaft, without exceeding the maximum load allowed for the hooks located in the clear overhead. Put additional security slings in both frames. Disassemble the rope holding system and the traction pulley protection. One by one, get the ropes out of the traction pulley and rest them on the security sling. Disconnect the machine electric installation and disassemble the emergency system. Change the machine locating it suspended from the elevation system before disassembling the four fixing screws, trying not to exceed the maximum load permitted for the hooks located in the clear overhead. Get the machine out of the shaft being careful not to rest it on the car roof. In order to assemble the new machine, execute the inverse procedure.

v0.00, JULY 01

Page 43 / 46

MSCM02UK

Lift SCM 02

5.6.2 Procedure for Replacing the Pulley a) b) c) d) e) f) g)

Lock the car in the upper locking support, and at the same time, hung the counterweight in the lower part of the shaft, without exceeding the maximum load allowed for the hooks located in the clear overhead. Put additional security slings in both frames. Disassemble the rope holding system and the traction pulley protection. Mark each one of the ropes with its present position in the traction pulley, so as to prevent them from crossing or entangling with each other when putting them back in their position. One by one, get the ropes out of the traction pulley and rest them on the security sling. Change the pulley. Introduce the ropes back into the pulley.

5.7 Speed Governor The following checks and tests should be carried out during the commissioning and maintenance inspections of the speed governor (see the installation and assembly dossier of the speed governor). 1. 2. 3. 4.

5. 6.

Ensure that the speed governor functions reliably and safely. The bearings should be checked and lubricated every year. Check that the rope of the tension pulley remains tense and the slack rope switch works properly. Check that there is no excessive lengthening of the governor rope, which might trigger the safety contact in the tension pulley. If there is, shorten the rope. Make sure that the threads of the governor rope are not damaged. If they are, replace the rope. You can check their condition by observing if there is a fractured cord or its wire equivalent, in one metre of rope. In order to detect fractured cords or threads, pass a cotton rag along the rope. Occasionally, there may be threads fractured because of wear (abrasion), which must be detected visually. Check frequently and safely that the overspeed contact (governor contact) works properly. Check the rope hitches and the pulley grooves. Clean any strange particles from them to ensure the correct operation of the speed governor.

5.8 Buffers The following checks and tests should be carried out during the maintenance inspections of the buffers. 1.

Ensure that there are buffers and check their state (see the dossier for maintenance, installation and use of the buffers).

5.9 Alarm Device and Emergency Stop The following checks and tests should be carried out during the maintenance inspections of the alarm device. 1. 2. 3.

Check that it works and it can be heard from the outside of the lift shaft by the people responsible for the emergency operations. Ensure that all the stop switches (pit, car roof and revision pushbutton panels) work properly. Make sure that all the lift systems for alarm, emergency and rescue operations work properly (emergency lights, telephone, etc ...).

5.10 Rescue System 5.10.1 Checks and Tests To Be Carried Out During the Maintenance Inspections of the Rescue System 1.

Check the correct operation and condition of the engaging system with the machine shaft and brake opening from the rescue panel. Check the towrope stretching (see the Installation and Adjustment Dossier of the Car Rescue System).

5.10.2 Checks and Tests on the Car and Access to the Car 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

Check the general condition of the car and its frame. Ensure that the car is permanently lit. Check that the stop switch at the car roof works properly. The distance between the car door and the landing door must not exceed 20 millimetres, except for simultaneous automatic doors, where it can be up to 30 millimetres. Make sure that the car and landing doors have toe guards. Check that the lift does not start if the car door is open and that, once started, it stops when the door opens, except in the case of automatic doors with stop levelling device, where the levelling may take place while the door is opening. Check that the car door opens freely and that it is sensitive to obstacles. Check the car door contact closing.

v0.00, JULY 01

Page 44 / 46

MSCM02UK

Lift SCM 02

9. 10. 11. 12.

Ensure that the panels slide correctly and check the state of the guide shoes. If they are worn, replace them. Check that there is a load plate inside the car. Make sure that the landing and car pushbuttons (floor selection, open doors) work correctly. Check the correct operation of the two-way communication device (car - outside).

5.11 Counterweight 5.11.1 Checks and Tests on the Counterweight 1. 2.

Check the state of the counterweight frame, especially the nuts, locknuts, guide shoe supports, etc. Check the rope clamps, nuts, locknuts and safety pins of the rope sockets or tighteners.

5.12 Guide Shoes 1. 2.

Guide shoes should be replaced one by one, not simultaneously. When removing the old guide shoes, be careful not to move the frame too much, so that the new ones can be introduced easily.

5.13 Safety Gear 5.13.1 Checks and Tests on the Safety Gear 1. 2.

Check the condition of the wedge boxes and ensure there are no strange elements inside. Check that the safety gear or wedge box are free of corrosion (see the installation and assembly dossier of wedge boxes).

5.14 Batteries 1.

Check the good condition of the batteries and emergency batteries of the installation and make sure they have enough electric charge.

5.15 Load Weighing Device 5.15.1 Checks and Tests on the Load Weighing Device (see the installation dossier of the load weighing device). 5.16 Safety Electric Circuits (see the dossier for preassembled electrical installations). 5.16.1 Checks and Tests on the Safety Electric Circuits 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Check that the ground wires that join the door frames, locks, motor casing and controller box are in good condition and are connected to the earth or to metal guides. Check that a grounding of the safety circuit conductors causes the lift to stop. Check the good working order of all safety devices. Make sure that they cause the lift to stop completely. If any, ensure that the electric rescue systems work properly. If necessary, check currents and voltages.

5.17 Signalling and Control Units (see the dossier for preassembled electrical installations). 5.17.1

Checks and Tests on the Signalling or Control Units Affecting Safety 1. 2. 3.

4. 5.

In the case of closed shafts with blind, non-automatic landing doors, there should be a light to indicate that the car is on the other side of the door. Make sure that this light works at every floor. Check that the delay works, so that priority is given to calls from inside the car over calls from the floors. The final safety stop at the end of the travel should be caused by final limit switches other than those causing the normal stop at the upper and lower floors. Ensure that they work properly and that the car fits in the guides in such a way that its movement is not hindered. Check the car is properly levelled at all floors, both empty and with full load. Check the condition of relays and contactors, and how they react if a phase fails or if phases are reversed. Should the control unit have a fault storage device, check the last faults registered.

v0.00, JULY 01

Page 45 / 46

MSCM02UK

Lift SCM 02

5.18 Electric Cabinet 5.18.1 Checks and Tests on the Electric Cabinet 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

The electric cabinet should have electric lighting and a safety switch to stop the lift during inspection. Make sure it works properly. Check the main switch, contactors, relays, fuses and the level of artificial lighting. Check that the access to the cabinet is safe. Check the condition of the cabinet locks and make sure it is possible to close it without a key. After every inspection leave the access to the electric cabinet free.

v0.00, JULY 01

Page 46 / 46

MSCM02UK

MP SPAIN

BRANCH OFFICES IN SPAIN

AFFILIATED COMPANIES

HEAD OFFICES Pabellón MP C/ Leonardo Da Vinci, TA 13 Isla de la Cartuja - 41092 Sevilla Tel. + 34.954.63.05.62 Fax. +34 954 65.79.55 e-mail: [email protected] Contact: Sr. Antonio García de Alvear

MP BARCELONA Contact : Sr. Daniel Rodriguez e - mail : [email protected] Tel. : + 34 93 7317333 Fax : + 34 93 7310838 Address : Pol. Can Parellada, c\ Colón 485, nave 10 / 08228 Les Fonts de Terrassa . Barcelona

MP AUSTRIA Contact : Sr. Alvaro Rein e - mail : [email protected] Tel. : + 43 - 2236 - 865626 Fax : + 43 - 2236 - 86562620 Address : Triesterstrasse, 14 2351 Wiener Neudorf, Austria Web : www.mp-deutschland.de

FACTORIES IN SEVILLE ELECTRONIC and MECHANIC Pol. Ind. Navisa, C/E 41006 Sevilla Tel. +34.954 93 28 40 Fax. +34.954 92 58 32

MP BILBAO Contact : Sr. Octavio Pérez e - mail : [email protected] Tel. : + 34 94 6313585 Fax : + 34 94 6313529 Address : Pol. San Lorenzo, Pabellón 5 48390 Bedía Vizcaya

MP CZECH Contact : Sr. Pavel Dvorsky e - mail : [email protected] Tel. : + 420 2 6721 9303 Fax : + 420 2 7175 0659 Address : Pražská 18 102 00 Praha 10 República Checa

MP UK Contact e - mail Tel. Fax Address

HYDRAULIC Pol. Ind. El Pino, Parcela 16, nº1-3 41016 Sevilla Tel. +34.954 52 72 28 Fax. +34 954 25 89 59

MP MADRID Contact : Sr. Enrique Fuentes e - mail : [email protected] Tel. : + 34 91 3294943 Fax : + 34 91 3293719 Address : Pol. Fin de Semana c\ Gumersindo Llorente nº 62 28022 - Madrid

MP GERMANY GMBH Contact : Sr. Peter Erdmann e - mail : [email protected] Tel. : + 49 30 6606100 Fax : + 49 30 66061060 Address : Krokusstrasse 9, 12357 - Berlín Alemania Web : www.mp-deutschland.de

MP ARGENTINA Contact : Sr. Abraham Lera e - mail : [email protected] Tel. : + 54 11 43011283 Fax : + 54 11 43032321 Address : San Antonio, 1111/15/19 1276 Capital Federal Buenos Aires, Argentina

DOORS Pol. Ind. Alcalá 10 Ctra. Sevilla - Málaga km 6,3 41500 Alcalá de Guadaira Tel. +34.955 63 58 30 Fax. +34.955 63 16 19

MP VALENCIA Contact : Sr. Pablo Montes e - mail : [email protected] Tel. : + 34 96 1272540 Fax : + 34 96 1272528 Address : Pol. Nº 1 de Catarroja c\ Proyecto 32, nave 2C 46470 Catarroja - Valencia

MP FRANCE Contact : Sr. Xavier Malssigne e - mail : [email protected] Tel. : + 01 41 474230 Fax : + 01 41 470488 Address : 94 Avenue du Vieux Chemin Saint Dennis / Site Artisanal, 92230 Gennevilliers - Francia

MP BRAZIL Contact : Sr. Paulo Pimentel e - mail : [email protected] Tel. : + 55 11 58903338 / 58911245 Fax : + 5511 58903308 Address : Av. Guido Caloi, 1985, G-8 CEP 05802 140 . Capela do Socorro Sao Paulo, SP - Brasil

FACTORIES IN ZARAGOZA LOGÍSTICA Pol. Ind. El Aguila Autovía de Logroño km 13,4 - naves 14 - 20 50180 Utebo - Zaragoza Tel. +34. 976 78 82 61 Fax. +34. 976 78 81 53 e-mail: [email protected] Contact: Sr. Santiago Royo

MP GREECE Contact : Sr. J. Antonio R. Toquero e - mail : [email protected] Tel. : + 30 1 2840155 Fax : + 30 1 2845183 Address : 461, Irakliou Ave. 14122 N. Irakliou, Atenas Grecia

MP CHILE Contact : Sr. Patricio Mora e - mail : [email protected] Tel. : + 56 2 3611982 / 83 Fax : + 56 2 3611984 Address : Edificio Puerto 1 Local 3 San Francisco 251 Santiago (Centro) - Chile

ESPECIAL LIFT Pol. Malpica Alfindén, C/H, nº 21 - 23 50171 La Puebla de Alfindén - Zaragoza Tel. +34.976 10 77 60 Fax. +34.976 10 71 24

MP ITALY Contact : Sr. Alberto Sordi e - mail : [email protected] Tel. : + 39 039 792100 + 39 039 792154 Fax : + 39 039 791912 Address : Via Lodi 1 Muggio, Milan, Italia

MP CHINA Contact : Sr. Shan Yue e - mail : [email protected] Tel. : + 8610 65915851 Fax : + 8610 65915852 Address : N.1003, The Gateway Building 10, Yabao Road, Chaoyang District 100020 Beijing - China

MP HOLLAND Contact : Sr. Rowan Lebbink e - mail : [email protected] Tel. : + 31 227 600 400 Fax : + 31 227 600 090 Address : De Stek 8b 1771 SP WIERINGERWERF Holanda

MP THAILAND Contact : Sr. Eric Tanguy e - mail : [email protected] Tel. : + 66 2 6530805 - 6 Fax : + 66 2 6530807 Address : Suite 1912, level 19, 140 One Pacific Place Bldg., Sukhumvit Road . Klongtoey 10110 Bangkok - Tailandia

MP POLAND Contact : Sr. Wieslaw Mielcarski e - mail : [email protected] Tel. : + 48 61 8475611 Fax : + 48 61 8478249 Address : 60 - 536 Poznan ul. Koscielna 19 Polonia

MP TURKIA Contact : Sr. Patricio Mora e - mail : [email protected] Tel. : + 56 2 3611982 / 83 Fax : + 56 2 3611984 Address : Edificio Puerto 1 Local 3 San Francisco 251 Santiago (Centro) - Chile

MP PORTUGAL (OPORTO) Contact : Sr. José Guerra e - mail : [email protected] Tel. : + 351 2 7117971 Fax : + 351 2 7120949 Address : Rua das Lasge, 166 Z. Ind. San Caetano, Valadares Oporto - Portugal

MP SOUTH AFRICA Contact : Sr. Tony Barbosa e - mail : Tel. : + 271 2 3253234 Fax : + 271 2 3256266 Address : 28 Visagie Street, Guaranty House 2ª planta, Pretoria Central República Sudafrica

MP PORTUGAL (LISBOA) Contact : Sr. José Guerra e - mail : Tel. : + 351 1 4843078 Fax : + 351 1 4843087 Address : Bairro 16 Novembro, lote 50 1ª sq Tires 2775 Parede, Portugal

: Sr. Gary Giltbertson : [email protected] : + 44 0 2084660810 : + 44 0 2084660737 : 13/14 Chartwell Business Centre The Avenue Bromley Kent BR 1 2BS

MP AUSTRALIA Contact : Sr. Mark Barter e - mail : [email protected] Tel. : + 612 99600016 Fax : + 612 99393247 Address : Going up lifts.Pty Limited 17, level 1 Bridgepoint, Brady Street Mosman, 2088 Sidney - New South Wales, Australia

Mechanical rescue system LRM-101/A4 (for SCM-02 and SCM-07)

Technical dossier v2.02, NOV. 02 English / RMA4SCMUk

Installation - Assembly - Commissioning Use - Maintenance - Repair

TECHNICAL DOSSIER Mechanical rescue system A4 for SCM

INDEX 0. SAFETY MEASURES

1. COMPONENTS DESCRIPTION

2. RESCUE SYSTEM INSTALLATION

3. RESCUE SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT

4. RESCUE SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

5. SYSTEM FEATURES AND USE MANUAL: Passenger Rescue Operation

v2.02, NOV. 02

Pag . 2 /10

RMA4SCMUk


0. SAFETY MEASURES

ASSEMBLY MUST BE PERFORMED BY TWO OPERATORS

Obligatory protection of the head

Obligatory protection of feet

Obligatory protection of hands

EXECUTE ALL OPERATIONS OF THIS DOSSIER WITH THE CAR ABOVE, FROM THE CAR ROOF AND WITH THE COUNTERWEIGHT NEXT TO THE BUFFERS..

DO NOT LOAD THE CAR EXCESSIVELY DURING THE INSTALLATION PROCESS AND SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT.

v2.02, NOV. 02

Pag . 3 /10

RMA4SCMUk


1. COMPONENTS DESCRIPTION: The mechanical rescue system A4 for SASSI LEO MACHINE

is composed of the

following parts:

A) MACHINE SUB-ASSEMBLY It is the four-column part. It is placed on the machine, once the rescue pinion, the machine safety contact and the encoder are installed on its support.

B) CABINET SUB-ASSEMBLY It is the component fixed to the upper compartment of the electric cabinet using four screws.

C) FLEXIBLE ROPE + SHEATH It connects the Machine Sub-assembly to the Cabinet Sub-assembly. It transmits the turning torque from the controller to the machine.

D)

METAL BRAKE FLEXIBLE CABLE It connects the Machine Sub-assembly to the Cabinet Sub-assembly. Used to release the brake and operate on the clutch at the same time.

v2.02, NOV. 02

Pag . 4 /10

RMA4SCMUk


2. RESCUE SYSTEM INSTALLATION 2.0) PREREQUISITE: The rescue pinion, the encoder and the safety contact (supplied together with the machine) should be correctly assembled on its support. See Pre-assembled Electrical Installation Dossier.

2.1) INTRODUCE the Cabinet Subassembly from the inside part of the shaft and fix using four side screws.

2.2) ASSEMBLE the Machine Sub-assembly on the machine, and fix through the threaded columns in the housings of the blue screws of the machine body. NOTE: Loose the nuts of union between the sheet of the rescue and the columns, and tighten them after ensuring that the square shaft slides and enters correctly in the rescue piñón of rescue.

NOTE: Fix the hoops in order to lift the machine, under the columns of a lower length.

v2.02, NOV. 02

Pag . 5 /10

RMA4SCMUk


Fix the square piece supplied to the brake bar of the machine, as shown in the picture. –>

NOTE: CHECK that the machine brake opens when pushing the lever DOWNWARDS. Otherwise, please contact MP After-Sales Department (To receive instructions on how to change the tripping direction).

<– 2.3) CONNECT the horizontal lever of the Cabinet sub-assembly and the Machine Sub-assembly levers to the metal brake flexible cable. The plastic sheath of the brake flexible cable is installed between the rear part of the cabinet and the Z-piece of the Machine Sub-assembly. The set-pin is fixed at the end of the brake flexible cable on the machine side.

2.4) CONNECT both sub-assemblies to the metal flexible shaft and its sheath, inserting the square ends into the pinions.. (In the extreme of machine: In the “right hand” setting, the cable is connected in the opposite side to the brake, and in the "left hand” setting, in the same side; the Machine Sub-assembly already comes assembled from factory according to the adequate setting)

v2.02, NOV. 02

Pag . 6 /10

RMA4SCMUk


NOTE: For a better operation of the flexible shaft, fix it, by means of the plastic band supplied, to the angular piece of the machine bedframe

3) RESCUE SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT 3.1) THE CABINET Adjust the position of the support plate of the wheel in relation to the wheel extension piece bushing. To do that, move the wheel while tightening screws and nuts and check the movement. 3.2) THE MACHINE Adjust the position of the Machine Sub-assembly plate (relieving and tightening columns) so that the square shaft placed in the rescue pinion moves freely. Adjust the levers: a) Place the machine trigger lever at 108 mm, between the brake flexible cable set-pin base and the brake flexible cable Z-support. See figure (NOTE: brake flexible cable Z- support should not be in contact with the machine, as to avoid vibrations). b) Self-locking nut of the threaded rod triggering the brake bar on the machine should be fixed at 5 mm of its actuation point. See figure.

v2.02, NOV. 02

Pag . 7 /10

RMA4SCMUk


c) Using the upper threaded rod nuts, place the pinion trigger lever (upper lever), in such a way that the notched wheel of the pinion (Z=23) is 3 mm from the gear int egral to the machine (Z=62).

Adjust the position of the machine contact on its support in height and depth (using the thread), in such a way that the pinion operates on the contact when moving downwards:

v2.02, NOV. 02

Pag . 8 /10

RMA4SCMUk


4) RESCUE SYSTEM MAINTENANCE During the periodic revisions of the lift: - Check the wheel moves easily. - Check the brake flexible cable is correctly tightened. - Ensure that dimensions and distances are respected regarding point 3, especially after executing a passenger rescue operation. - Ensure that all the system springs are in good condition.

5) SYSTEM FEATURES AND USE MANUAL: Passenger Rescue Operation The mechanical rescue system of the SCM-02 lift is capable of moving the car manually (using the wheel placed in the controller) in both directions, regardless of the load: Bidirectional System. (Provided that load does not exceed 125% of the rated load) In case of compensated load (car load equal to half the rated load) the force necessary to move the car in any direction will be similar. When the load in the lift is unbalanced, it will be easier to move the wheel in any direction. It is recommended to execute the rescue operation, moving the car in the most favourable direction (should that be possible), since too much effort will not be necessary and the time employed will be reduced. WARNING: In some cases, it may not be necessary to make an effort on the wheel to move the car; hold the wheel and release slowly, as to prevent the car overspeed. The system operates as follows: When pushing the wheel, the lever system of the Machine Sub-assembly operates and makes the rescue pinion to descend, opening the machine safety contact, and then, another lever of the mechanism opens the brake. From that moment, you control the car movement through the wheel. If you release the wheel, the system springs (in the cabinet, Machine Sub-assembly, pinion and the machine brake itself) make the system go back to its initial position. NOTES: 1) When pushing the wheel, if you observe it is difficult to take it to the end, the rescue pinion may not be lowering, possibly because its teeth interfere with that of the machine notched wheel. In this case, move the wheel slightly in both directions, while pushing it. 2) Due to the regenerative forces between the pinion and the machine notched wheel, they may be geared momentarily, even though the brake is released. If you move the wheel slightly once it is completely out, the pinion goes back to its original position. It is convenient to grease the rescue pinion of the machine.

v2.02, NOV. 02

Pag . 9 /10

RMA4SCMUk


PROCEDURE FOR A PASSENGERS RESCUE OPERATION: 1. Contact the lift technician. SAFETY DEVICES should always remain ACTIVE. 2. TURN OFF THE MAIN SWITCH OF THE LIFT in the upper compartment of the electric cabinet, next to the lift door on the last floor. 3. CHECK TO SEE THE POSITION OF THE CAR. TRY TO CALM TRAPPED PASSENGERS DOWN and inform them that the rescue operation is going to take place and the car will move. Tell them no to try to open the doors or leave the car until they are told to do so safely. 4. CHECK THAT ALL LANDING DOORS ARE CLOSED AND BLOCKED AND CAR DOORS ARE CLOSED. Put up an “OUT OF ORDER” sign at each entrance. 5. LOCATE THE WHEEL WHICH IS UNASSEMBLED INSIDE THE CABINET AND SCREW. 6. RELEASE THE MACHINE BRAKE, PUSHING THE LEVER VERY SLOWLY and move it to turn the pulley manually.

WARNING: It may be necessary to turn the wheel slightly in both directions, while pushed, so that the system completely gears. The wheel should be pushed to the end.

WARNING : The car may go up or down by itself; in the event of car overspeed,take the wheel out immediately. If the car is blocked by the safety gear operation, or if it does not move, contact a qualified technician.

7. RELEASE THE BRAKE ONCE THE POSITION IS REACHED. THE CAR SHOULD REMAIN WITHIN THE INTERLOCK AREA; the level LED, installed in the upper compartment, lights up when the car is at floor level. When releasing the brake, once the position is reached, move the wheel in both directions and make sure it does turn freely. 8.

UNLOCK AND OPEN LANDING DOORS USING THE EMERGENCY KEY to free the passengers. (Only trained staff familiar with

the rescue procedure are authorised to use this key). 8.1 LOCATE THE DOOR RELEASE TRIANGLE AT THE DOOR FRAME. All doors have a door release triangle. In the case of MACPUARSA doors, it is located at the door lintel. 8.2 INSERT THE KEY INTO THE TRIANGLE, to engage the mechanism. TURN THE KEY IN THE APPROPRIATE DIRECTION TO RELEASE THE DOOR and OPEN THE DOOR by pressing the door edge manually. 8.3 Once the landing door is open, THE CAR DOOR IS NO LONGER BLOCKED and it can be opened manually without the key. WARNING: If the car is not exactly at floor level, pay special attention to protect the passengers when leaving the car. 9. Once the passengers are out, make sure that ALL DOORS ARE CLOSED AND CORRECTLY BLOCKED. LEAVE ALL DEVICES AND RESCUE SYSTEM OPERATIONS BACK TO THEIR INITIAL POSITION. 10. WARN THE TECHNICAL DEPARTMENT so that the lift is checked before it is restarted .

WARNING: The lift should not have power supply until the assistance of the technical department.

C v2.02, NOV. 02

Pag . 10 /10

RMA4SCMUk

PRODUCT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS PLATE

TWO-PANEL CENTRAL-OPENING 3VF REVECO II OPERATOR

GENERAL DESCRIPTION 2-panel central-opening car door operator, supplied with 230 Vac single-phase voltage. It is controlled by an electronic system enabling speed regulation through 3VF frequency variation/voltage variation. Reading of door speed, position and direction of movement is carried out through double pulse encoder, integrated with the electronic circuit. There are no positioning microswitches. Views of the operator

Noteworthy innovations: • • • • • • • •

Considerable reduction in operator noise level. Elimination of vibrations and electrical noises thanks to the new VVVF control. Adjustment of braking ramps and sensitivity by potentiometers. Wide door thrust and energy range adjustment. Infra-red communication using IRDA port. Greater operational robustness (supports anomalous situations in extreme operating conditions in temperatures up to 85º and voltages up to 260 V AC). Complies with future standards for electromagnetic compatibility for the lift sector (prEN 12015:2001 and prEN 12016:2001). Temperature detecting device to protect the motor from overheating.

V0.00,ENE.04

FTORIIC23VFUK

1/5



TWO-PANEL CENTRAL-OPENING 3VF REVECO II AUTOMATIC CAR DOOR Fixing distances from operator to car roof

GUIDE PLATE

2 GREEN ALIGNMENT POINT AXIS

CAR DOOR B

LINTEL

CAR JAMB

5

2156

DIMENSION A

STANDARD PANEL HEIGHT 2010

SILL

CLEAR ENTRANCE HEIGHT 2000

PANEL

TOTAL HEIGHT 2460

GREEN ALIGNMENT POINT OF THE OPERATOR

~

STANDARD CAR HEIGHT 2200

~

Installation of the operator on the car roof: 1. Horizontal regulation: • The green alignment point must be centred with car jamb and with the door suspension green point (Landing door). • Keep a 5 mm distance between panels, and between panels and car jamb with the door open. In MP cars install the operator at a distance of 2 mm, from the car roof rim. S In cars not manufactured by MP, the distance of 2 mm must be modified in relation with car door jamb width.

CLEAR ENTRANCE LANDING DOOR PLATE

2. Vertical regulation: • The operator is supplied already adjusted for standard MP cars, with an operator fastening height of 2200 mm, maintaining the distance of 2156±5 mm between the green alignment point of the operator and the top of the door track. S In cars with a standard door height of 2010 and other fastening heights different to 2200, adjust the height of the operator brackets, to maintain the distance of 2156±5 mm. S In cars with door heights over 2010, increase the distance of 2156 depending on the increase in door height. NOTE: RESPECT THE LINTEL DIMENSIONS AS TO AVOID INTERFERENCES IN THE OPERATOR. • In cars not manufactured by MP, it is necessary to keep the relation between the operator fixation height (2200 mm, in standard MP car) and lintel maximum measures (2160 mm height, and 21 mm wide in the 115 mm upper side), also the relation between the jamb width (37 mm in MP cars) and the distance from the car roof rim (2 mm).

DIMENSIONS (mm) : Model OR2C2XXX Clear Version Plate Guide Motor Dim. Entrance XXX A (1)

(1) (2) (3)

POSITIONS FOR FIXING SET SQUARES

DOOR WEIGHT (Kg)

(2)

B F1

F2

F3

PANELS

SILL

Operator

PACKING Dimensions (mm)

+ Panels +Panels Standard Optional (e=1 mm) (e=1.2 mm)

(3)

070

700

1310

1410

78

1460

48

560

700

850

380

1425

35

59

62

1430x370x610

080

800

1450

1610

78

1660

59

660

800

950

430

1625

39

65

68

1800x370x610

090

900

1600

1810

78

1860

74

760

900

1050

480

1825

42

75

79

2300x370x610

100

1000

1700

2010

78

2060

74

860

1000

1150

530

2025

43

78

82

2300x370x610

Dimension A is the distance between the ends of both sides (guide ends or open car panels, depending on the case). Values in shaded boxes correspond to the position of set squares, which is pre-defined at the factory. Packing dimensions (length x width x height). Packed product weight: add 4 kg to the operator weight. V0.00,ENE.04

FTORIIC23VFUK

2/5



Electric connection scheme: Bank of microswitches

Infrared receiver

Potentiometers

Group of Leds

LED No. 1

SERIAL PORT FOR FIRMWARE PROGRAMMING

SWITCH

LED No.1

T01,T02 (White wires): PROTECTION THERMO-SWITCH (NC)

F1

BOX INTERNAL SIDE

OB2 OBX

V1

V2

M3

T01 T02

FUSES (F1,F2) 2A

F2

MOTOR

230 V TO2 W

P5 CONFIGURATION OF MODE “ PRESENCE OF OBSTACLE” RELAY (NC/NO)

U V W

P2

U TO1 V

SWITCH CONNECTION

C1

C2

C3

C4

N.O.N.C.

MODEL OF DOOR

MOTOR PHASES

T2H/T3H (RIGHT)

U= GREY V= BROWN W= BLACK

T2H/T3H (LEFT) C2H/C4H

U= BROWN V= GREY W= BLACK

P12 SCC DOOR SAFETY SERIES CONTACT CONNECTION (TO CONTROL UNIT) OB2 OBX V1 V2

C1 C2 C3 C4 (*) (*)

BLUE

RED

SUPPLY 230 Vac ± 10%

C1-C2 AND C3-C4: OPEN/CLOSE SIGNAL, ACCORDING TO OPERATING MODE TABLE: A,B,...... (*) C3 AND C4 ONLY WILL BE WIRED UP WHEN OPERATING LIKE MODE: B OB2- OBX: DOOR OPENING CONTACTS 30Vdc,4 A/250 Vac, 2 A

223-CR3

GREEN-YELLOW

222-CR3

BLACK

GREEN

ORANGE 0Vp-CR3

221-CR3

V1-V2:

(**) INSERT CONTACTS GIVING DOOR OPENING COMMAND (example: photocell)

PAP

2-CR2

PAP2-CR2

GREEN

BROWN 106-CR2

MP INSPECTION BOX

105-CR2

BROWN

(**)

(FOT)

GENERAL ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION MP ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION

223-CR3

222-CC3

0Vp-CC3

221-CC3

+24 Vdc

2-CC2

106-CH2

105-CH2

SCC: CONNECTOR FOR SAFETY CONTACT (door series) MP CONTROL UNIT

OPENING AND CLOSING OPERATING MODE MODE

Connections: C1,C2

Connections: C3,C4

MODE: A(1)

CAM SIGNAL: OPEN DOOR .............................. (C1-C2)= 0 Vac/Vdc CLOSE DOOR ............................ (C1-C2)= 48 ÷ 220 Vac/Vdc

MODE: B(2)

OPEN DOOR....................... CLOSE DOOR..................... LOW CLOSING SPEED......... NO MOVEMENT OF DOOR....

C

RESERVED

D

RESERVED

NOTES:

(C1,C2)= (C1,C2)= (C1,C2)= (C1,C2)=

0 Vac 48 ÷ 220 Vac 48 ÷ 220 Vac 0 Vac

/ / / /

Vdc........ Vdc ....... Vdc........ Vdc........

ADDITIONAL SIGN : LOW CLOSING SPEED = 48 ÷220 (NO DETECTION OF OBSTACLE) and and and and

(C3,C4)= (C3,C4)= (C3,C4)= (C3,C4)=

48 ÷ 220 0 48 ÷ 220 0

Vac / Vdc.

Vac / Vdc Vac / Vdc Vac / Vdc Vac/Vdc

(1) FACTORY-DEFINED OPERATING MODE (2) FACTORY OPERATING MODE WHEN MP ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION IS MBII (3) FOR CHANGING THE OPERATING MODE USE TERMINAL PDA (INFRARED)

V0.00,ENE.04

FTORIIC23VFUK

3/5



CONFIGURATION POSSIBILITIES: (Clear entrance, type of landing door, opening and closing speed, sensitivity to obstacles). Adhesive label for the identification of the operator controls and display of controls: MICROINTERRUPTORES /

1 2

ON: PUERTA DE RELLANO SEMIAUTOMÁTICA /

3

ON: VELOCIDAD APERTURA LENTA /

4

ON: VELOCIDAD CIERRE LENTA /

OFF: OPERACIÓN NORMAL /

SEMI-AUTOMATIC LANDING DOOR

FAST OPENING SPEED

OFF: VELOCIDAD CIERRE RÁPIDA /

FAST CLOSING SPEED

5 6

SENSIBILIDAD

FRENADA EN APERTURA

FRENADA EN CIERRE

SENSITIVITY

BRAKING IN OPENNIG

BRAKING IN CLOSING

ON / HIGH VOLTAGE

ALTA / HIGH

ESCALA REGULACIÓN POTENCIÓMETROS

_

POTENCIOMETER ADJUSTING SCALE

6

+

1

2

NORMAL OPERATION ON: PROGRAMACIÓN FIRMWARE / FIRMWARE PROGRAMMING OFF: OPERACIÓN NORMAL /

3

4

5

6

7

BANCO DE LEDS

¡

+

4

PROGRESIVA

PROGRESIVA

PROGRESSIVE

PROGRESSIVE

6

7

+

5

8

6

2

1

_

0

BAJA / LOW

LECTOR INFRARROJOS

7

ASCENSORES

+

5

8

8

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ON

4

4

ON: RESTAURAR PARÁMETROS DE FÁBRICA / FACTORY SETTING

7

5

3


8

POTENCIOMETER

SLOW CLOSING SPEED

T2H T3H C2H C4H

7

POTENCIÓMETROS /

AUTOMATIC LANDING DOOR

SLOW OPENING SPEED

OFF: VELOCIDAD APERTURA RÁPIDA /

TYPE OF DOOR

3VF REVECO-II OPERATOR

DOOR SIZE READING PROCESS

NORMAL OPERATION

OFF: PUERTA DE RELLANO AUTOMÁTICA /

MODELO DE PUERTA

OPERADOR 3VF REVECO-II /

MICROSWITCHES

ON: PROCESO LECTURA TAMAÑO PUERTA /

3 2

1

_

0

RÁPIDA / FAST

INFRA-RED RECEIVER

3 2

1

_

0

OFF

RÁPIDA / FAST

BANCO DE MICROINTERRUPTORES

(IrDA)

BANK OF MICROSWITCHES

BANK OF LEDS

NORMAL OPERATION

Description of microswitches functions

Group of leds

IRDA device for the configuration of parameters via infrared

Representative Speed-Time graph of the operator Reveco II (Eg.: Configuration of fast speed in opening and closing; and potentiometers in position 6)

Potentiometers for the analog adjustment of deceleration areas and door sensitivity

Bank of microswitches

Parametrization of opening/closing curves

OPENING

CLOSING OPENING

Maximum opening speed ....0.54 m/s. Maximum closing speed ........0.34 m/s. Opening time ..................2.86 s. Closing time......................4.03 s.

CLOSING

V1: Start-up speed (PDA) V2: Rated speed (Microswitch 3 or 4 / PDA) V3: Approach speed (PDA) V4: Stopping speed (PDA)

T1: Drive lever curve time: Door release (PDA) T2: Acceleration curve time (PDA) T3: Deceleration curve time (PDA) T4: Stopping curve time (PDA) PA: End of deceleration in opening (Potentiometer) PC: End of deceleration in closing (Potentiometer)

DISPLAY OF THE INFORMATION PROVIDED BY THE EQUIPMENT: (Leds, acoustic signals) Led Led Led Led Led Led Led

1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7:

On: The equipment is powered (230 Vac, single-phase)/ Off: The equipment is not powered. No residual-internal stress. Blinking: Encoder pulse representation. On: Operator reading clear entrance./ Blinking: Door closing at slow speed (no detection of obstacles). On: Error, overtemperature in the motor. On: Clear entrance read, not supported./ Blinking: Error in E2PROM reading. On: Error, mains voltage low./ Blinking: Error, mains voltage high. On: Error, maximum travel time exceeded in opening or closing./ Blinking: Short circuit in motor output.

Acoustic signals (buzzer): • Clear entrance reading process:During clear entrance reading:...................................... Buzzer blinking each 0.5 sec. End of clear entrance reading:- Correct (Finish OK): ........ 1 long 3-sec. whistle. - Incorrect (Finish KO): ...... Buzzer blinking each 0.1 sec. • First movement in normal operation:.......................................................................... 2 sec. of buzzer blinking each 0.1 sec. • Permanent error: ....................................................................................................... Buzzer on 0.2 sec. and off 10 sec. L Manual operation enabling (PDA):............................................................................Three short acoustic signals. L Manual operation disabling (PDA):........................................................................... Long acoustic signal.

V0.00,ENE.04

FTORIIC23VFUK

4/5


TWO-PANEL SIDE-OPENING 3VF REVECO II OPERATOR

GENERAL FEATURES • • • • • • • • • • • •

Motor control through electronic system with voltage variation through 3VF frequency variation. Reading of door position via double pulse train encoder. Traditional control interface (connection to control unit); valid for any lift control unit. Removal of final limit switches and presence-of-obstacle contacts. Retiring lever for automatic landing door actuation. Door release before opening. Automatic reading of door size. Easy access for the regulation of speeds and sensitivity to obstacles. Mechanical elements reduction. State-of-the-art electronic components, 90% of them being superficially assembled. New supporting plate more rigid. Embossed Polyester Epoxi Paint.

FUNCTIONAL FEATURES • Frequency inverter (3VF) for the activation of a three-phase motor. Three-phase motor features. Type 125/40 IEC-34 900 rpm, Torque 35 Kgcm, V=230V For I=1,35 A, 50 Hz, IP-20 Class F Isolation. Protecting thermoswitch (NC). • Supply: 230 Vac ± 10% single-phase; 50/60 Hz. • Conventional control interface: • V1-V2: Single-phase power supply 230 Vac ± 10%; 50/60 Hz. • OB2-OBX: Door opening contacts. Output through voltage-free contact (NC from the factory) 30 Vdc, 4 A; 250 Vac, 2A. • C1-C2 and C3-C4: Open/close signal, according to operating modes table (A, B,.....). S Earth. S SCC: Safety contact (door series). • Includes a 16-bit Microcontroller with Three-phase PWM implementation hardware for Motor control. The Microcontroller has Flash Technology, which enables multiple in-circuit recordings. • Complies with the Community directive on electromagnetic compatibility (CD 89/336/EEC). Includes all the electronics under a single card, regardless of the model of the governing motor. The response against the requirements in force concerning EMC (Electromagnetic Compatibility) is significantly improved. • Parameter adjustment through microswitches and potentiometers (Analog Adjustment). Microswitches: • Door size reading: the equipment reads door size and automatically calculates acceleration and deceleration ramps, without setting the parameters. All the factory-defined adjustment parameters are reestablish. • Automatic or semi-automatic landing door configuration. • Opening speed (slow or fast). • Closing speed (slow or fast). • Door model (T2H/C2H/T3H/C4H). • Firmware programming. Potentiometers: • Sensitivity to obstacles. • Braking in opening: regulation of the moment when the door finishes deceleration in opening. • Braking in closing: regulation of the moment when the door finishes deceleration in closing. • IRDA configuration (Infra-Red Data Acquisition) for parameters reading and re-setting via infrared, through PAD device operating from the landing. • Door size reading, type of operator and type of external door. • Acceleration and deceleration zones. • Opening (Fast/Slow): • Speeds in the different periods. • Times in the curves of the different periods. • Closing (Fast/Slow) • Speeds in the different periods. • Times in the curves of the different periods. • Operating mode. • Torque in opening. • Total lack of noise in the motor when using a switching frequency above the audible range. It operates in closed loop. It has incremental double pulse train encoder enabling to know the direction of door movement, position and actual speed in real time. This enables removing all traditional mechanical operation switches (final limit switches, sensitivity microswitches...). It includes output through relay contact (common and NO or NC) simulating the traditional sensitivity microswitch, enabled upon detection of an obstacle in door closing or photocell cut. It is thus possible to install the operator with any control unit. Sensitivity is adjustable. • Automatic double fuse protection (independent). • It has a switch to disconnect the equipment supply and to stop doors from moving. • Includes a bank of leds and a buzzer to inform of the state of the equipment and of possible operating errors. Information supplied: • State of the equipment supply. • Representation of encoder pulses. • State of the clear entrance or door size reading process. • Error. Maximum travel time exceeded in opening or closing. • Error in E2PROM reading. • Error. Overtemperature in the motor. • Clear entrance reading not supported. • Error. Mains voltage low and high. • Short circuit in the output motor. • Permanent error. • Identification of the first movement in normal control unit. (Position reset). • Identification of the control state of the operator through PDA. • Identification of door closing in slow speed (No detection of obstacles).

V0.00,ENE.04

FTORIIC23VFUK

5/5



GENERAL DESCRIPTION 2-panel side-opening car door operator, supplied with 230 Vac single-phase voltage. It is controlled by an electronic system enabling speed regulation through 3VF frequency variation/voltage variation. Reading of door speed, position and direction of movement is carried out through double pulse encoder, integrated with the electronic circuit. There are no positioning microswitches. Views of the operator

Noteworthy innovations: • • • • • • • •

Considerable reduction in operator noise level. Elimination of vibrations and electrical noises thanks to the new VVVF control. Adjustment of braking ramps and sensitivity by potentiometers. Wide door thrust and energy range adjustment. Infra-red communication using IRDA port. Greater operational robustness (supports anomalous situations in extreme operating conditions in temperatures up to 85º and voltages up to 260 V AC). Complies with future standards for electromagnetic compatibility for the lift sector (prEN 12015:2001 and prEN 12016:2001). Temperature detecting device to protect the motor from overheating.

V2.00,ENE.04

FTORIIT23VFUK

1/5



TWO-PANEL SIDE-OPENING 3VF REVECO II AUTOMATIC CAR DOOR PLATE

Fixing distances from operator to car roof Green alignment point axis

Green alignment point of the operator

~

Car slam post

DIMENSION A (START OF CLEAR ENTRANCE)

Green alignment point

Possible special position of motor and electronic card on the opening side, in cases of double landings at 90º.

TRAVEL = CLEAR ENTRANCE +10 PLATE -98 PLATE -311

LINTEL STANDARD PANEL HEIGHT 2010

SILL

CLEAR ENTRANCE HEIGHT 2000

TOTAL HEIGHT 2460

PANEL

STANDARD CAR HEIGHT 2200

~

CAR JAMB (DOOR OPEN)

5

Installation of the operator on the car roof: 1. Horizontal regulation: • The green alignment point must be aligned with the car slam post and with the door suspension green point (Landing door). • Keep a 5 mm distance between panels, and between panels and car jamb with the door open. In MP cars install the operator at a distance of 17 mm, from the car roof rim. - In cars not manufactured by MP, the distance of 17 mm must be modified in relation with open door jamb width.

PLATE

2. Vertical regulation: • The operator is supplied already adjusted for standard MP cars, with an operator fastening height of 2200 mm, maintaining the distance of 2156±5 mm between the green alignment point of the operator and the top of the door track. S In cars with a standard door height of 2010 and other fastening heights different to 2200, adjust the height of the operator brackets, to maintain the distance of 2156±5 mm. S In cars with door heights over 2010, increase the distance of 2156 depending on the increase in door height. NOTE: RESPECT THE LINTEL DIMENSIONS AS TO AVOID INTERFERENCES IN THE OPERATOR. S In cars not manufactured by MP, it is necessary to keep the relation between the operator fixation height (2200 mm, in standard MP car) and lintel maximum measures (2160 mm height, and 21 mm wide in the 115 mm upper side), also the relation between the jamb width (37 mm in MP cars) and the distance from the car roof rim (17 mm).

DIMENSIONS (mm) : POSITIONS FOR FIXING SET SQUARES Model OR2T2XXX Version XXX

(1) (2) (3) (4)

DOOR WEIGHT (Kg)

(2)

Clear Entrance

Plate

070

700

1120

075

750

080

Motor

Dim. A (1)

F1

98

1085

20

175

1170

98

1155

20

800

1270

98

1235

085

850

1320

98

090

900

1420

100

1000

1570

PACKING Dimensions (mm)

F4

F5

F6

F7

Panels

Sill

Operator

+ Panels Standard (e=1 mm)

+Panels Optional (e=1.2 mm)

330

470

651

790

945

380

1075

36

59

62

1200x370x610

175

330

450

670

720

840

405

1150

37

61

64

1200x370x610

20

175

330

450

720

821

940

430

1225

39

64

67

1430x370x610

1305

20

175

330

450

745

870

990

455

1300

40

71

74

1430x370x610

98

1385

20

175

330

470

850

951

1090

480

1375

42

74

77

1800x370x610

98

1535

20

175

330

450

870

1000

1120

530

1525

45

79

83

1800x370x610

F2

(3)

F3

(3)

(4)

Dimension A is the distance between the start of the clear entrance and the most outstanding point (the opening end of the operator or open car panels, depending on the case). Values in shaded boxes correspond to the position of set squares, which is pre-defined at the factory. Positions of set squares are only valid in the case of special position of the motor and electronic card in the opening side, when necessary in double landing at 90º. Packing dimensions (length x width x height). Packed product weight: add 4 kg to the operator weight.

V2.00,ENE.04

FTORIIT23VFUK

2/5



Electric connection scheme: Bank of microswitches

Infrared receiver

Potentiometers

Group of Leds

LED No. 1

SERIAL PORT FOR FIRMWARE PROGRAMMING

SWITCH

U V W

P2

U TO1 V

SWITCH CONNECTION

T01 T02

LED No.1

T01,T02 (White wires): PROTECTION THERMO-SWITCH (NC)

FUSES (F1,F2) 2A F1

F2 BOX INTERNAL SIDE

OB2 OBX

V1

V2

C1

C2

M3 230 V

TO2 W

P5 CONFIGURATION OF MODE “ PRESENCE OF OBSTACLE” RELAY (NC/NO)

MOTOR

C3

C4

N.O.N.C.

MODEL OF DOOR

MOTOR PHASES

T2H/T3H (RIGHT)

U= GREY V= BROWN W= BLACK

T2H/T3H (LEFT) C2H/C4H

U= BROWN V= GREY W= BLACK

P12 SCC

DOOR SAFETY SERIES CONTACT CONNECTION (TO CONTROL UNIT)

OB2 OBX V1 V2

C1 C2 C3 C4 (*) (*)

RED

BLUE

(*) C3 AND C4 ONLY WILL BE WIRED UP WHEN OPERATING LIKE MODE: B OB2- OBX: DOOR OPENING CONTACTS 30Vdc,4 A/250 Vac, 2 A

223-CR3

222-CC3

0Vp-CC3

(**) INSERT CONTACTS GIVING DOOR OPENING COMMAND (example: photocell) 221-CC3

+24 Vdc

2-CC2

106-CH2

105-CH2

MP CONTROL UNIT

SUPPLY 230 Vac ± 10%

C1-C2 y C3-C4: OPEN/CLOSE SIGNAL, ACCORDING TO OPERATING MODE TABLE: A,B,......

223-CR3

222-CR3

GREEN-YELLOW

BLACK

ORANGE

0Vp-CR3

221-CR3

V1-V2:

PAP

2-CR2

PAP2-CR2

GREEN

(FOT)

GENERAL ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION

GREEN

BROWN 106-CR2

MP INSPECTION BOX

(**)

105-CR2

BROWN

MP ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION

SCC: CONNECTOR FOR SAFETY CONTACT (door series)

OPENING AND CLOSING OPERATING MODE MODE

Connections: C1,C2

Connections: C3,C4 ADDITIONAL SIGN : LOW CLOSING SPEED = 48 ÷220 (NO DETECTION OF OBSTACLE)

MODE: A(1)

CAM SIGNAL: OPEN DOOR .......................... CLOSE DOOR ........................

(C1-C2)= 0 (C1-C2)= 48 ÷ 220

MODE: B(2)

OPEN DOOR........................... CLOSE DOOR......................... LOW CLOSING SPEED............. NO MOVEMENT OF DOOR........

(C1,C2)= (C1,C2)= (C1,C2)= (C1,C2)=

C

RESERVED

D

RESERVED

NOTES:

(1) FACTORY-DEFINED OPERATING MODE (2) FACTORY OPERATING MODE WHEN MP ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION IS MBII (3) FOR CHANGING THE OPERATING MODE USE TERMINAL PDA (INFRARED)

0 48 ÷ 220 48 ÷ 220 0

Vac/Vdc Vac/Vdc Vac Vac Vac Vac

/ / / /

Vdc.............and Vdc ............and Vdc.............and Vdc.............and

(C3,C4)= (C3,C4)= (C3,C4)= (C3,C4)=

V2.00,ENE.04

48 ÷ 220 0 48 ÷ 220 0

Vac / Vdc.

Vac / Vdc Vac / Vdc Vac / Vdc Vac / Vdc

FTORIIT23VFUK

3/5



CONFIGURATION POSSIBILITIES: (Clear entrance, type of landing door, opening and closing speed, sensitivity to obstacles). Adhesive label for the identification of the operator controls and display of controls: MICROINTERRUPTORES /

1 2

ON: PUERTA DE RELLANO SEMIAUTOMÁTICA /

3

ON: VELOCIDAD APERTURA LENTA /

4

ON: VELOCIDAD CIERRE LENTA /


SEMI-AUTOMATIC LANDING DOOR

FAST OPENING SPEED

OFF: VELOCIDAD CIERRE RÁPIDA /

FAST CLOSING SPEED

5 6

SENSIBILIDAD

FRENADA EN APERTURA

FRENADA EN CIERRE

SENSITIVITY

BRAKING IN OPENNIG

BRAKING IN CLOSING

ON / HIGH VOLTAGE

ALTA / HIGH

ESCALA REGULACIÓN POTENCIÓMETROS

_

POTENCIOMETER ADJUSTING SCALE

6

+

1

2

NORMAL OPERATION ON: PROGRAMACIÓN FIRMWARE / FIRMWARE PROGRAMMING OFF: OPERACIÓN NORMAL /

3

4

5

6

7

BANCO DE LEDS

¡

+

4

PROGRESIVA

PROGRESIVA

PROGRESSIVE

PROGRESSIVE

6

7

+

5

8

6

LECTOR INFRARROJOS

2

1

_

0

BAJA / LOW

7

ASCENSORES

+

5

8

8

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ON

4

4

ON: RESTAURAR PARÁMETROS DE FÁBRICA / FACTORY SETTING

7

5

3


8

POTENCIOMETER

SLOW CLOSING SPEED

T2H T3H C2H C4H

7

POTENCIÓMETROS /

AUTOMATIC LANDING DOOR

SLOW OPENING SPEED

OFF: VELOCIDAD APERTURA RÁPIDA /

TYPE OF DOOR

3VF REVECO-II OPERATOR

DOOR SIZE READING PROCESS

NORMAL OPERATION

OFF: PUERTA DE RELLANO AUTOMÁTICA /

MODELO DE PUERTA

OPERADOR 3VF REVECO-II /

MICROSWITCHES

ON: PROCESO LECTURA TAMAÑO PUERTA /

3 2

1

_

0

RÁPIDA / FAST

INFRA-RED RECEIVER

3 2

1

_

0

OFF

RÁPIDA / FAST

BANCO DE MICROINTERRUPTORES

(IrDA)

BANK OF MICROSWITCHES

BANK OF LEDS

NORMAL OPERATION

Description of microswitches functions

Group of leds

IRDA device for the configuration of parameters via infrared

Representative Speed-Time graph of the operator Reveco II (Eg.: Configuration of fast speed in opening and closing; and potentiometers in position 6)

Potentiometers for the analog adjustment of deceleration areas and door sensitivity

Bank of microswitches

Parametrization of opening/closing curves

OPENING

CLOSING OPENING

Maximum opening speed ....0.54 m/s. Maximum closing speed ........0.34 m/s. Opening time ..................2.86 s. Closing time......................4.03 s.

CLOSING

V1: Start-up speed (PDA) V2: Rated speed (Microswitch 3 or 4 / PDA) V3: Approach speed (PDA) V4: Stopping speed (PDA)

T1: Drive lever curve time: Door release (PDA) T2: Acceleration curve time (PDA) T3: Deceleration curve time (PDA) T4: Stopping curve time (PDA) PA: End of deceleration in opening (Potentiometer) PC: End of deceleration in closing (Potentiometer)

DISPLAY OF THE INFORMATION PROVIDED BY THE EQUIPMENT: (Leds, acoustic signals) Led Led Led Led Led Led Led

1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7:

On: The equipment is powered (230 Vac, single-phase)/ Off: The equipment is not powered. No residual-internal stress. Blinking: Encoder pulse representation. On: Operator reading clear entrance./ Blinking: Door closing at slow speed (no detection of obstacles). On: Error, overtemperature in the motor. On: Clear entrance read, not supported./ Blinking: Error in E2PROM reading. On: Error, mains voltage low./ Blinking: Error, mains voltage high. On: Error, maximum travel time exceeded in opening or closing./ Blinking: Short circuit in motor output.

Acoustic signals (buzzer): • Clear entrance reading process:During clear entrance reading:................................................Buzzer blinking each 0.5 sec. End of clear entrance reading:- Correct (Finish OK): .................1 long 3-sec. whistle. - Incorrect (Finish KO): ...............Buzzer blinking each 0.1 sec. • First movement in normal operation:...................................................................................2 sec. of buzzer blinking each 0.1 sec. • Permanent error: ................................................................................................................Buzzer on 0.2 sec. and off 10 sec. L Manual operation enabling (PDA):................................................................................. ..Three short acoustic signals. L Manual operation disabling (PDA):................................................................................... Long acoustic signal.

V2.00,ENE.04

FTORIIT23VFUK

4/5



GENERAL FEATURES • • • • • • • • • • • •

Motor control through electronic system with voltage variation through 3VF frequency variation. Reading of door position via double pulse train encoder. Traditional control interface (connection to control unit); valid for any lift control unit. Removal of final limit switches and presence-of-obstacle contacts. Retiring lever for automatic landing door actuation. Door release before opening. Automatic reading of door size. Easy access for the regulation of speeds and sensitivity to obstacles. Mechanical elements reduction. State-of-the-art electronic components, 90% of them being superficially assembled. New supporting plate more rigid. Embossed Polyester Epoxi Paint.

FUNCTIONAL FEATURES • Frequency inverter (3VF) for the activation of a three-phase motor. Three-phase motor features. Type 125/40 IEC-34 900 rpm, Torque 35 Kgcm, V=230V For I=1,35 A, 50 Hz, IP-20 Class F Isolation. Protecting thermoswitch (NC). • Supply: 230 Vac ± 10% single-phase; 50/60 Hz. • Conventional control interface: • V1-V2: Single-phase power supply 230 Vac ± 10%; 50/60 Hz. • OB2-OBX: Door opening contacts. Output through voltage-free contact (NC from the factory) 30 Vdc, 4 A; 250 Vac, 2A. • C1-C2 and C3-C4: Open/close signal, according to operating modes table (A, B,.....). S Earth. S SCC: Safety contact (door series). • Includes a 16-bit Microcontroller with Three-phase PWM implementation hardware for Motor control. The Microcontroller has Flash Technology, which enables multiple in-circuit recordings. • Complies with the Community directive on electromagnetic compatibility (CD 89/336/EEC). Includes all the electronics under a single card, regardless of the model of the governing motor. The response against the requirements in force concerning EMC (Electromagnetic Compatibility) is significantly improved. • Parameter adjustment through microswitches and potentiometers (Analog Adjustment). Microswitches: • Door size reading: the equipment reads door size and automatically calculates acceleration and deceleration ramps, without setting the parameters. All the factory-defined adjustment parameters are reestablish. • Automatic or semi-automatic landing door configuration. • Opening speed (slow or fast). • Closing speed (slow or fast). • Door model (T2H/C2H/T3H/C4H). • Firmware programming. Potentiometers: • Sensitivity to obstacles. • Braking in opening: regulation of the moment when the door finishes deceleration in opening. • Braking in closing: regulation of the moment when the door finishes deceleration in closing. • IRDA configuration (Infra-Red Data Acquisition) for parameters reading and re-setting via infrared, through PAD device operating from the landing. • Door size reading, type of operator and type of external door. • Acceleration and deceleration zones. • Opening (Fast/Slow): • Speeds in the different periods. • Times in the curves of the different periods. • Closing (Fast/Slow) • Speeds in the different periods. • Times in the curves of the different periods. • Operating mode. • Torque in opening. • Total lack of noise in the motor when using a switching frequency above the audible range. It operates in closed loop. It has incremental double pulse train encoder enabling to know the direction of door movement, position and actual speed in real time. This enables removing all traditional mechanical operation switches (final limit switches, sensitivity microswitches...). It includes output through relay contact (common and NO or NC) simulating the traditional sensitivity microswitch, enabled upon detection of an obstacle in door closing or photocell cut. It is thus possible to install the operator with any control unit. Sensitivity is adjustable. • Automatic double fuse protection (independent). • It has a switch to disconnect the equipment supply and to stop doors from moving. • Includes a bank of leds and a buzzer to inform of the state of the equipment and of possible operating errors. Information supplied: • State of the equipment supply. • Representation of encoder pulses. • State of the clear entrance or door size reading process. • Error. Maximum travel time exceeded in opening or closing. • Error in E2PROM reading. • Error. Overtemperature in the motor. • Clear entrance reading not supported. • Error. Mains voltage low and high. • Short circuit in the output motor. • Permanent error. • Identification of the first movement in normal control unit. (Position reset). • Identification of the control state of the operator through PDA. • Identification of door closing in slow speed (No detection of obstacles).

V2.00,ENE.04

FTORIIT23VFUK

5/5

Pre-Assembled Electrical Installation For Machineroomless Lifts SCM

Technical Dossier v1.31, MAR.03 English / MIEPSCMUK

Installation • Assembly • Commissioning Use • Maintenance • Repair

TECHNICAL DOSSIER PRE-ASSEMBLED ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION FOR MACHINEROOMLESS LIFTS SCM

CONTENTS 1. GENERAL FEATURES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 2. INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 3. ELECTRIC CABINET. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1. Cabinet location and dimensions. . . . 3.2. Cabinet components. . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3. Cabinet assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

2 2 2 4

4. ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1. Electrical installation general scheme. . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2. Control panel general scheme. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.1. Identified wire connections in control panel. 4.3. Electrical protections scheme. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4. SCM electrical installation special elements. . . . . . . . . 4.4.1. Installation general lighting. . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4.2. Machine gear contact. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4.3. Car-to-guides interlock contacts. . . . . . . . . 4.4.4. Speed governor remote control. . . . . . . . . . 4.4.5. VK-2P load weighing device. . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4.6. Encoder connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4.7. Machine supply. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4.8. Shaft installation layout and wiring. . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . .

6 6 7 8 9 10 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17

5. OPTIONAL EQUIPMENTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1. Emergency electric control unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2. Terminal box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2.1. Without emergency electric control unit. 5.2.2. With emergency electric control unit. . . 5.3. Cabinet elevation system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

18 18 19 19 20 21

ANNEX I. ABBREVIATIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

22

ANNEX II. DIFFERENCES BETWEEN VERSIONS 1.21, JUN.02 AND 1.31, MAR.03. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

23

V1.31,MAR.03

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

1 / 23

. . . .

. . . . . .

. . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

MIEPSCMUK


1. GENERAL FEATURES This product is designed for installations with the following features: •Operation: electric traction drive. •Location: interior. •Machine situation: clear overhead. •Control unit cabinet situation: next to landing door, at last floor •Emergency operation: manual. •No. of lifts: 1, 2. •Rated speed: 1 m/s. •Rated load: According to table. •No. of floors: 2 to 16 •Landing: simple and double. •Control unit: MicroBASIC with 3VFMAC inverter. •Power supply: Voltage: According to table. Mains frequency: 50 Hz •Power: According to table.

RATED LOAD

# 600Kg

# 1000Kg

POWER

10CV

15CV

AVAILABLE VOLTAGES

400V

230V

400V

OUTSIDE SUPPLY CROSSSECTION (3 ONE-WIRE ROPES UNDER TUBE)

6mm2

10mm2

10mm2

EXTERNAL THERMOMAGNETIC PROTECTION

25A

32A

32A

2. INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS •Supply: on the last floor, for connection in the cabinet upper part. Features: cable cross-section and thermomagnetic protection according to table above. •Rest of requirements, as in conventional installations. Since MicroBASIC circuit board is the control unit used for this installation, only modifications in relation to our conventional product are indicated below. The rest of the information coincides with that gathered in the MicroBASIC Pre-assembled Electrical Installation dossier. 3. ELECTRIC CABINET 3.1. Cabinet location and dimensions

850

The cabinet should be installed on the last floor, next to the door frame, so that it becomes a part of it. The cabinet should be located at the side of the machine and the opening hand will correspond to the side of door where the cabinet is located. If the cabinet is installed at the right side of door, it will be a right-hand door and vice versa. General dimensions of the cabinet are shown in the figure. 3.2. Cabinet components

1410

- Upper Compartment : The installation electrical protections panel is located in this compartment, as well as all the electric elements which, in a conventional installation, are usually installed in the machine room, outside the electric cabinet. Elements necessary for the manual emergency operation are also installed here. Mains supply goes in through the upper part of this compartment and is connected to the corresponding terminals. Access to this compartment is only given both to the maintenance personnel and the building property.

2260

There are two clearly differentiated parts in this cabinet, each of them having an independent door.

- Lower Compartment : It is the equivalent to the conventional electric cabinet. The control panel is installed in this compartment. Dimensions and silent elements included in it are the main differences in relation to a standard controller. Access to this compartment must be restricted to the maintenance staff; therefore, the door is supplied with a different lock from that of the upper compartment.

180

NOTE: The figure in the right shows a right-hand controller.

385

V1.31,MAR.03

2 / 23

MIEPSCMUK


The following figure shows the electric elements layout in both parts of the cabinet and in the corresponding doors (some of these elements are optional). Cable input/output points are also indicated. This configuration may vary depending on the specifications of each installation. Drawing represents a right-hand controller. Supply connection box Mains supply input

Level indicator Alarm indicator (in multiplex installations) Upper compartment

Electrical protections

Emergency electric control unit box (optional)

CA

TC

SALH SACB

Lighting box and power socket Intercom set (optional)

Room reserved for emergency mechanism

Upper door

Speed governor remote control key Upper-lower compartment connections

Transformer

FB FL FR

BTST

AMB1 or AMB2 boards (according to installation)

Control unit relays. Fuses. Main switch. Temperature probe

Lower compartment

MicroBASIC board

Lower door

Shaft and car installation input

Shaft and car installation connections Thermal probe and brake rectifier board Braking resistence cable outputs Inverter capacitors Braking resistance connection box

Speed governor remote control

Frequency inverter SALV

Output filter Machine room connections

Level indicator battery

V1.31,MAR.03

Briefcase Contactors Machine supply input

3 / 23

MIEPSCMUK


3.3. Cabinet assembly Before installing the cabinet, a braking resistance should be installed as shown in the left figure. For that purpose, the through-bolt should be a reference and should be fixed to the rear part of the control unit using the supplied self-tapping screws. Once the resistance is installed, cables must be introduced in the through-bolt and connected to terminals "B1 B2", arranged in the controller. See 3VFMAC dossier, chapter 10 “EMC requirements”. VERY IMPORTANT: The frequency inverter should be voltage-free when making the connection. Installation of the cabinet is similar to the assembly of landing door frames, as shown in the right figure. (See fixing details in the left figure of next page). Fixing of the cabinet sides is as follows: The side adjacent to the door must be fixed to the header, if any. Otherwise, fix to the door frame; for that purpose, M6 rivet nuts are provided in each side of the cabinet, which coincide with holes both in the header and in the door frame. To fix to wall use the securing pins, which have been removed from the door frame fixing. They must be screwed on the existing rivet nuts of the free side of cabinet.

Fixed bracket

Side fixed to header Bracket fixing sections

Through-bolt (Cable inputs)

Side fixed to wall

Braking resistance

Rear part of cabinet SCM cabinet

Front view of lower compartment

B2 B1

SCM cabinet support (Similar to door track support)

Braking resistance cable output, right hand.

Bracket fixing sections

Braking resistance cable output, left hand.

V1.31,MAR.03

Fixed bracket

4 / 23

MIEPSCMUK


When doors have a special height (clear entrance: 2100, 100mm higher than standard height), it is necessary to place an additional supplement on the cabinet upper part, so as to close the hole between the upper part of cabinet and the roof (see right figure).

Vertical fixing detail (rear view)

Supplement for closing the hole

Upper part

Together with the documentation you will find the following electrical danger sticker. Once the cabinet is installed, put it at the door of each cabinet compartment.

EN 60204 - 1 COLOCAR EN PUERTA DE ARMARIO ELÉCTRICO LOCATE AT ELECTRIC CABINET DOOR POSER SUR LA PORTE DE L'ARMOIRE ELECTRIQUE AN DER SCHALTSCHRANKTÜR ANBRINGEN LOKATIE OP DE BESTURINGSKAST DEUR COLOCAR NA PORTA DO ARMÁRIO ELÉCTRICO METTERLA NELLA PORTA DEL QUADRO DI MANOVRA

Lower part

V1.31,MAR.03

Ν Α Τ Ο Π Ο Θ ΕΤΗ Θ ΕΙ ΣΤΗ Ν Π Ο Ρ Τ Α Τ Ο Υ Π ΙΝ Α Κ Α Χ Ε ΙΡΙΣΜ ΟΥ

5 / 23

MIEPSCMUK


4. ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION 4.1. Electrical installation general scheme The electrical installation does not vary much from the conventional installation. The following schemes give an overview of the elements layout and connections, as well as the particular wiring of the upper and lower compartments. Special care should be taken to the shaft wiring installation, since the installation electromagnetic compatibility could be affected and it could also prevent car or doors from moving. This scheme shows how ropes must be installed to avoid the above-mentioned problems. Through solid raceway

R,S,T,N,t supply Machine light

Upper final limit switch Through slotted raceway

Machine Upper terminal stopping switch

Cabinet

3rd Floor

U, V, W motor supply

Travelling cables String of lights (optional)

2nd floor

Lower terminal stopping switch Shaft installation

Lower final limit switch

1st floor

V1.31,MAR.03

6 / 23

MIEPSCMUK

BAT +

Upper rail

12

+

CLN

-

KRL 11

PIN 207

A1

A2

KRL

A1

KRREV A2

208

K1

11

14

K1

20Vs

0Vdc 24Vdc

TS

INH 220Vp

83 (63) 84 (64)

0

BTST

Us 14 11 A1 A2

208CC2 FP

Identified rope. Connect to the Intermediate rail travelling cable CCA_ CC2 group

KRNS

61 (21)

62 (22) 61 (21)

62 (22)

1 2 3 4 5

K2

A1

KRNS A2

PIN 103 A1

A2

KSG

K1

0Vs 20Vs 60Vs 48Vs 80Vs 110Vs

FL

CHA_ CCA_

0Vp 220Vp 380Vp

-

L1

T2

L2

T3

L3

B 2

1

0 Vdc

K2

KRSE

C

53

54

CBC_

8

MBAS

KRET

12

COND

T2 T1

Intermediate rail

FAL

7 MK2P KRFR 24 Vdc 2

QIG 6A

+24Vdc

+ 24 Vdc

KRREV

de 11

de 12

54

24

11 12 KRNS

K1

21

A

53

Green

Yellow

Brown

White Earth with flange

+ - C1+ C1- C2+ C2-

CENC

Lower rail

T1

T2

C1-

C1+

5

4

3

2

KRL3

C6

CE + CE -

37

36

19

18

17

16

15

14

13

12

11

U V W C1 C2 R S T B1 B2

C2+

M 1

C2-

MIEPSCMUK

Intermediate rail

6(34)

SALV

CRL RL2 RL1

TRM

8(31)

3(14)

KRFR 1(11)

T1

L3

KRFR

L2

T3

48Vs 0Vs 60Vs 110Vs 0Vp 220Vp

L1

T2

LE-

GRL LE+

BYT11 - 1000

In case of cam only

2

1

Lower rail

U V W

T1

KRLE

14

t

C

GRF

14

K2

13

+ 13 14

R S T

11

Upper rail

0Vp 0Vs 48Vs 220Vp 60Vs 110Vs

-

-

FB

A2

KRLE A1

A1

KRSE A2

A1 K1 A2

A1 K2 A2

3VFMAC1 - 10 / 15 (400Vac) SERIE F

+24Vdc L+

20Vs +24Vcc 60Vs 220Vp 110Vs 0Vcc 0Vs 0Vp

A1

K2 A2

1

RVAR 36V

*

(-)

(+) (-)

(+)

+24Vdc

32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17

A1

K1 A2

2

Lower rail

~1

~2

RK

RK

10CV-220V and 15CV-380V 3VFMAC 34 35

~1

~2

1

j

34

9

202 302

A

A 2

k

35

3VFMAC1

5

KRSE

11

KSG

302 402 RD

CHA_

A

CCA_

B2 B1

+5Vdc

BYT11-1000

A

Intermediate rail

EM1 EM2 TS1 TS2 206 204 0 220

7 / 23

V1.31,MAR.03

14

11_CC1

BYT11-1000

In case of MES only

CRD

EM2*

A 111CC1

0Vdc L-

MicroBASIC

BYT11-1000

0Vdc

0Vdc 208 RD 111/B11X/S

208CC2

Carril superior

402 502 602

PIN103

i h g f e d c b a

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

91 107 216

CCS Intermediate rail

+

TECHNICAL DOSSIER

PRE-ASSEMBLED ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION FOR MACHINEROOMLESS LIFTS SCM

4.2. Control panel general scheme


4.2.1. Identified wire connections in control panel The right figure shows a raceway inside which a series of identified wires should be connected once you have finished the electrical installation. These flag-type identifications show the corresponding connector and terminal where the spare wire must be connected, generally to MicroBASIC board connectors. Detail A: Identified wires connection

A

CC2 MICROBASIC

Identified wires are located here

208

Conectar a: Connect to:

Conectar a: Connect to:

208 - CC2

208 - CC2 Example of an identified wire

Identified wires, which can be found according to the requirements or options of the installation, are: •All installations: < 208 - CC2 (NOTE: This wire shall have a quick coupling for connection to wire 208 of shaft installation). •In installations with emergency electric control unit:

< <

11x/S - CC1 11_/B - CC1

•In installations with double row of magnets: < 203 - CC2 •In installations with fire-brigade operation: < 10 - CH1 < 9 - CC1 (in case of fire-brigade keyswitch in car) •In installations with imminent departure, coming light, gong at each floor, multiplexed display: < A - CH1 < B - CH1 < C - CH1 < D - CH1 •In installations with approach with open doors: < 00 - CC2 • In installations compliant with DM236 (Italy): < 105 - CH1 •Besides:

< < <

In each shaft installation there is another identified wire (208 - CC2) which should be connected to one of the other two wires getting to this terminal, through the quick connector supplied with it. Other wires may be connected if installation so requires. In this case, they should be indicated in the specific documentation of each installation. In all cases, two wires should be connected to each of the terminals indicated, that wired at the factory and the identified wire to be connected by the installer himself.

V1.31,MAR.03

8 / 23

MIEPSCMUK


4.3. Electrical protections scheme

Earth terminal

SUPPLY

R S T N t

F

N

R

S

T

N

FA FF

R

S

T

R

S

T

QF QAH

F

Shaft lighting

N

F

QAC

N

QASM

Car lighting

210H 212H

FNH

N

Cabinet lighting

210C 212C

210A 212A

FNC

SALH

CAH

F

211H 212H NOA NCA

FNA SALC

CAC

211C 212C

CAA

211A 212A

Upper compartment Lower compartment

R S T

t

Earth terminal

V1.31,MAR.03

9 / 23

MIEPSCMUK


4.4. SCM electrical installation special elements The electrical installation includes certain elements and the wiring, which the traditional installation does not have. 4.4.1. Installation general lighting LIGHTING BOX

Lighting box internal circuitry

210C 212C

210A 212A

FNC

FNA

SHA1

FNA

FNH

FNC

210H 212H

FNH 210C

212C 210H

SALC

5A / 250 Vac

212H

210A

IF1 IF2

212A

SALH

10A / 250 Vac

Microswitch at upper cabinet door

SALC

XHA1

Reactance under level indicator raceway

SALH

XF11 CAH

211A 212A

211H 212H NOA NCA

211H 212H NOA NCA

CAC

CAA

211C 212C

211A 212A

R1

212 211

211C 212C

Fluorescent tube

IF1 IF2

CAA

212 211

CAH

CAC

XF12

HA1 212 211

TCA

212 211

S1 Power socket

To lower compartment through side top hat section

Upper compartment

NCA NOA 212 211

212 211

Lower compartment

212 211

SHA2

CAH'

Microswitch at upper cabinet door

CAC' CAA' IF1 IF2

A

NCA NOA 212 211

212 211

211 212 CA NOA NCA

211 212

212 211

XHA2

211 212

211 212

CAH

211 212

211 212 CA NOA NCA

212 211

XF22

CAC

S2

211 212

HA2 212 211

RB'

Fluorescent tube

XF31 R3

212 211

CAM RB

Fluorescent tube

XF21 R2

IF1 IF2

212 211

211 212

212 211

211 212

212 211

211 212

HAM

212 211

HA3

Set of reactances and starters located next to the inverter input filter, under MicroBASIC board.

HRB'

TCF HRB

212 211

XF32 S3

SALH Pit box

Shaft and car installation

As to ensure sufficient light in the machine area, a screen should be installed on it, which will be enabled with the rest of the shaft lighting. Fixing of the screen will be made with the rings, plugs and hooks supplied with it and following the instructions in the inside. Fix the earth wire to the controller plate with a self-tapping screw.

HAC Car roof

TCC

EM1 EM2

U V W t

CAM

Detail A

BAT

V1.31,MAR.03

10 / 23

MIEPSCMUK


4.4.2. Machine gear contact Wiring should be connected to a contact located on the machine, which in case of manual emergency operation, prevents movement of the machine during rescue operation. Figure shows connection of this contact to controller. A rope is provided together with the supply to perform this connection.

Lower compartment

U V W t

EM1 EM2

Machine gear contact

SEM

Rope supplied

BAT

When this contact does not exist, fix a jumper between terminals EM1 and EM2. Lower compartment

SEM

12 mB 12 mB

8 mB

EM1 EM2 TS1 TS2 0V 220 206 204

EM1

8 mB

EM2

SM SM connector located on the left-hand bottom part of the control panel, with the rest of connectors corresponding to motor connections.

Wiring is different when installation includes Emergency Electric Control Unit (see point 5.1).

V1.31,MAR.03

11 / 23

MIEPSCMUK


4.4.3. Car-to-guides interlock contacts Wiring must be connected to 2 contacts preventing car from moving when locked on the guides during the machine maintenance operations. In principle, they should only be used in Macpuarsa complete lifts. In other cases, they should be bridged. Wiring and electric schemes Car interlock contacts

SEC2

SEC1 Inspection box

102

Safety gear contact

Speed governor contact (in case it is in the car) Hatch contact

Interlock 2 contact

Inspection box travelling cable To controller

Interlock 1 contact

STOP

SIR

Slack rope contact

SPRS

220

SPRB

Inspection box

Safety series:

Inspection box PCB MicroBASIC

110 Vs

FM 15

RMT1 5

6

PCB MicroBASIC

106

Machine room

SAC

SEM 12 EM1

EM2

SLVC

SCTC

SEC2

SIR SPRS

SCE

SPRB

Shaft

Shaft

105

104

STOP

SEC1 SAFC

8 102

Car

SCC

Car

SP

STOPF

Shaft

STLH

103

SFI

SFS

SCTH

* STLH

SLVH 220

PIN 103

* Double speed governor voltage contact in shaft. VERY IMPORTANT: Before closing the interlock bolts, make sure the installation is under inspection mode. Likewise, before opening, check it remains under inspection mode. Inspection box is provided with ropes for connection of all these safety elements, except for that of the speed governor in car, which is only supplied on request. In case some of these elements do not exist, fix the appropriate jumpers. In case of Macpuarsa complete lift, the slack-rope contact does not exist, so a jumper should be fixed in both cables.

V1.31,MAR.03

12 / 23

MIEPSCMUK


4.4.4. Speed governor remote control To facilitate speed governor tests, controller is provided with remote control with a 3-position switch and automatic return to OFF central position. It is actuated using a key. Turning the key clockwise enables operation signal and when turned anti-clockwise it enables reset signal. Should the speed governor not require reset signal, do not connect the corresponding terminal. The installer should decide which speed governor coil is actuated or reset in his installation. On request, the speed governor may be located inside the car instead of shaft. Wiring and electric schemes Control panel wiring

0 Vp*

220 Vp* FL (2A)

OFF

SALV

Lower compartment Keyswitch located on raceway cover in lower compartment

RL1 RL2 CRL

High rail

SALV

CHA_

CRL Pink White RL2 Green RL1

CRL RL2 RL1

L2

XRLV

CHA_

CRL RL2 RL1

CCA_

L1

Shaft installation Green RL1 White Pink RL2

CRL

Travelling cable

CCA_

Blue

RL1 RL2 CRL

Black Brown

XRLV

CRL RL2 RL1

Blue

RL1 RL2 CRL

RL1 RL2 CRL

Black Brown SALV L1 L2

Inspection box In case of speed governor in car

* Remote control coil voltage may vary depending on order. The following table shows the expected operation of the speed governor remote control: SALV TURNING DIRECTION

FUNCTION

LIVE TERMINAL

CLOCKWISE

INTERLOCK

RL1

ANTICLOCKWISE

RESET

RL2

In Macpuarsa complete lift installations, do not connect RL2.

V1.31,MAR.03

13 / 23

MIEPSCMUK


4.4.5. VK-2P load weighing device All installations of this kind must have this load weighing device, so as to optimize the speed inverter features. Wiring and general scheme:

AL-C

MENU

AL-S AUX

SERIE VK

MACPUARSA

Load weighing device VK-2P on car roof

SENSOR

RS-485

AL-C

AL-S

VK-2P Kg

MALLA

- IN

+ IN

EXC -

EXC +

1

2

4

3

220 Vac

6 5

-

HOLD

+

T1 T2

ConF=1 (Normally energized overload and complete relay) Note: the front side of connectors is here represented, but connection is carried out by turning these connectors.

MALLA -IN +IN EXC-EXC+

S6

S4 C3

C1

T2 T1

D+ D-

INH INH 220 0Vp

Connect gauges

Car control station Plate on filter CBC_

CBC_ T1 T2

T1 T2

Intermediate rail

CBC_

T2

CCS

107

DD+

CCS 216 107

91

91

91 107 216

CBS

216 107

Inspection box

91 107 216

Inspection box travelling cable INH

INH 220

220

CCA_

DD+

+24 91

(*)

Control station travelling cable

T2 T1

T1

XPC

CBC_

+24 91 107

XDSC

MACPUARSA

CRA_ 220 INH

CCA_

Lower compartment

(*) Optional connector, with MB-D display in control station only. For further information on load weighing device, see technical dossier “Load Control System VK-2P”.

V1.31,MAR.03

14 / 23

MIEPSCMUK


4.4.6. Encoder connection

ENCODER WITH LONG ROPE

* ENCODER WITH SHORT ROPE

Control panel

Control panel

+ - C1+ C1- C2+ C2M-6 CENC

+ - C1+ C1- C2+ C2M-6 CENC

H-6

+ -

+ -

Connections to be done by the installer

C1+ C1- C2+ C2-

Red Blue White Brown Pink Black

H-6

C1+ C1-C2+ C2-

Fixing mesh to controller with aluminium clamp and screw

Fixing mesh to controller with aluminium clamp and screw

Mesh

Mesh

Stegmann HG-660 encoder rope

3 metre rope 3 braided and screened pairs supplied by MACPUARSA

To encoder C2- C2+ C1- C1+

- +

C2- C2+ C1- C1+

- +

H-7 CENC'

Black

Pink

Red

C1+ C1- C2+ C2-

White

+ -


Blue

Violet

Stegmann HG-660 encoder colours


Brown

DETAIL

Do not use

Yellow

Red

Blue

White

Brown

Pink

Black

Mesh

M-7 CENC'

To encoder

* The encoder connection must be carried out according to the rope length. Should it be a short rope, the cable supplied with the installation must be used. Should it be a long rope, (MACPUARSA lifts), it must be directly connected to the control panel.

V1.31,MAR.03

15 / 23

MIEPSCMUK


4.4.7. Machine supply

Lower compartment 211 212

+

- C1+C1- C2+ C2-

Lower rail EM1 EM2 TS1 TS2 0~ 220 206 204

Machine light earth fixing. According to 3VFMAC technical dossier, Chap. 10 “EMC Requirements”

Encoder mesh earth fixing

U V W t

Machine supply earth fixing. According to 3VFMAC technical dossier, Chap. 10 “EMC Requirements”

211 212

+

- C1+ C1- C2+ C2-

Light on the machine (See point 3.4.5) Encoder (See point 3.4.7) Machine gear (See point 3.4.2)

TS1, TS2 Thermal probe 0~, 220 Ventilation 206, 204 Brake U, V, W + earth Machine supply

Machine connection box

V1.31,MAR.03

16 / 23

MIEPSCMUK


4.4.8. Shaft installation layout and wiring RB'

CAH

TFN TFN

211 212 CA NOA NCA

CHA_

CH2

RL1 RL2 CRL

105 0Vdc 104 226 220 228

CHTF

TFN TFN

103

CH1

+24

CC2

1

208

XRB

2

XLV

3

RL1 RL2 CRL

XTL'

5 6

XRLV

1

4

RL1 RL2 CRL

3 4

7

5*

9 XCT

8

6**

XFS

7

2

0 +24 228

XAFS

0 +24 228

8 9

CE1

9

BO

10

10

CEn

11 9

9 12

XTL

13

211 212 CA NOA NCA

CAF

TC SAHF

STOPF

TFN TFN

CFTF

t 103 +24 208

XCTS

TFN TFN

17 / 23

t 103 +24 208

V1.31,MAR.03

14

211 212 CA NOA NCA

** Optional. * In case of double speed governor rope voltage contact.

1 Controller 2 String of lights 3 Speed governor contact 4 Speed governor remote control 5 Speed gov. rope voltage contact 6 Hatch contact 7 Upper final limit switch 8 Upper terminal stopping switch 9 External lock contact 10 Landing control station connector 11 Lower terminal stopping switch 12 Lower final limit switch 13 Tension pulley voltage contact 14 Pit box

0 +24 226

XFI

12

Some connections are not shown in this scheme. Only connections that may guide a correct shaft installation are represented.

XAFI

11

0 +24 226

13

MIEPSCMUK


5. OPTIONAL EQUIPMENTS 5.1. Emergency electric control unit Auxiliary box located in the cabinet upper compartment, which enables performing a rescue operation when energized. It may operate as the inspection box. It is inoperative when inspection box takes over control. NOTE: MES does bridge safety series; inspection control unit does not. Electric schemes

Lower compartment Emergency electric control unit box (M.E.S. box) Upper rail

11_ - CC1 111 - CC1 208 - CC2 0 Vdc PIN 103 8 - MBAS

11X/S 111/B RD 208 0Vdc

11X/S 111/B RD 208 0Vdc

602 502 402

602 502 402

MES

SIR'

SIR'

STOP'

SPRB'

SPRS'

SPRS'

1K5

CRD

MES box

SPRB'

SIR'

CRD

STOP'

SPRB'

SPRS'

Upper compartment STOP 208-CC2

SIR SPRB

+24 Vdc

111/B-CB SPRS

Intermediate rail

11X/S-CB

SCTC

RD 402 302

RD 402 302

SEC1 SIR

STOP

CCA

CCA

Car installation SEC2

SPRB SPRS

SAF

Inspection box

Intermediate rail SEM

STLH*

302

SCTH

Shaft installation

302 202

202

In case of MES, you will find 2 wires marked with 11x CC1 and 111 CC1, which should be connected to the controller in the terminals corresponding to CC1 female connector, once the travelling cable is installed. 11x being the upper call.

STOPF

STLH

12 - MBAS

CHA

CHA

Pit box

Safety series. Special in installations with emergency electric control unit.

Machine room

PCB MicroBASIC 110 Vs

15

FM

RMT1 5

PCB MicroBASIC 106

6

SEM 12 EM1

202

SCTH

STOP

*STLH

SIR SPRS

302

MES box

STOP'

SAFC SEC1 SEC2 SCTC

A

402

SIR'

SPRB

Car SCC

STLH EM2

Inspection box

Shaft

STOPF

Shaft 105

SCE

Shaft

Shaft 104

SP

103

SFI

SFS

SLVH 220

PIN 103

602

MES box

Car SLVC

SAC 102

8

502

SPRB'

SPRS'

*In case of double speed governor voltage contact STLH inside the shaft.

V1.31,MAR.03

18 / 23

MIEPSCMUK


5.2. Terminal box This box, together with the necessary connectors, enables commissioning of the machine and may be used for the mechanical assembly of lift, so as to move the car upwards and downwards before performing the electrical installation. Controller should be powered and connected to the machine. Connectors should be plugged to the male connectors of the cabinet lower compartment, except for the connector located in the machine room connection box, where a jumper must be fixed between terminals EM1 and EM2, as shown in both figures. Finally, terminal box should be connected to the female connector from the set of connectors. There are two types of terminal box: 5.2.1. Without emergency electric control unit

CC2 H - 16

CH2 H - 16

t 103 t 228 220 226 104 0Vcc 105

t 220 102 208

105 106

H-5 220 S 208 B 102

2

CC1 H - 16

+24 120 119 118 117 116 115 114 113 112 111

M-5 220 S 208 B 102

t

30m 5x0.75 mm2 + t rope

STOP

Assembly control

(*)

Machine room connection box

EM1 EM2

Lower compartment

(*) Connect to last call.

V1.31,MAR.03

19 / 23

MIEPSCMUK


5.2.2. With emergency electric control unit

CH2 H - 16

CC2 H - 16 t

103 t 228 220 226 104 0Vcc 105

t 220 102 208

105 106

H-5 202 S 208 B 302

2

CC1 H - 16

MicroBASIC board

+24 120 119 118 117 116 115 114 113 112 111

M-5 202 S 208 B 302

t

30m 5x0.75 mm2 + t rope

STOP

Assembly control

(*)

302 202

EM1 EM2

RD 402 302 Lower compartment

(*) Connect to last call. Once this control is no longer necessary, disconnect all female parts shown in the figures and remove jumper EM1 and EM2. Then connect the rest of the electrical installation.

V1.31,MAR.03

20 / 23

MIEPSCMUK


5.3. Cabinet elevation system Optionally, a set of pieces is supplied enabling elevation of the electric cabinet in the shaft, using a hoist, for its location at the last floor. This assembly includes two plates, bracing the cabinet closing upper plate, and a DIN580 M12 ring and its corresponding nut, thus enabling attaching an appropriate sling. Assembly of this system on the electric cabinet is shown in the following figure. DIN580 ring

Plate

Plate

Nut

The fixing hole of this assembly is protected with a rubber plug. Once the elevation operation is performed, this plug should be put back into place, as to avoid the entrance of dirt into the cabinet.

V1.31,MAR.03

21 / 23

MIEPSCMUK


ANNEX I. ABBREVIATIONS A ARL

Speed governor remote control key

QF

Power thermomagnetic switch

QIG

Control unit general switch

RB

Connector of string of lights in shaft

RB’

Connector of string of lights in car

RK

Rectifier of contactor K1 and K2

R

B BAT

Battery

BTST

Temperature probe

C CAA

Cabinet lighting connector

RMT1

Live control unit relay

CAC

Car lighting connector

RVAR

Varistor

CAH

Shaft lighting connector

R1/2/3

Reactance

CAM

Machine lighting connector

CBC

Control station travelling cable auxiliary connector

SAC

Safety gear contact

CC2

Car travelling cable connector

SAFC

Slack-rope contact

CCA_

Car auxiliary connector

SALC

Car lighting switch

CCS

Overload connector

SALH

Shaft lighting switch

CENC

Encoder connector

SALV

Speed governor remote control switch

CH2

Shaft installation connector

SCC

Car door lock series

CHA_

Shaft auxiliary connector

SCE

Landing door lock series

CLN

Level indicator connector

SCM

Machineroomless lift

COND

Capacitor

SCTC

Car hatch contact

CRD

Emergency electric control unit connector

SCTH

Shaft hatch contact

SEC1/2

Car interlock contact

S

F FA

Lighting differential

SEM

Machine gear contact

FAL

Power supply

SFI

Lower final limit switch contact

FB

Battery fuse

SFS

Upper final limit switch contact

FF

Power differential

SHA1/2/3

Cabinet lighting microswitch

FL

Speed governor remote control fuse

SIR

Inspection switch

FM

Control unit fuse

SIR’

Emergency electric control unit switch

FNA

Cabinet lighting screwed connector

SLVC

Speed governor contact in car

FNC

Car lighting screwed connector

SLVH

Speed governor contact in shaft

FNH

Shaft lighting screwed connector

SM

Machine room connection box

FP

VK-2P load weighing device supply fuse

SP

Landing door presence series

FS

Output filter

SPRB

Inspection down pushbutton

SPRB'

Emergency electric control unit down pushbutton

G GRF

Brake rectifier board

SPRS

Inspection up pushbutton

GRL

Cam rectifier board

SPRS'

Emergency electric control unit up pushbutton

STLH

Speed governor tension pulley contact

H HAC

Car lighting

STOP

Inspection box stop button

HAM

Machine lighting

STOP'

Emergency electric control unit stop button

HRB

String of lights in shaft

STOPF

Pit box stop button

HRB’

String of lights on car roof

S1/2/3

Starter

HA1/2/3

Cabinet lighting

H-X

X-pole female connector

TC

Power socket

TCA

Cabinet power socket

K1

Operation contactor

TCC

Car power socket

K2

Operation contactor

TCF

Pit power socket

KRET

Star-delta starting relay

TRM

Control unit transformer

KRFR

Brake relay

TS

Thermal probe

KRL

Level relay

KRL3

Brake control relay (3VF)

XFxx

Cabinet fluorescent tube connector

KRLE

Cam relay

XHA1/2

Cabinet lighting connectors

KRNS

Rated speed relay

KRREV

Inspection relay

3VFMAC

Frequency inverter

KRSE

Direction relay

KSG

Safety series relay

MES

Emergency electric control unit

M-X

X-pole socket plug

QAC

Car lighting thermomagnetic switch

QAH

Shaft lighting thermomagnetic switch

QASM

Machine room lighting thermomagnetic switch

T K

X

M

Q

V1.31,MAR.03

22 / 23

MIEPSCMUK


ANNEX II. DIFFERENCES BETWEEN VERSIONS 1.21, JUN.02 AND 1.31, MAR.03. •Point 1: New powers 10CV - 230V and 15CV - 400V are included in the general features. •Supply wiring requirements are included. •Point 3.3: A supplement for closing the hole in case of door special height and an electric danger sticker to be put by the client are included. •Point 4.2: Wiring is modified for the above-mentioned new powers. •Point 4.4.1: Scheme is modified, including old point 3.4.5. •Points 4.4.3 and 5.1: Scheme is modified, correcting the wiring, which was wrong. •Point 4.4.8: Scheme is modified, including more connectors. •Point 5.3: Instructions are included on the cabinet elevation system.

V1.31,MAR.03

23 / 23

MIEPSCMUK

VK - 2P Load Control System

Technical Dossier v1.30, MAY 02 English / VK2PUk

Installation • Assembly • Commissioning Use • Maintenance • Repair

TECHNICAL DOSSIER VK-2P Load Control System

GENERAL TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 • INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1 Main Features of the VK - 2P Equipment . . . . . 1.2 Selection of the Load Cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3 Description of the VK - 2P Equipment Operation

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

3 3 3 3

Chapter 2 • DIMENSIONS AND DESCRIPTION OF THE WIRING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 2.1 Dimensions and Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 2.2 Description of the Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Chapter 3 • PROGRAMMING AND CALIBRATION 3.1 Access Keys to the Menu Parameters . . 3.2 Modification of a Parameter . . . . . . . . . 3.3 Programming Structure (Menus) . . . . . . 3.4 Equipment Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5 Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6 Auxiliary Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.7 Rapid Programming Guide . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

5 5 5 5 6 7 7 7

Chapter 4 • ELECTRIC FEATURES 4.1 Electric Features . . . . . . 4.2 Change of Fuse . . . . . . . 4.3 Low-consumption Mode .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

8 8 8 8

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

Chapter 5 • ERROR DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Chapter 6 • LOAD CELL INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 6.1 Load Cell TCMP + VK - 2P Installation Under the Car . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Chapter 7 • LOAD INDICATOR FOR VK - 2P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 7.1 MB-D Car Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Chapter 8 • DECLARATIONS OF CONFORMITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

v1.30, MAY 02

Page 2 / 13

VK2PUK


Chapter 1 • INTRODUCTION VK - 2P is a load control system for lifts and goods lifts. Its main function is immobilizing the car when it is overloaded or warning the control panel when the car is full, in order to avoid unnecessary stops. It has another function, that of indicating the load to a 3VFMAC frequency inverter, through a RS - 485 interface, to regulate the speed according to the load. In short, VK - 2P is not only a safety equipment, but it also contributes to comfort and rapidity in the service. There are three elements comprising the load control system: 1. Control equipment . . . . . (VK - 2P). 2. Load cell . . . . . . . . . . . . (Model TCMP). 3. Car display . . . . . . . . . . (Optional). 1.1 Main Features of the VK - 2P Equipment The main features of the VK - 2P weight controller include: • • • • • •

Conditioning outputs for display in the car, 220Vac supply, inhibition input and chain compensation, communication RS - 485. 4-digit weight indicator. Supply capacity up to 16 cells, model TCMP 800. Load adjustment without introducing a known weight in the car. Two relay contact outputs. Complete load and overload alarm. Output for remote display (2 wires with no polarity).

1.2 Selection of the Load Cell TCMP 800 (load cell between frame and car) This measuring system is recommended for new lifts, since it is easy to install when assembling the car. It is very accurate (0.1% FULL SCALE), since the guides friction does not influence the load measure. Besides, it is the only system enabling speed regulation according to the load (operates with 3VFMAC). They can be supplied individually (requesting TCMP 800/I), or in groups of 4 pre-wired cells (requesting TCMP 800/G). This group of 4 pre-wired units is the basic configuration and enables measuring loads not exceeding 3.200 kg (Car weight + Useful load). Should it be necessary to measure higher loads (car weight + useful load is higher than 3.200 kg) individual cells or more groups of 4 cells may be added. Example: For lifts where the car weight + the useful load is lower than 4.800 kg a set of 4 cells besides 2 individual cells could be installed; should weight be lower than 6.400 Kg 2 groups of 4 could be installed. The maximum allowed is 16 cells TCMP 800 or 4 groups of 4 pre-wired cells TCMP 800. In case of a malfunction in any cell of the pre-wired group (TCMP 800/G), cut the rope joining it to the group, replace with an individual cell and then connect as shown in page 10 of this Technical Dossier. 1.3 Description of the VK - 2P Equipment Operation VK - 2P is an electronic equipment that obtains the weight of the car, processing the signal received from a load cell and then informs the 3VFMAC frequency inverter about this weight, every time it requests it, thus changing the state of the output relays, when the load exceeds the values programmed for each function. Relays inform of complete lift and overloaded lift.

v1.30, MAY 02

Page 3 / 13

VK2PUK


Chapter 2 • DIMENSIONS AND DESCRIPTION OF THE WIRING 2.1 Dimensions and Wiring 153 139

11 Ø 3.5

42

MENU

MACPUARSA RS-485

EXC.+ EXC.+IN -IN MALLA

SENSOR

AL-S 6

AL-C 3

4

1

2 T1

kg.

86

SERIE VK

72

35

AL-C AL-S AUX.

VK-2P 220 ~ HOLD

5

T2

Red Black Green White Mesh

41 Overload

RS-485 Complete

Mains

Inhibition Voltage 24 - 220 Vac / Vdc

Relay output

kg.

Car Display

Load Cell

2.2 Description of the Wiring AL - C (Complete Relay) Should the load programmed in parameter ‘ AL - C ‘ be exceeded, its state changes. AL - S (Overload relay) Should the load programmed in parameter ‘ AL - S be exceeded, its state changes. The quiescent state of the relays can be modified in parameter ‘ ConF ‘. RS - 485 (2-wire communication) The car weight is transmitted to the 3VFMAC equipment through it. HOLD (Enabled with either alternating or direct voltage between 24V and 220V). When the lift is in operation, the weight measurement is not accurate, relays could be enabled and the car display could be unstable. Enabling the HOLD input when the lift starts operating, the weight measurement is blocked, the display blinks and relays as well as the car display keep their state until this input is disabled, after the lift stops. Car Display Output There are two types of output, which can be selected with parameter ‘ ConF ‘: a) Output energized in a flashing way, when overload occurs. The output has a polarity and can be valid to enable a led and a buzzer (direct current 7,5V max.75mA). b) MB-D progressive display enabling (two-wire connection with no polarity).

v1.30, MAY 02

Page 4 / 13

VK2PUK


v1.30, MAY 02

Page 5 / 13

VK2PUK


Chapter 3 • PROGRAMMING AND CALIBRATION 3.1 Access Keys to the Menu Parameters The equipment has a menu to access the adjustment parameters.

By pressing this key successively, all programmable parameters are displayed in a cyclic way. To go back to the weight display, press this key until getting to the end of the menus. Press for 2 seconds. When a specific parameter is displayed, press this key in order to modify it.

When a specific parameter is shown, pressing this key the display shows its content.

3.2 Modification of a Parameter 1) 2) 3) 4)

Press the ‘MENU’ key successively until the desired parameter is displayed. Press the ‘Î’ key to go to the parameter modification option; the left digit will be blinking. Introduce the desired value in the display using the ‘Î’ ‘Ï‘ keys. Press ‘ MENU ‘ twice.

When pressed for the first time, the value is introduced and the display is blinking for 10 seconds. The second time the operation is confirmed. 1) If ‘ MENU ‘ is not pressed for a second time, before intermittency ends, the operation is not stored and the display shows the parameter again. 2) In order to modify parameters ‘ PESO ‘ and ‘ CEro ‘, see point 3.4 (Equipment Calibration). 3.3 Programming Structure (Menus) Weight Display

Complete alarm Overload alarm Reset adjustment Adjustment with known weight Adjustment with direct load cells Car weight compensation Car display and relay state configuration

v1.30, MAY 02

Page 6 / 13

VK2PUK


3.4 Equipment Calibration This section is necessary in order for the equipment to know the relation between the cell signal and the weight introduced in the car. There are to ways of calibrating the equipment : I)

Standard Calibration (suitable for all types of cells). 1)

Reset : a) b)

Go to the menu option ‘ CEro ‘. Make sure the car is empty and press the ‘Î‘ key. Then press ‘ MENU ‘, while the display is flashing, to confirm the reset. The operation starts with a countdown and then, the display will show parameter ‘PESO‘. If ‘ MENU ‘ is not pressed before intermittency ends, the operation is not stored and the display shows parameter ‘ CERO ‘ again.

2)

Weight Adjustment : a) b)

Go to the menu option ‘ PESO ‘. Introduce a known weight inside the car and press ‘Î‘.

The weight should be at least 50% of the maximum. c) d)

Introduce the value of the weight placed inside the car with keys ‘Î‘ ‘Ï‘. To save the value press ‘ MENU ‘ twice (the value is stored). The display will then show the following adjustment parameter: ‘ CELL ‘. If ‘ MENU ‘ is not pressed for the second time before intermittency ends, the operation is not stored and the display will show parameter ‘ PESO ‘ again.

II ) Calibration for cells between frame and car (model TCMP). It is not necessary to introduce a known weight in the car, in order to carry out this operation. 1)

Reset (as in standard calibration).

2)

Weight Adjustment : a) b) c)

Go to the menu option ‘ CELL ‘. Press ‘Î‘ to access and assign the value. Introduce the value of the cell load with keys ‘Î‘ ‘Ï‘. This information is shown in the cable end, and corresponds to the factory calibration value.

d)

Press the ‘ MENU ‘ key twice in order to save the value (the value is stored). The display will then show the following adjustment parameter: ‘ CADE ‘. If ‘ MENU ‘ is not pressed for a second time before intermittency ends, the operation is not stored, and the display will show parameter ‘ CELL‘ again.

v1.30, MAY 02

Page 7 / 13

VK2PUK


3.5 Alarms Alarms are the load levels in which the state of relays changes. In order to adjust them no weight is necessary; just programme them with the keyboard. Load value from which the lift is complete. When the load in the lift exceeds that value, the complete relay’s state changes and the MB-D car display will switch on up to the head.

Load value from which the lift is overloaded. When the load in the lift surpasses that value, the overload relay’s state changes and the MB-D car display will indicate, both visually and acoustically, that the lift is overloaded. In the case a led is connected to a display output, it will intermittently switch on. See point 3.2 (Modification of a Parameter) for details about the alarm adjustment. 3.6 Auxiliary Functions Configuration

Relay State

Display Output

ConF = 0

ON

Intermittent Enabling ( LED )

ConF = 1

ON

Progressive Enabling ( MB-D )

ConF = 2

OFF

Intermittent Enabling ( LED )

ConF = 3

OFF

Progressive Enabling ( MB-D )

3.7 Rapid Programming Guide This section describes how to configure rapidly the most important parameters of the equipment. a)

Press ‘ MENU ‘ successively to search the parameter to be modified and press ‘Î‘ to access this parameter.

b)

Modify using ‘Î‘ ‘Ï‘.

c)

To save, press ‘ MENU ‘ twice.

d)

The most important parameters to be configured: : 1º. Introduce in ‘ AL C ‘ the load value from which the activation of the complete alarm is required. 2º. Introduce in ‘ AL S ‘ the load value from which the activation of the overload alarm is required. 3º. Reset the equipment with the lift empty : • Go to parameter ‘ CEro ‘ • Press ‘è‘ ‘ MENU ‘ and a countdown starts. 4º. Adjust the weight : • Put a weight in the car (at least 50% of the maximum weight) • Introduce the value of the load put in the car in ‘ PESO ‘. • The equipment starts a countdown. It is important to make the zero adjustment before the weight adjustment operation

v1.30, MAY 02

Page 8 / 13

VK2PUK


Chapter 4 • ELECTRIC FEATURES 4.1 Electric Features Model : . . . . . Rated voltage : Rated current : Rated frequency Fuse : . . . . . . .

.. .. .. : ..

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

VK - 2P. 220V. 60 mA. 50 - 60 Hz. 100 mA.

4.2 Change of Fuse 1)

Disconnect the equipment.

2)

Open the equipment by removing the 5 screws holding the back cover.

3)

Get the circuit out of the box and change the fuse installed in a vertical bayonet fuse carrier, next to the transformer.

4.3 Low-consumption Mode Since the display is the element which consumes the most and it is not visible, a low-consumption mode has been taken into consideration in which the display turns off showing a rotary segment to indicate it is still operative. Cases where the equipment starts operating under the low-consumption function. 1)

When connected to the mains, the equipment displays the weight for 3 minutes and in the case no key is touched, it automatically operates under low-consumption mode.

2)

When an hour has passed since the last time a key was touched.

3)

When the equipment displays the weight while pressing the key for two seconds. Press any key to exit the low-consumption function.

v1.30, MAY 02

Page 9 / 13

VK2PUK


Chapter 5 • ERROR DISPLAY ‘ Err1 ‘

Load cell wrongly connected, damaged or fractured rope. •

‘ Err2 ‘

Negative flooding. •

‘ Err3 ‘

Check cell connection. Make the zero and weight adjustment again.

Output for short-circuited car display (figure of a person). • •

‘ Err6 ‘

It is necessary to put a load cell with a higher rated value.

Polarity error. (This error is detected when the equipment adjusts the weight with the polarity of the modified cell). • •

‘ Err5 ‘

The load cell is operating in the opposite direction or is wrongly connected.

Positive flooding, the load cell is bearing a weight higher than the rated value. •

‘ Err4 ‘

Check cell connection.

Locate and remove the short circuit. Turn off the equipment (VK) and then turn it on again so that ‘ Err5‘ no longer exists in the display.

Data loss in the memory. All parameters shall be programmed again.

1)

When an error occurs, all alarms are enabled and the lift is blocked.

2)

When ‘Err5‘ occurs, the equipment is blocked and it does not transmit information via the communications port, until the short circuit is removed.

v1.30, MAY 02

Page 10 / 13

VK2PUK


Chapter 6 • LOAD CELL INSTALLATION 6.1 Load Cell TCMP + VK - 2P Installation Under the Car

TCMP 800/G

This configuration weighs the car directly, so the guides friction errors are removed. Cells may be supplied individually (requesting TCMP 800/I), or in groups of 4 pre-wired cells (requesting TCMP 800/G). This group of 4 pre-wired units is the basic configuration and enables measuring loads not exceeding 3.200 kg (Car weight + Useful load). Should it be necessary to measure higher loads (car weight + useful load is higher than 3.200 kg) individual cells or more groups of 4 cells may be added. Example: For lifts where the car weight + the useful load is lower than 4.800 kg a set of 4 cells besides 2 individual cells could be installed; should weight be lower than 6.400 Kg 2 groups of 4 could be installed. The maximum allowed is 16 cells TCMP 800 or 4 groups of 4 pre-wired cells TCMP 800. In case of a malfunction in any cell of the pre-wired group (TCMP 800/G), cut the rope joining it to the group, replace with an individual cell and connect as shown in this Technical Dossier.

ELECTRICAL CONNECTION

TCMP 800/I

Excitation ( + )

Red

Excitation ( - )

Black

( + ) IN

Green

( - ) IN

White CAR

134

31

128

M - 10

Load cell TCMP

Elastic plug

3

28

48

Cable length 5 m

A

B

160 190

Cells may be installed either with the base supported on the bedframe and the intermediate point in contact with the car or inverted.

Ø 13

44

46

Cable length 1.5 m

TCMP 800 DIMENSIONS

800 kg.

800 kg.

1

2

800 kg.

800 kg.

Cable length 5m

4

3

SET OF 4 PRE-WIRED CELLS

v1.30, MAY 02

Page 11 / 13

VK2PUK


Chapter 7 • LOAD INDICATOR FOR VK - 2P 7.1 MB-D Car Display •

Progressive display. It has a figure of a person which progressively illuminates according to the weight. When it reaches the Complete level, the figure will be completely illuminated. When it reaches the Overload level, the figure will flicker and the buzzer will be enabled.

•

This car indicator, model MB-D, is an accessory installed inside the car.

73.00

19

67.00 +0 -0.1

2

65.50

29.50

40.00

76.00

+0 -0.1

54.00

12.5

Ø 4(4Tls.)

Ø5 Ø8

2-wire connection with no parity (series VK)

2

FRONT VIEW

v1.30, MAY 02

REAR VIEW

Page 12 / 13

VK2PUK


Chapter 8 • DECLARATIONS OF CONFORMITY •

EC declaration of conformity to directive 89 / 336 / EEC regarding electromagnetic compatibility.

•

EC declaration of conformity to directive 73 / 23 / EEC of low voltage.

v1.30, MAY 02

Page 13 / 13

VK2PUK

Mac Puarsa Mrl

Recommend Documents